CLS (2016) - Automotive Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free CLS (2016) Mercedes-Benz in PDF.
User questions about CLS (2016) Mercedes-Benz
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Automotive in PDF format for free! Find your manual CLS (2016) - Mercedes-Benz and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. CLS (2016) by Mercedes-Benz.
USER MANUAL CLS (2016) Mercedes-Benz
The following online version of the Owner's Manual describes all models as well as all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific differences in the language variants are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for safety-relevant systems and functions. Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner's Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. The online version is the current valid Owner's Manual version. Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles and equipment to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner's Manual, any supplementary documents and the digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Copyright
All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics, are subject to Copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied for commercial purposes or for transmission, nor changed and used on other websites.
natural_image
Side profile of a dark Mercedes-Benz Wagon car parked in an industrial setting with bright streetlights and arched windows (no visible text or symbols)CLS
Owner's Manual
Symbols
In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols:
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.
These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.
This symbol designates an instruction that you must follow.
Several consecutive symbols indicate an instruction with several steps.
(▷ This symbol tells you where you can find page) further information on a topic.
▷▷ This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.
Dis-DisThis text indicates a message on the playplan multifunction display/multimedia display.
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you drive off for the first time, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury.
The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to:
- model
- order
- country variant
- availability
The illustrations in this manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz constantly updates its vehicles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:
- design
- equipment
- technical features
Consequently, the description may differ from your vehicle in some cases.
The following are integral components of the vehicle:
• Digital Owner's Manual
• Printed Owner's Manual
- Service Booklet
• Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner.
Your Owner's Manuals:
i Digital - in the vehicle
The Digital Owner's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains informative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function.
Printed manual - in the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the supplement for your multi-
media system from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Digital - on the internet
The online Owner's Manual provides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options.
Digital - as an app
Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides app, you can view all the information on your vehicle and multimedia system via mobile internet or download it to use without internet access. Available for smartphones or tablets.
text_image
QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable textApple® iOS
text_image
QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable textAndroid™
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides app may not yet be available in your country.
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz 1
Index 4
Digital Owner's Manual 25
Introduction 2
Operation 25
Introduction 26
Environmental protection 2
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 2
Owner's Manual 2
Operating safety 27
QR code for rescue card ......
Data stored in the vehicle ....
Copyright information 31
At a glance 32
Cockpit 32
Instrument cluster 3
Multifunction steering wheel 35
Centre console 36
Overhead control panel 3
Door control panel 40
Safety 41
Panic alarm 41
Occupant safety 41
Children in the vehicle 53
Pets in the vehicle 65
Driving safety systems 66
Protection against theft 7
Opening and closing 79
Key 79
Doors 84
Luggage compartment 86
Side windows 90
Sliding sunroof 94
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ....
Correct driver's seat position 9
Seats 97
Steering wheel 103
Mirrors 106
Memory function 108
Lights and windscreen wipers ..... 110
Exterior lighting 110
Interior lighting 114
Replacing bulbs 115
Windscreen wipers 115
Climate control 119
Overview of climate control systems ... 119
Operating the climate control system .. 121
Air vents 131
Driving and parking 132
Running-in notes 132
Driving 132
Automatic transmission 139
Refuelling 148
Parking 152
Driving tips 154
Driving systems 157
Towing a trailer 200
On-board computer and displays .... 206
Important safety notes 206
Displays and operation 206
Menus and submenus 208
Display messages 223
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 247
Multimedia system 257
General notes 257
Important safety notes 257
Function restrictions 257
Operating system 257
Stowing and features 266
Stowage areas 266
Features 274
Maintenance and care 287
Engine compartment 287
Service 291
Care 293
Breakdown assistance 300
Where will I find...? 300
Flat tyre 302
Battery (vehicle) 306
Jump-starting 309
Towing away and tow-starting 311
Electrical fuses 3 1 5
Wheels and tyres 317
Important safety notes 317
Operation 317
Winter operation 319
Tyre pressure 320
Changing a wheel 325
Wheel and tyre combinations 330
Emergency spare wheel 331
Technical data 334
Information on technical data 334
Vehicle electronics 334
Identification plates 3 3 5
Service products and capacities ...... 336
Vehicle data 342
Trailer tow hitch 344
1, 2, 3 ...
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive)
Function/notes 17
12 V socket
see Sockets
360° camera
Cleaning 296
Display in the multimedia system .. 188
Function/notes 1 8
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message 225
Function/notes 66
Important safety notes 66
Warning lamp 250
Accident
Automatic measures after an accident 53
Activating media mode
General notes 264
Activating/deactivating air-recir-
culation mode 12
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification 121
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) 215
Display message 237
Function/notes 1 9
Towing a trailer 198
Active Driving Assistance package
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) 215
Display message 236
Function/notes 1 9
Towing a trailer 200
Active light function 113
Active multicontour seat
Adjusting (on the seat) 101
Active Parking Assist
Detecting parking spaces 178
Display message 237
Exiting a parking space 180
Function/notes 1 7 7
Important safety notes 177
Parking 179
^4 Towing a trailer 181
ADAPTIVE BRAKE 74
Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes 70
Adaptive brake lights 71
Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 172
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Display message 231
Function/notes 1 1 3
Switching on/off 114
AdBlue®
Display message 234
Filling capacity 340
Important safety notes 339
Service indicator 292
AdBlue® service indicator 292
Additives (engine oil) 341
Address book
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Adjusting the volume
COMAND Online 258
Adjusting volume
Audio 20 258
Air conditioning
General notes 119
Air filter (white display message) .... 234
AIR FLOW 1 2 2
Air pressure
see Tyre pressure
Air vents
Glove compartment 131
Important safety notes 131
Rear 131
Setting 13 1
8 Setting the centre air vents 131
Setting the side air vents 13 1
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Airbag
Introduction 46
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 4
Airbags
Front airbag (driver, front passenger) 47
Important safety guidelines 4
Kneebag 47
Pelvis airbag 48
Sidebag 48
Triggering 4
Windowbag 48
AIRMATIC
Display message 2
Function/notes 1
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) 77
Switching off (ATA) 77
Switching the function on/off (ATA) 77
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ambient lighting
Setting the brightness (on-board computer) 217
Setting the colour (on-board computer) 218
AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus-
pension 173
Anti-glare film 28
Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Aquaplaning 156
Ashtray 277
Assistance display (on-board computer) 2 1 3
Assistance menu (on-board computer) 2 1 3
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ...... 2
Hiding a service message 291
Resetting the service interval display 292
Service message 291
Special service requirements ..... 292
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
2 Activating/deactivating 77
Function 7 7
Switching off the alarm 77
ATTENTION ASSIST
6 Activating/deactivating 215
Display message 235
Function/notes 190
Audio 20
Switching on/off 257
Authorised workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
1 Display message 231 see Lights
Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) 137
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) 136
Automatic headlamp mode 110
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position 143
Automatic drive program 144
Changing gear 143
DIRECT SELECT lever 140
Display message 243
Drive program display 140
Driving tips 143
6 Emergency running mode 148
Engaging drive position 142
Engaging neutral 141
Engaging park position (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 140
Engaging park position automatically 141
Engaging reverse gear 141
Engaging the park position 141
Kickdown 143
Manual drive program 145
Manual drive program (Mercedes-
2AMG vehicles) 146
Manual drive program (vehicles with Sports package AMG) 146
Overview 139
Problem (fault) 148
Program selector button 143
Pulling away 135
Selector lever 140
Starting the engine 135
Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 144
Trailer towing 143
Transmission position display ..... 140
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) 140
Transmission positions 142
Automatic transmission emer-
gency running mode 148
Auxiliary heating
Activating/deactivating 127
Important safety notes 126
Setting 219
Auxiliary heating/ventilation
Display message 245
Problem (display message) 130
Remote control 128
Setting the departure time 129
Switching on/off (on the centre console) 127
Auxiliary ventilation
Activating/deactivating 127
Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-
ing) 344
B
Back button 258
Ball coupling
Folding in 203
Folding in/out 202
Folding out 202
BAS (Brake Assist System)
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
Function/notes 67
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist
(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-
Traffic Assist)
Important safety notes 67
Battery (key)
Checking 82
Important safety notes 81
Replacing 82
Battery (vehicle)
Charging 308
Display message 233
Important safety notes 306
Jump starting 309
Belt
see Seat belts
Belt tensioner
Activation 49
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) 215
Display message 237
Notes/function 192
Trailer towing 194
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Blootooth®
Connecting a different mobile phone 261
BlueTEC (AdBlue®) 339
Bluetooth®
Searching for a mobile phone ..... 261
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Telephony 260
Bonnet
Closing 288
Display message 245
Important safety notes 287
Opening 287
Boot load (maximum) 342
Bottle holders 276
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message 227
Notes 341
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
Brake lamps
Adaptive 71
Display message 231
Brakes
ABS 66
Adaptive Brake Assist 70
BAS 67
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
Assist 67
Brake fluid (notes) 341
Display message 225
Driving tips 155
High-performance brake system .... 156
HOLD function 169
Important safety notes 155
Parking brake 153
Warning lamp 249
Breakdown
Where will I find...? 300
see Flat tyre
see Towing away
Brightness control (instrument
cluster lighting) 34
C
Calling up a fault
see Display messages
Car
see Vehicle
Car wash (care) 293
Care
360° camera 296
Automatic car wash 293
Carpets 299
Display 297
Exhaust pipe 296
Exterior lighting 296
High-pressure cleaner 294
Interior 297
Matt paintwork 295
Notes 293
Paint 294
Plastic trim 297
Reversing camera 296
Roof lining 299
Seat belt 298
Seat cover 298
Selector lever 298
Sensors 296
Steering wheel 298
Trim pieces 298
Washing by hand 294
Wheels 295
Windows 295
Wiper blades 295
Wooden load compartment floor ... 299
Wooden trim 298
CD
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
CD player (on-board computer) ..... 211
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board computer) 219
Locking/unlocking (key) 79
Centre console
Lower section 37
Lower section (AMG vehicles) 38
Upper section 36
Child
Restraint system 54
Child seat
Automatic recognition 56
Forward-facing restraint system ..... 58
ISOFIX 54
On the front-passenger seat 57
Problem (malfunction) 59
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 58
Recommendations 62
Suitable positions 60
Top Tether 55
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes 64
Rear doors 65
Cigarette lighter 278
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal 296
Trailer tow hitch 297
Climate control
Auxiliary heating/ventilation 126
Controlling automatically 122
Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) 125
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 121
Demisting the windows 124
Demisting the windscreen 124
Indicator lamp 122
Information on using
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control 121
Overview of systems 119
Problem with the rear window heating 125
Problems with cooling with air dehumidification 122
Rear control panel 120
Setting the air distribution 123
Setting the air vents 131
Setting the airflow 123
Setting the climate mode (AIR FLOW) 122
Setting the temperature 123
Setting the temperature, THERMATIC 123
Setting the temperature, THERMOTRONIC 123
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off 125
Switching on/off 121
Switching residual heat on/off ..... 126
Switching the rear window heating on/off 124
Switching the ZONE function on/off 124
THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) 119
THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) automatic climate control 120
Coat hooks 272
Cockpit
Overview 32
see Instrument cluster
Collapsible emergency spare wheel
see Emergency spare wheel
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
Activating/deactivating 214
Display message 227
Operation/notes 68
COMAND display
Cleaning 297
COMAND Online
Switching on/off 257
Combination switch 112
Connecting a USB device
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) 209
Controller 258
Convenience closing feature 92
Convenience opening feature 92
Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) 125
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level 290
Display message 232
Important safety notes 341
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 221
Temperature gauge 206
Warning lamp 253
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright 31
Cornering light function
Display message 231
Function/notes 113
Cruise control
Activation conditions 158
Cruise control lever 158
Deactivating 159
Display message 239
Driving system 157
Important safety notes 158
LIM indicator lamp 158
Selecting 158
Setting a speed 159
Storing and maintaining current speed 158
Cup holder
Centre console 275
Important safety notes 274
Rear compartment 276
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Data
see Technical data
Data carrier
Selecting 211
Data modem mode
Telephone with Bluetooth (SAP profile) 263
Daytime driving lights
Display message 231
Function/notes 110
Switching on/off (on-board computer) 217
Dealership
see Qualified specialist workshop
Declarations of conformity 2
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board computer) 21 Interior lighting 218
Diagnostics connection 2
Diesel 339
Digital Owner's Manual
Help 2 5 Introduction 2 5
Digital speedometer 2
Dipped-beam headlamps
Display message 231 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) 110 Setting for driving on the right/left 217 Switching on/off 111
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission 140
Display message
Driving systems 23 KEYLESS-GO 246
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS .... 291 Calling up (on-board computer) .... 224 Engine .... 232 General information .... 223 Hiding (on-board computer) .... 224 Key .... 246 Lights .... 231 Safety systems .... 225 Tyres .... 241 Vehicle .... 2 4
Distance warning function
Function/notes 69
Distance warning signal (warning lamp) ....
DISTRONIC PLUS
Activating 163
Activation conditions 163
Deactivating 167
Display message 238
Displays in the multifunction display 166
Function/notes 161 Important safety notes 162 Selecting 163 Setting the specified minimum distance 165 Stopping 165
Door
9 Automatic locking (on-board computer) 219 Automatic locking (switch) 86 Central locking/unlocking (key) 79 Control panel 40 9 Display message 245 Emergency locking 86 Emergency unlocking 86 Important safety notes 84 Opening (from the inside) 85
Drive program
Automatic 144 Display 140 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) 140 Manual 145 Manual (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 146 Manual (vehicles with Sports package AMG) 146
Drive program selector 144
Driver's door see Door
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service .... 292 Symmetrical dipped beam .... 110 Driving on flooded roads .... 157 Driving safety system BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic 3 Assist .... 67 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .... 68 EBD (electronic brake force distri- 5 bution) .... 74
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ..... 66 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ..... 74 Adaptive Brake Assist ..... 70 Adaptive brake lights ..... 71 BAS (Brake Assist System) ..... 67 Distance warning function ..... 69
ESP ^® (Electronic Stability Program) 71
Important safety guidelines ...... 6
Overview 66
PRE-SAFE ^® Brake 75
Driving system
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot 168
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) 1 7
Driving systems
360°camera 186
Active Blind Spot Assist 196
Active Driving Assistance package 196
Active Lane Keeping Assist 198
Active Parking Assist 177
AIRMATIC 171
AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension 173
ATTENTION ASSIST 190
Blind Spot Assist 192
Cruise control 157
Display message 235
Distronic Plus 161
HOLD function 169
Lane Keeping Assist 1
Lane package 192
PARKTRONIC 175
Reversing camera 182
SPEEDTRONIC 160
Traffic Sign Assist 191
Driving tips
AMG ceramic brakes 156
Aquaplaning 156
Automatic transmission 143
Brakes 1 5
Downhill gradient 155
Driving abroad 110
Driving in winter 15
Driving on flooded roads 157
Driving on wet roads 1
Fuel 154
General 154
Icy road surfaces 157
Limited braking efficiency on sal- ted roads 156
New brake pads/linings 156
Running-in tips 132
Snow chains 320
6 Symmetrical dipped beam 110
Towing a trailer 202
Wet road surface 155
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 211
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating 220
Function/notes 105
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive 106
Function/notes 105
Switching on/off 220
EASY-PACK load-securing kit
Components and storage 272
Inserting the brackets into the loading rail 272
EASY-PACK luggage compartment management system 272
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
Display message 226
Function/notes 74
ECO display
Function/notes 154
On-board computer 209
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine switch-off 136
Deactivating/activating 137
General information 136
Important safety notes 136
Introduction 136
Electromagnetic compatibility
Declaration of conformity 28
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Automatic measures after an accident 53
Emergency key
Unlocking the driver's door 86
Emergency key element
Function/notes 81
General notes 81
Inserting 81
Locking vehicle 86
Removing 8
Emergency release
Driver's door 86
Fuel filler flap 1
Emergency spare wheel
General notes 331
Important safety notes 331
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel 332
Removing 331
Storage location 331
Stowing 332
Technical data 331
Emergency unlocking
Tailgate 90
Vehicle 86
Engine
Display message 232
ECO start/stop function 136
Engine number 336
Jump-starting 309
Running irregularly 138
Starting problems 138
Starting the engine with the key .... 1
Starting with KEYLESS GO 135
Stopping 152
Tow-starting (vehicle) 315
Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) 253
Engine electronics
Notes 334
Problem (fault) 138
Engine jump starting
see Jump starting (engine)
Engine oil
Additives 341
Checking the oil level 289
Checking the oil level using the dipstick 289
Display message 233
Filling capacity 341
Notes about oil grades 340
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 289
Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 221
Topping up 289
Entering an address
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
1 Environmental protection
Returning an end-of-life vehicle ..... 26
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 222
Characteristics 72
Deactivating/activating (button in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 73
Deactivating/activating (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 72
Deactivating/activating (on-board computer, except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 214
Display message 225
Function/notes 71
General notes 71
Important safety guidelines 71
Trailer stabilisation 74
Warning lamp 250
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 296
Exterior lighting
Settings options ...... 110 see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting 106
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ..... 107
Folding in when locking (on-board computer) 221
Folding in/out (automatically) ..... 107
Folding in/out (electrically) 107
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 107
Parking position 108
Resetting 107
Storing settings (memory function) 109
F
Fault message
see Display messages
Favourites
Overview 258
Filler cap
see Fuel filler flap
Fire extinguisher 30
First-aid kit 300
Fitting a wheel
Fitting a wheel 329
Lowering the vehicle 32
Preparing the vehicle 326
Raising the vehicle 327
Removing a wheel 328
Securing the vehicle against rolling away 326
Flat tyre
MOExtended tyres 303
Preparing the vehicle 302
TREFIT kit 303
see Emergency spare wheel
Floormat 286
Foglamps (extended range) 113
Frequencies
Consumption statistics 209
Displaying the current consumption 209
Displaying the range 209
Driving tips 154
Fuel gauge 34
Grade (petrol) 337
Important safety notes 337
Notes for CLS 400, CLS 400 4MATIC 338
Notes for Mercedes-AMG vehicles 338
Problem (malfunction) 151
Quality (diesel) 339
Refuelling 148
Tank content/reserve fuel 337
Fuel filler flap
Emergency release 150
Opening 150
Fuel filter (white display message) ..
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
0 computer) 209
Gauge 34
Fuel reserve
see Fuel
Fuel tank
Capacity 337
Problem (malfunction) 151
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit)
Fuses
Allocation chart 315
Before changing 315
Fuse box in the engine compartment 315
Fuse box in the luggage compartment 316
Important safety notes 315
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory 283
Frequencies 283
General notes 281
Important safety notes 281
Opening/closing the garage door.. 2 8 3
Problems when programming ..... 2 8 2
Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) 281
Synchronising the rolling code ..... 282
Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...... 221
Gearshift program
SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 222
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 26
Glove compartment 267
Google™ Local Search
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
H
Hazard warning lamps 1 1 2 Head restraints
234 Adjusting 99
Adjusting (electrically) 100
Adjusting (manually) 99
Adjusting (rear) 100
Fitting/removing (rear) 101
Luxury 100
see NECK-PRO head restraints
see NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Headbag
Display message 230
Headlamp flasher 112
Headlamps
Misting up 114
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High-pressure cleaners 294
Hill start assist 136
HOLD function
Activating 170
Deactivating 170
Display message 236
Function/notes 169
Home address
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Horn 32
|
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobiliser 76
Indicator and warning lamp
Restraint system 252
Indicator and warning lamps
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS 255
Coolant 253
Engine diagnostics 253
SPORT handling mode 252
Indicator lamps
Display message 231
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Insect protection on the radiator .... 288
Instrument cluster
Overview 34
Settings 216
Warning and indicator lamps 34
Instrument cluster lighting 216
Interior lighting
Automatic control system 115
Control 115
Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) 218
Overview 114
Reading lamp 114
Setting brightness for display/ switches (on-board computer) ..... 216
Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) ..... 217
Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) 218
Interior motion sensor
Deactivating 78
Function 78
iPod®
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 54
J
Jack
Storage location 301
Using 327
Jump starting (engine) 309
K
Key
Changing the battery 82
Checking the battery 82
Convenience closing feature 92
Convenience opening feature 92
Display message 246
Door central locking/unlocking ..... 79
Emergency key element 81
Important safety notes 79
Loss 83
Modifying the programming 80
Overview 79
Positions (ignition lock) 133
Problem (malfunction) 83
Starting the engine 135
Key positions
Key 133
KEYLESS GO 133
KEYLESS-GO
Activating 80
Convenience closing 92
Deactivation 80
Display message 246
Locking 80
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 134
Start/Stop button 133
Starting the engine 135
Unlocking 80
Kickdown
Driving tips 143
Manual drive program 147
Kneebag 47
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating 215
Display message 236
Function/information 194
Lane package 192
Lap time (RACETIMER) 222
Lashing eyelets 270
Licence plate lamp (display message) 231
Light sensor (display message) ..... 23
Lighting
see Lights
Lights
Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off ..... 218
Active light function 113
Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 113
Automatic headlamp mode 110
Cornering light function 113
Dipped-beam headlamps 111
Driving abroad 110
Foglamps (extended range) 113
General notes 110
Hazard warning lamps 112
Headlamp flasher 112
Light switch 110
Main-beam headlamps 112
Misted up headlamps 114
Motorway mode 113
Parking lamps 111
Rear foglamp 111
Setting brightness for display/
switches (on-board computer) ..... 216
Setting exterior lighting 110
Setting the ambient lighting
brightness (on-board computer) .... 217
Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) 218
Side lamps 111
Switching the daytime driving
lights on/off (on-board computer) 217
Switching the exterior lighting
delayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) 218
Switching the MULTIBEAM LED
adaptive functions on/off 217
Switching the surround lighting
on/off (on-board computer) 218
Turn signals 112
see Interior lighting
LIM indicator lamp
Cruise control 158
DISTRONIC PLUS 163
Variable SPEEDTRONIC 160
Limiting the speed
see SPEEDTRONIC
LINGUATRONIC
see See also Digital Owner's Manual
Loading guidelines 266
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic 86
Emergency locking 86
From inside (central locking button) 85
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-board computer) 219
Luggage compartment cover
Fitting/removing 271
Important safety notes 270
Notes/function 270
Luggage compartment enlarge-
ment 269
Luggage compartment floor
opening/closing 273
stowage well, under 27
Luggage cover
Removing and fitting 27
Luggage holder (EASY-PACK load-
securing kit) 273
Lumbar support
Adjusting 101
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support 102
Luxury head restraint 100
M
M+S tyres 3 1
Main-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 113
Display message 231
Switching on/off 112
Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. 295
MB Contact
Display message 227
Media Interface
USB port in the armrest of the centre console 268 see Digital Owner's Manual
Memory card (audio) 211
Memory function 108
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Switch in the overhead control panel 280
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
360°camera 186
Active Blind Spot Assist 196
Active Lane Keeping Assist 198
Active Parking Assist 177
ATTENTION ASSIST 190
Blind Spot Assist 192
Cruise control 157
DISTRONIC PLUS 161
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot 1
General notes 157
Lane Keeping Assist 19
PARKTRONIC 175
PRE-SAFE ^® (anticipatory occu- 3 pant protection) 51
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory 1 occupant protection PLUS) 52
Reversing camera 182
Traffic Sign Assist 191
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
see Qualified specialist workshop
Message memory (on-board computer) 2 2 4
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror (in sun visor)
Mobile phone
Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) 260
Connecting another mobile phone 261
Connecting the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ...... 263
Frequencies 334
Installation 334
Menu (on-board computer) 212
Notes/placing in the bracket ..... 280
Transmission output (maximum) .... 334
Modifying the programming (key) ..... 80
MOExtended tyres 303
Motorway mode 113
MP3
Operating 211
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
MULTIBEAM LED
Display messages 231
Overview 112
Setting the dipped-beam head-lamps for driving on the right/left .. 217
Switching the adaptive functions on/off 217
Multicontour seat
Adjusting (on the seat) 101
Multifunction display
Function/notes 208
Permanent display 216
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer .. 207
Overview 35
Multimedia system
see Separate operating instructions
Music files
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) 210
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
NECK-PRO head restraints
Operation 50
Resetting triggered 51
NECK-PRO luxury head restraint
Important safety notes 50
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Operation 50
Resetting when triggered 5 1
Notes on running in a new vehicle ..
0
Occupant safety
Airbags 46
Automatic measures after an accident 53
Children in the vehicle 53
Important safety notes 41
PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp 42
Pets in the vehicle 65
PRE-SAFE ^® (anticipatory occupant protection) 51
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) 52
Restraint system introduction ...... 41
Restraint system warning lamp ..... 42 Seat belts ..... 43
Odometer 208
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
AMG menu 221
Assistance menu 213
Audio menu 211
Convenience submenu 220
Display messages 223
Displaying a service message ...... 292
DISTRONIC PLUS 166
Factory setting submenu 221
Heating submenu 219
Important safety notes 206
Instrument cluster submenu 216
Light submenu 216
Menu overview 208
Message memory 224
Navigation menu 210
Operating the TV 212
Operating video DVD 211
Operation 207
RACETIMER 222
Service menu 215
Settings menu 216
Standard display 208
Telephone menu 212
Trip menu 208
132 Vehicle submenu 218
Operating instructions
Vehicle equipment 27
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity 28
Important safety note 27
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operation
Digital Owner's Manual 25
Outside temperature display 206
Overhead control panel 39
Override feature
Rear side windows 65
P
Paint code 335
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 294
Panic alarm 41
Parking
Important safety notes 152
Parking brake 153
Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side 108
Reversing camera 182
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Active Parking Assist 177
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking assistance
see PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Display message 2 2
Notes/function 153
Warning lamp 249
Parking lamps
Display message 231
Switching on/off 111
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating 177
Driving system 175
Function/notes 17
Important safety notes 175
Problem (fault) 177
Sensor range 175
Trailer towing 177
Warning display 176
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Indicator lamp 42
Problems (malfunctions) 59
Petrol 337
Pets in the vehicle 6
Phone book
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) 297
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)
Operation 51
PRE-SAFE ^® (preventive occupant safety system)
Display message 227
PRE-SAFE® Brake
Activating/deactivating 214
Display message 228
Function/notes 75
Important safety notes 75
Warning lamp 255
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS)
Display message 228
Operation 52
Program selector button 143
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) 77
Immobiliser 76
6 Interior motion sensor 78
Tow-away protection 77
Protection of the environment
General notes 26
Pulling away
General notes 135
Pulling away (automatic transmission) ....
5Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App 1
Rescue card 30
Qualified specialist workshop 30
R
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 222
Radiator cover 288
Radio
Selecting a station 211
see separate operating instructions
Radio mode
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Radio-based vehicle components
Declaration of conformity 28
Rain closing feature (sliding sun-roof) ....
Reading lamp 114
Rear compartment
Setting the air vents 131
Setting the airflow 123
Setting the temperature 123
Rear foglamp
Display message 231
Switching on/off 111
Rear seat
Display message 245
Rear window heating
Problem (fault) 125
Switching on/off 124
Rear window wiper
Replacing the wiper blade 117
Switching on/off 116
Rear-compartment seat belt sta-
tus indicator 46
Rear-view mirror
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ..... 107
Dipping (manual) 106
Refuelling
Fuel gauge 34
Important safety notes 148
Notes for Mercedes-AMG vehicles 338
Refuelling process 149
see Fuel
Remote control
Auxiliary heating/ventilation 128
Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) 129
Programming (garage door opener) 281
Replacing bulbs
General notes 115
Replacing the battery (auxiliary
heating remote control) 129
Rescue card 30
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message 234
Warning lamp 253
Residual heat (climate control) ..... 12δ
Restraint system
Display message 230
Introduction 41
Problem (malfunction) 252
Warning lamp (function) 42
Rev counter 206
Reverse gear (selector lever) 140
Reversing camera
Cleaning instructions 296
Display in the multimedia system .. 183
Function/notes 182
Switching on/off 182
Reversing feature
Side windows 91
Sliding sunroof 94
Tailgate 87
Reversing lamp (display message) .. 231
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
instructions) 299
Roof load (maximum) 342
Route guidance
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle 53
see Occupant safety
Safety net
Attaching 272
Important safety information ..... 271
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
SD card
Inserting 265
Inserting/removing 265
Removing 265
SD memory card
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Selecting 211
Seat
Adjusting the active multicontour seat 101
Adjusting the multicontour seat ..... 101
Folding the backrest (rear compartment) forwards/back 269
Seat belt
Centre rear-compartment seat 45
Correct usage 44
Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) 220
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt 45
Adjusting the height 44
Cleaning 298
Display message 229
Fastening 44
Important safety guidelines 43
Introduction 43
Rear seat belt status indicator ..... 4
Releasing 45
Warning lamp 2 4
Warning lamp (function) 45
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) 99
Adjusting (manually and electrically) 98
Adjusting lumbar support 101
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support 102
Adjusting the head restraint 99
Cleaning the cover 298
Correct driver's seat position 97
Important safety notes 97
Overview 97
Seat heating 102
Seat heating problem 103
Storing settings (memory function) 109
Switching seat heating on/off ..... 102
Switching the seat ventilation on/off 10
Section
Luggage compartment 86
Securing a load 270
Securing luggage 270
Selector lever
Cleaning 298
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ..... 296
Service
see ASSYST PLUS
Service Centre
see Qualified specialist workshop
Service menu (on-board computer) 2 1
Service message
see ASSYST PLUS
Service products
AdBlue ^® special additives 339
Brake fluid 341
Coolant (engine) 341
Engine oil 340
Fuel 337
Important safety notes 336
Washer fluid 342
Setting the air distribution 123
Setting the airflow 123
Setting the date/time format
8 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Setting the language
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Setting the time
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ...... 221
On-board computer 216
SETUP (on-board computer) 222
Side lamps
Switching on/off 111
Side windows
Convenience closing 92
Convenience opening 92
Important safety notes 90
Opening/closing 91
Problem (malfunction) 93
Resetting 93
Reversing feature 91
Sidebag 48
SIM card
Inserting 263
Sliding sunroof
Important safety information 94
Opening/closing 95
Problem (malfunction) 96
Rain closing feature 95
Resetting 95
SMS
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Snow chains 320
Socket
Luggage compartment 279
Sockets
Centre console 279
General notes 279
Rear compartment 279
Sound
Switching on/off 258
Spare wheel
Storing 332
Specialist workshop 30
Spectacles compartment 267
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital 209
In the Instrument cluster 34
Segments 206
Selecting a display unit 216
SPEEDTRONIC
Deactivating variable 161
Display message 2 3
Function/notes 1 6
General notes 160
Important safety notes 160
LIM indicator lamp 160
Permanent 161
Selecting 160
Storing the current speed 160
Variable 160
SPORT handling mode
Deactivating/activating
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 73
Warning lamp 252
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) 134
Steering
Display message 246
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (DISTRONIC PLUS)
Activating/deactivating 215
Display message 239
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) 104
Adjusting (manually) 103
Button overview 35
Buttons (on-board computer) ...... 207
Cleaning 298
Gearshift paddles 144
Important safety notes 103
Steering wheel heating 104
Storing settings (memory function) 109
Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 144
Steering wheel heating
Problem (malfunction) 105
Switching on/off 104
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) 222
Stowage areas 266
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) 268
Centre console 267
Cup holder 274
Glove compartment 267
Important safety information ...... 266
Rear 269
Spectacles compartment 267
Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat 268
Stowage net 269
Stowage space
Stowage net 269
Summer tyres 319
Sun visor 277
Surround lighting (on-board computer) 218
Suspension setting
AIRMATIC 172
Suspension settings
AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension 173
SETUP (on-board computer) 222
Switching
the interior motion sensor on/off .... 78
Switching on media mode
Via the device list 264
T
Tail lamps
Display message 231
Tailgate
Display message 244
Emergency unlocking 90
Important safety notes 86
Limiting the opening angle 89
Opening dimensions 342
Opening/closing (automatically from inside) 89
Opening/closing (automatically from outside) 88
Opening/closing (from outside) ..... 87
Tank
see Fuel tank
Technical data
Capacities 336
Emergency spare wheel 331
Information 334
Trailer loads 344
Tyres/wheels 330
Vehicle data 342
Telephone
Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) 212
Authorising a mobile phone (connecting) 261
Connecting a Mobile phone (general information) 260
Display message 246
Menu (on-board computer) 212
Number from the phone book ...... 21
Redialling 213
Rejecting/ending a call 212
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Switching between mobile phones 261
Telephone compartment 268
Telephone module with Bluetooth (SAP profile)
Activating and connecting the module 262
Charging a mobile phone 264
Connecting the mobile phone ..... 263
Connecting the module via a USB cable 262
Data modem mode 263
Installing the module 262
Introduction 261
Saving/deleting the PIN for the SIM card 264
Settings 264
SIM card mode 263
Text messages 264
Transferring the phone book ...... 264
Telescopic rod (Easy-Pack fix kit) .... 273 Temperature
Coolant 206
Coolant (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 221
Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 221
Outside temperature 206
Setting (climate control) 123
TEMPOMAT
Function/notes 157
Text messages
Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) 264
Timing (RACETIMER) 222
TREFIT kit 303
Declaration of conformity 28
Important safety notes 303
Storage location 301
Tyre pressure not reached 305
Tyre pressure reached 305
Using 304
Top Tether 55
Total distance recorder 208
Tow-away protection
Deactivating 78
Function 77
Priming/deactivating 77
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting 315
Important safety notes 311
Towing
Important safety notes 311
Transporting the vehicle 314
With the rear axle raised 314
Towing a trailer
Active Blind Spot Assist 198
Active Lane Keeping Assist 200
Active Parking Assist 181
Axle load, permissible 344
ESP ^® (Electronic Stability Program) 74
Failure check for LEDs 204
General notes 202
Trailer tow hitch display message .. 245
Towing away
Fitting the towing eye 313
Removing the towing eye 313
With both axles on the ground ..... 313
Towing eye 301
Traffic Sign Assist
Activating/deactivating the warning function 214
Display message 236
Function/notes 191
Important safety notes 192
Instrument cluster display ...... 1 9Tyre inflation compressor
Trailer
see TREFIT kit
Folding the ball coupling in/out ..... 202Tyre pressure
Trailer coupling
see Towing a trailer
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 323
Display message 241
Trailer towing
7-pin connector 205
Not reached (TREFIT) 305
Blind Spot Assist 194
Reached (TIREFIT) 305
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ..... 29
Recommended 320
Coupling up a trailer 204
e pressure loss warning
Decoupling a trailer 204
General notes 322
Driving tips 202
Important safety notes 322
Folding in the ball coupling ...... 203Tyre pressure monitor
Restarting 322
Folding out the ball coupling ..... 202
Checking the tyre pressure electronically 323
Important safety notes 200
Function/notes 323
Lights display message 231
General notes 323
Parktronic 177
Important safety notes 323
Power supply 204
Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor 325
Problem (fault) 205
Restarting 324
Trailer loads 344
Warning lamp 256
Transfer case 148
Warning message 324
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display ..... 140 Tyres
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) 140
Transporting the vehicle 314
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
tions) 298
Trip computer (on-board com-
puter) 209
Trip meter
Calling up 208
Resetting (on-board computer) ..... 209
Turn signals
Switching on/off 112
TV
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 212
see Separate operating instructions
Two-way radio
Frequencies 334
Installation 334
Transmission output (maximum) .... 334
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
Tyre changing tool kit 30
Changing a wheel 325
Checking 317
Direction of rotation 326
Display message 241
Important safety notes 317
Information on driving 317
MOExtended tyres 319
Replacing 325
Service life 318
Storing 326
Tyre size (data) 330
Tyre tread 318
Wheel and tyre combinations ..... 330
see Flat tyre
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking 86
From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) 85
Upshift indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 221
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Interface 2 6
Using the TREFIT
tyre pressure kit 304
V
Vanity mirror (in sun visor) 277
Variable SPEEDTRONIC
see SPEEDTRONIC
Vehicle
Correct use 30
Data acquisition 31
Display message 243
Electronics 334
Equipment 27
Implied warranty 30
Individual settings 216
Leaving parked up 153
Locking (in an emergency) 8
Locking (key) 79
Lowering 329
Pulling away 135
Raising 327
Registration 30
Securing from rolling away 326
Towing away 311
Transporting 314
Unlocking (in an emergency) 86
Unlocking (key) 79
Vehicle data 342
Vehicle data 342
Vehicle dimensions 342
Vehicle emergency locking 86
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate 335
Vehicle level
AIRMATIC 171
Vehicle level (display message) ..... 235
Vehicle tool kit 301
Vehicle weights 342
Video
Operating the DVD 211
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
VIN
Seat 336
Type plate 335
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS 250
Brakes 249
Distance warning signal 255
ESP ^® 250
ESP ^® OFF 251
Fuel tank 253
General notes 247
LIM (cruise control) 158
LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) 163
LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ...... 160
Overview 34
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 42
Reserve fuel 253
Seat belt 248
Tyre pressure monitor 256
Warning triangle 300
Washer fluid
Display message 246
Weather display (COMAND Online)
See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 257
Wheel and tyre combinations
Tyres 330
Wheel bolt tightening torque 329
Wheel chock 326
Wheels
Changing a wheel 325
Changing/replacing 325
Checking 317
Cleaning 295
Emergency spare wheel 331
Fitting a new wheel 329
Fitting a wheel 326
Important safety notes 317
Information on driving 317
Removing a wheel 328
Storing 326
Tightening torque 329
Wheel size/tyre size 330
Windowbag
Operation 48
Windows
Cleaning 295
see Side windows
Windscreen
Demisting 124
Windscreen washer fluid
see Windscreen washer system
Windscreen washer system
Important safety notes 342
Topping up 291
Windscreen wipers
Problem (malfunction) 118
Rear window wiper 116
Replacing the wiper blades 116
Switching on/off 115
Winter operation
Important safety notes 319
Radiator cover 288
Slippery road surfaces 157
Snow chains 320
Winter tyres
Limiting the speed (on-board com-
puter) 218
M+S tyres 319
Wiper blades
Cleaning 295
Important safety notes 116
Replacing (on the rear window) ..... 117
Replacing (windscreen) 116
Wooden load compartment floor
(cleaning instructions) 299
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) 2 9 8
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off 124
Introduction
Operating the Digital Owner's Manual
General notes
The printed Owner's Manual provides informa- General notes
tion about the safe operation of your vehicle. Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (▷ page 258).
hensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up the Digital Owner's Manual
via the multimedia system.
Content pages
You will not incur any costs when calling the Digital Owner's Manual. The Digital Owner's Manual works without connecting to the Internet.
You can access the pages of content by means of a visual search or a keyword search or by using the table of contents.
There are three ways to access the topics of Digital Owner's Manual:
- Visual search
The visual search allows you to explore you vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Owner's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view.
text_image
Displays and operation Instrument cluster Speedometer 1 2 3 4 5 P82.89-0906-31- Keyword search
The keyword search allows you to search for keyword by entering characters.
- Contents
You can select individual sections in the contents.
i The Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving.
▶ To scroll forwards/backwards: turn (◎) the controller.
To display in full-screen or animation: slide
←○ the controller to the left ①.
To select information text or save bookmarks: slide ⬅→ the controller to the right ②.
▶ To select a link: slide Ⓞ↓ the controller downwards ③.
▶ To exit a content page: select the symbol ④.
▶ To call up the basic menu of the Digital Owner's Manual: select the symbol ⑤.
Operation
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manua
▶ Press the 📄 button on the centre console
The vehicle overview appears.
▶ Select the "Owner's Manual" menu item by turning (◎) or pressing ⚙ on the controller
▶ Confirm Ⓧ the message about the warning and safety notes.
The basic menu for the Digital Owner's Manual appears.
To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the centre console: press the RADIO, TEL, MEDIA or NAVI button.
The selected menu appears. The Digital Owner's Manual remains open in the background.
Environmental protection
General notes
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection.
Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence of this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consideration.
You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend the following factors:
• operating conditions of your vehicle
- your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
- avoid short trips, as these increase fuel consumption.
- observe the correct tyre pressure.
- do not carry any unnecessary weight in the vehicle.
- remove the roof rack once you no longer need it.
- a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals.
- all maintenance work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
- do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
- do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary.
- drive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.
-
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
-
change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 23 of its maximum engine speed.
- switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
• monitor the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Returning an end-of-life vehicle
EU countries only:
Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environmentally-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive.
A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources.
For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts.
! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:
- doors
- door pillars
- door sills
- seats
- dashboard
- centre console
e instrument cluster
Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations.
You could jeopardise the operating safety of The original purchase contract documentation your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheeforyour vehicle contains a list of all of the well as accessories relevant to safety that havems in your vehicle.
not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This should you have any questions concerning could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant equipment and operation, please consult a systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only gen Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Use only tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.
In Germany, certain parts are officially approv for installation or modification only if they co ply with legal requirements. This also applies some other countries. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval requirements. T use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
This is the case:
- if they cause a change of the vehicle type that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted
- if other road users could be endangered
- if the emission or noise levels are adversely affected
Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (▷ page 335) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts.
Operating safety
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Owner's Manual
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models, standard and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of g to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant safety. Therefore, the equipment on your
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could affect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly anymore and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury.
Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well electronic components or their software. Always have work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
as cialist workshop. If, upon continuing your journey, you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.
Declarations of conformity
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle
- the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road
- you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. kerb or a pothole in the road
- a heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the under-body, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, longer withstand the strain they are designed for.
Wireless vehicle components
The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves:
The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant be conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Electromagnetic compatibility
If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
TREFIT kit
Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:
CE
EC declaration of conformity
in accordance with EC Directive
2006/42/EC on machinery, Annex II B
The equipment/machinery
Make: Integrated kit
Type/model:
Serial numbers:
Year of manufacture:
was developed, designed and manufactured in accordance with EC Directives
2006/42/EC on machinery and 2004/108/EC on electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
as sole responsibility of
active Tools Europe GmbH
Otto-Hahn-Str. 72
1
0-3
32108 Bad Salzuflen
Germany
The following harmonised standards were applied:
| Designation Track Edition | ||
| IEC 61000-1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), interference immunity 2005 | ||
| IEC 61000-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), interference emission 2005 | ||
| EN ISO 12100-1 Safety of machinery 2009 | ||
| DIN EN 1012-1 Compressors and vacuum pumps - Safety requirements - Part 1: Compressors | 2010 | |
| DIN EN 894-1 Safety of machinery - Ergonomic requirements for the design of displays and control actuators - Part 1: General principles | 2008 | |
| DIN EN 894-2 Safety of machinery - Ergonomic requirements for the design of displays and control actuators - Part 2: Displays | 2008 | |
| DIN EN 55014-1 Electromagnetic compatibility - Requirements for household appliances, electric tools and similar apparatus - Part 1: Emission | 2011 | |
| DIN EN 55014-2 Electromagnetic compatibility - Requirements for household appliances, electric tools and similar apparatus - Part 2: Immunity | 2008 | |
The applicable safety and health protection requirements for the design and construction of machinery based on Annex I of the Directive on Machinery are complied with.
Complete technical documentation is available
☒ in the original version
The operating instructions for the machinery/machine part are available
☒ in the language of the user's country: German
In the event of modifications made to the machinery/equipment after delivery that have not be cleared with active Tools Europe GmbH, this declaration loses its validity.
Authorised representative(s) for compilation of the technical documentation, CE commissioner(s)
| 22.6.2015 [Name of signatory] [Stamp] | ||
| Date | Signatory and details of signatory | Signature |
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is used for connecting diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident.
-Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a
depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so they do not get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another.
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases:
- if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. - if your vehicle has not yet been inspected at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example.
! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle:
Qualified specialist workshop
A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Service Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at qualified specialist workshop:
• work relevant to safety
• service and maintenance work
- repair work
- modifications, installations and conversions
• work on electronic components
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving your vehicle:
• the safety notes in this manual
- technical data for the vehicle
- traffic rules and regulations
- laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles
Implied warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
QR code for rescue card
Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection.
Mercedes-Benz can inform you about vehicle inspections only if it has your registration data
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains, in a compact form, the most important information about your vehicle, e.g. the routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/
content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
Data stored in the vehicle
Many of the electronic components in your cle can store data.
These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about:
• the vehicle's operating state
- events
- faults
In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
- operating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels
- status messages concerning the vehicle and its individual components, e.g. wheel rotational speed, vehicle speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position
- malfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes
- vehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of stability control systems
- ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
These data are of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to:
- assist in detecting and rectifying faults and defects
- analyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident
- optimise vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and fault data memory.
Services include, for example:
- repair services
- service processes
- warranty events
- quality assurance
The information is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more information there, if required.
After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the fault memory or is continually overwritten.
During vehicle operation, certain situations may arise in which these technical data – in conjunction with other information and, if applicable, after consultation with an approved assessor – may be linked to an individual person.
Examples include:
- accident reports
• damage to the vehicle - witness statements
Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in the event of an emergency.
Copyright information
Information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Cockpit
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car with numbered component labels pointing to the dashboard and steering wheel.| Function Page | |
| 1 | Steering wheel gearshift pad-dles 144 |
| 2 | Combination switch 112 |
| 3 | Instrument cluster 34 |
| 4 | Horn |
| 5 | DIRECT SELECT lever 140 |
| 6 | PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 175 |
| 7 | Overhead control panel 39 |
| 8 | Climate control systems 119 |
| 9 | Ignition lock 133Start/Stop button 133 |
| Function Page | ||
| 10 | Adjusts the steering wheel manually 103 | |
| 11 | Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 103 Steering wheel heating 104 | |
| 12 | Cruise control lever 158 | |
| 13 | Parking brake 153 | |
| 14 | Diagnostics connection 29 | |
| 15 | Opens the bonnet 287 | |
| 16 | Releases the parking brake | 153 |
| 17 | Light switch | 110 |
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car with numbered component labels pointing to the dashboard and interior features.| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Overhead control panel 39 | |
| 2 | PARKTRONIC warning display 175 | |
| 3 | Combination switch 112 | |
| 4 | Instrument cluster 34 | |
| 5 | Horn | |
| 6 | Steering wheel gearshift paddles 144 | |
| 7 | DIRECT SELECT lever 140 | |
| 8 | Light switch 110 | |
| 9 | Opens the bonnet 287 | |
| 10 | Diagnostics connection 29 |
| Function Page | ||
| 11 | Releases the parking brake | 153 |
| 12 | Ignition lock 133Start/Stop button 133 | |
| 13 | Adjusts the steering wheel manually 103 | |
| 14 | Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 103Steering wheel heating 104 | |
| 15 | Parking brake 153 | |
| 16 | Climate control systems | 119 |
| 17 | Cruise control lever | 158 |
Instrument cluster
text_image
① ② ③ ④ 149.8 km 26753 20.5°C R E N P D 1 km/h P54.33-4600-31Function Page
①
Fuel gauge (left)
Coolant temperature (right) 206
Warning and indicator lamps:
ESP®
250
SPORT
SPORT handling mode
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles 252
Distance warning 255
ESP® OFF 250
Turn signal, left 112
Coolant 253
Main-beam headlamps 112
Dipped-beam head-
lamps
Side lamps 111
Rear foglamp 111
Reserve fuel 253
Fuel filler flap location indicator: the fuel filler cap is on the right-hand side.
Function Page
② Speedometer with segments 206
③ Multifunction display 208
④ Rev counter 206 Warning and indicator lamps:
(1) Brakes (red) 249
Turn signal, right 112
(①) Only for certain vehicles: brakes (yellow) 249
ABS 250
Restraint system 42
Engine diagnostics 253
Tyre pressure monitor 256
Seat belts 248
00 Diesel engine: preglow 135
ESP® in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles 252
Information on displaying the outside tempera-The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-ture in the multifunction display can be foundplays and the controls in the vehicle interior can under "Outside temperature display" (▷ page 206). be adjusted via the on-board computer (▷ page 216).
Multifunction steering wheel
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with numbered components and labeled controls| Function Page | |
| ① | Multifunction display 208 |
| ② | Multimedia system display |
| ③ | Switches on voice-operated control for navigation or LIN- GUATRONIC Mute + - Adjusts the volume Rejects or ends a call 212 Exits the telephone book/ redial memory Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial mem- ory |
text_image
Function Page ④ ◀ ▶ Selects a menu 207 ▲ ▼ Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists 207 OK Confirms the selection 207 Hides display messages 224 ← Back 207 Switches off voice-operated control for navigation or LIN- GUATRONICi Vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20:
Additional information can be found:
• on the multimedia system in the Digital Owner's Manual
- on voice-operated control for navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions
i Vehicles with multimedia system COMAND Online:
Additional information can be found:
• on the multimedia system in the Digital Owner's Manual
- on LINGUATRONIC in the separate operating instructions
Centre console
Centre console, upper section
text_image
1 RADIO MEGA NAV TEL CAN NH 2 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 P68.20-4987-31| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Multimedia system (see the Digital Owner's Manual) | |
| 2 | Seat heating | 102 |
| 3 | Seat ventilation | 103 |
| 4 | PARKTRONIC | 175 |
| 5 | ECO ECO start/stop function | 136 |
| Function Page | ||
| 6 | PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF indicator lamp | 56 |
| 7 | Hazard warning lamps | 112 |
| 8 | Retracts the rear seathead restraints 100 | |
| 9 | Auxiliary heating | 126 |
Centre console, lower section
text_image
Car interior panel with numbered labels pointing to various controls and interfaces| Function Page | ||
| 10 | Stowage compartment 266Ashtray 277Cigarette lighter 278Power socket 279Cup holders 274 | |
| 11 | Adjusts the suspensionsettings172 | |
| 12 | Sets the vehicle level171 |
| Function Page | ||
| 13 | Stowage space with Media Interface 268 | |
| 14 | Selects the drive program | 143 |
| 15 | Multimedia system controller 258 |
Centre console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
text_image
Diagram of car dashboard control panel with numbered parts for identification| Function Page | ||
| 10 | Cup holders 274 | |
| 11 | Engages parking position P | 152 |
| 12 | Selector lever 140 | |
| 13 | Ashtray 277Cigarette lighter 278Power socket 279 | |
| 14 | Multimedia system controller 258 |
| Function Page | ||
| 15 | Stowage space with Media Interface 268 | |
| 16 | AMG Calls up or saves the suspension settings | 173 |
| 17 | Adjusts the suspension settings 173 | |
| 18 | OFF ESP® | 73 |
| 19 | Drive program selector 144 |
Overhead control panel
text_image
Diagram of car interior with numbered component labels pointing to various parts of the dashboard and rearview mirror.| Function Page | ||
| 1 |  Switches the rear inter-rior lighting on/off | 114 |
| 2 |  Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 114 | |
| 3 |  Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 114 | |
| 4 |  Deactivates tow-away protection | 77 |
| 5 |  Opens/closes the sliding sunroof 95 | |
| 6 |  SOS button | 280 |
| Function Page | ||
| 7 | Rear-view mirrorAutomatic anti-dazzle 107Manual anti-dazzle 106 | |
| 8 | Buttons for the garage door opener 281 | |
| 9 |  Deactivates the interior motion sensor | 78 |
| 10 |  Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 114 | |
| 11 |  Switches the front interior lighting on/off 114 |
Function Page
Door control panel
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car with numbered component labels pointing to the dashboard and seatbelt.| Function Page | ||
| 1 | M 1 2 3Stores seat, exterior mirror and steering column adjustment settings | 108 |
| 2 | Adjusts the seats electrically 99 | |
| 3 | Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 85 | |
| 4 | Opens the door 85 | |
| 5 | Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 106 | |
| Function Page | ||
| 6 | Opens/closes the side windows | 91 |
| 7 | Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 65 | |
| 8 | Opens/closes the tail-gate 89 |
Panic alarm
text_image
PANIC 1 P80.00-2217-31▶ To activate: press the PANIC button ① approximately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if alarm system is activated.
▶ To deactivate: press the PANIC button ① again.
or
▶ Insert the key into the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Press the Start/Stop button.
The key must be in the vehicle.
The panic alarm function is only available in tain countries.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts, the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. Furthermore, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident.
The restraint system includes:
- Seat belt system
- Airbags
- Child restraint system
- Child seat securing system
The various components of the restraint system work complementary to one another. They can only perform their intended protective function if all vehicle occupants:
• have correctly fastened their seat belt (▷ page 44)
• have correctly adjusted their seat and head restraint (▷ page 97).
As the driver, you must also ensure that the steering wheel is correctly adjusted. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (▷ page 97).
Safety
Additionally, you must ensure that an airbag can deploy freely (▷ page 46).
The airbag is supplementary to a correctly fastened seat belt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. If the protection provided by the seat belt is sufficient, the airbags do not deploy. Furthermore, in the event of an accident, only airbags which provide greater protection in the given accident situation deploy. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
Information on how the restraint system operates can be found in "Deployment of the seat belt tensioner and airbags" (▷ page 49).
See "Children in the vehicle" for information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle restraint systems for infants and children(▷ page 53).
vendi of important safety notes dent WARNING
If the restraint system is modified, it may no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software.
If the vehicle needs to be adapted to accommodate a person with disabilities, please contact a specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use only driving aids that have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time.
The restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition switched on. It goes out no later than a few onds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operation readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the restra system warning lamp:
- does not light up after the ignition is switch on
- does not go out after a few seconds with engine running
• lights up again while the engine is running
WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
text_image
at e is sec- 1 PASS AIR BAG OFF P08-15 470-31PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ① is part of the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat.
A permanently lit PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you that the front-pasenger front airbag is disabled.
Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must be either disabled or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey.
• Children in a child restraint system:
whether the front-passenger front airbag is enabled or disabled depends on the installed child restraint system and the age and size of the child. Therefore, make sure that you read the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (▷ page 53), where you will also find information on rearward or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat.
- All other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. Make sure that you read the notes on "Seat belts" (▷ page 43) and "Airbags" (▷ page 46). where you can also find information on the correct seat position.
Observe the information on automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat (▷ page 56).
Seat belts
Introduction
A correctly worn seat belt is the most effective changes of direction. There is an increased means of restraining the movement of vehicle risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
occupants in the event of a collision or if the vehicle overturns. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from it. The always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
seat belt also helps to keep the vehicle occupants in the best position in relation to the a bag being deployed.
The seat belt system consists of:
- seat belts
- belt tensioners for the front seat belts and outer seat belts in the rear
- belt force limiters for the front seat belts at the outer seat belts in the rear
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply from the belt outlet, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.
The belt tensioner tightens the seat belt in the event of a collision so that it fits tightly across your body. However, it does not pull the vehicle occupants back in the direction of the seat backrest.
The belt tensioner does not, however, correct incorrect seat position or correct the routing a seat belt that is worn incorrectly.
If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt for limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is redu. The belt force limiters on the front seats are synchronised with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident.
! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner and the front-passenger front airbag could be triggered in the event of an accident and would need to replaced.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Fur-
thermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden
changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.
WARNING
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
,fatal.
Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in additional suitable restraint systems.
If a child younger than twelve years old and be under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle:
- always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
- always observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (▷ page 53) in addition to the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
WARNING
Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if:
• they are damaged, have been modified, are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
- the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
- modifications have been made to the belt tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners may be deployed unintentionally or not function as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Never modify seat belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Otherwise, your vehicle's general operating permit could be invalidated.
Correct seat belt use
Pay attention to the safety notes about the belt (▷ page 43).
All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts correctly before you start driving. You must also make sure that all vehicle occupants have fastened their seat belts correctly during the journey.
When fastening your seat belt, always make sure that:
- the seat belt tongue is inserted into the belt buckle that belongs to the seat.
- the seat belt is tightened across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
- the seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt.
- the shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the centre of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height as necessary.
- The lap belt must be taut and as low as possible over your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must take particular care with this. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the Shoulder section of the belt.
The seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointed or fragile objects.
If such objects are located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys, spectacles, etc. stow these in a suitable location.
- Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
Babies and children must never travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
- Do not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.
You must also make sure that objects, e.g. cushions, are never placed between a person and the seat.
Seat belts are solely intended to secure and restrain persons. To secure objects, luggage or loads, always observe the "Loading guidelines" (capage 266).
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (▷ page 43) and the information on the correct use of the seat belt (▷ page 44).
If a passenger is wearing the centre rear seat belt, also observe the information on the seat belt for the centre rear seat (▷ page 45).
text_image
① ② ③ P91.40-3549-31Basic illustration
▶ Adjust the seat (▷ page 97).
The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position.
▶ Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt of and engage belt tongue ② into belt buckle ①.
The seat belt on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically; see "Belt adjustment" (▷ page 45).
▶ If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.
The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the centre of the sh der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
▶ To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards. The belt outlet will engage in various positions.
▶ To lower: hold belt outlet release ③ and belt outlet downwards.
▶ Let go of belt outlet release ③ in the des position and make sure that the belt outlet engages.
Seat belt for the centre rear seat
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down and back up again, the rear centre seat belt may be locked. The seat belt can then not be pulled out.
▶ To release the rear centre seat belt: pull the seat belt out approximately 20 mm at the belt outlet on the backrest and then release it again.
The seat belt is retracted and released.
Releasing seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Press release button in belt buckle, hold belt tongue firmly and guide the seat belt back
Seat belt adjustment
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
- the seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle and - the ignition is switched on
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-
You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (▷ page 220).
Belt warning for the driver and front passenger
The seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster reminds you that all vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. A warning tone may also sound.
The seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone stops as soon as the driver's own the co-driver's seat belts have been fast-tened.
Rear seat belt status indicator
natural_image
Silhouette of a car above three human figures, no text or symbols presentThe seat belts on the left and centre rear sea when viewed in the direction of travel, are not fastened. (Example)
The rear seat belt status indicator is available only in certain countries.
The rear seat belt status indicator informs you which rear seat belt is not fastened.
Cancelling the rear seat belt status indicator immediately (▷ page 224).
Airbags
Introduction
The airbag installation location is identified by the label AIRBAG.
An airbag supplements a correctly fastened seat belt. It is not a substitute for seat belts. The bag provides additional protection in the corresponding accident situations.
Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The various airbag systems work independently of • one another (▷ page 49).
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
Due to the required speed of the airbag after deployment, it is also not possible to entirely rule out the risk of injuries caused by the air
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries.
In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants:
- fasten their seatbelts correctly, including pregnant women
- are seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the airbags
- observe the following notes
Always ensure that there are no objects located between the airbag and the vehicle occupant.
- Adjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The centre of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level.
- Move the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
- Only hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.
- Always lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in atthe deployment area of the airbags.
Always keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.
- Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly.
If a child is travelling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes:
• Always secure children under twelve years of bagge and less than 1.50 m tall in suitable child restraint systems.
- Child restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats.
- Only secure a child to the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front airbag is disabled, and only then in a rearward-facing child restraint system. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled s. (▷ page 42).
- Always observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (▷ page 53) and on the "Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat"
(▷ page 57) in addition to the manufactur- Front airbags
er's operating and installation instructions for the child restraint system.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make sure that:
- there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag
- there are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar.
- no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, are hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
- no accessories, such as cup holders, are in attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors, side windows rear side trim or side walls.
- no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
text_image
Car dashboard interior with numbered components and blue arrows indicating directional flow or movement, accompanied by partial text on the left.Driver's airbag ① deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front airbag ② deploys in front of and above the glove compartment.
When deployed, the front airbags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats.
A permanently lit PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled (▷ page 42).
WARNING
If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no long function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury.
Never modify an airbag cover or affix objects to it.
Driver's kneebag
text_image
the P68.10-4651-31
WARNING
Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors
Always have work on the doors or door elling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Driver's knee airbag ① deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee airbag is triggered together with the front airbags.
The driver's knee airbag offers additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant in the driver's seat.
The driver's knee airbag is available only in certain countries.
Sidebags
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended.
Operation of the automatic child seat recognition may also be impaired. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing seat, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and side-mounted airway (no text or symbols visible)Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.
natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)Pelvisbags ① deploy next to and below the outer seat cushions.
When activated, the pelvisbag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The pelvisbag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs.
i Pelvisbags are only available in certain countries.
Front sidebags ① and rear sidebags ② deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest
When deployed, the sidebag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the:
- head
- neck
- arms
In the event of a side impact, the sidebag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs.
Pelvisbags
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended.
Operation of the automatic child seat recognition may also be impaired. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Windowbags
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat with blue directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)Windowbags ① are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the windowbag offers additional head protection. However, it does not protect the thorax or arms.
In the event of a side impact, the windowbag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs.
If the system determines that it can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat
belt, a windowbag may be deployed in other accident situations (▷ page 49).
Deployment of belt tensioners and bags
Important safety notes
WARNING
After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts hot. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which have been triggered are no longer operational and therefore cannot protect as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Operation
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as:
- duration
- direction
- intensity
Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the seat belt tensioners in the event of a head-on or near collision.
A seat belt tensioner can be triggered only if:
• the ignition is switched on
- the components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp" (▷ page 42)
- the belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckle s of the respective front seat
The seat belt tensioners in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts.
If the restraint system control unit detects a high-severity accident, in certain head-on colli-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, par- sions, additional components of the restraint system are deployed independently of each other:
ticularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered •ofront airbags and driver's kneebag
an airbag was deployed.
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazard situations. This procedure is reversible.
- windowbag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to us that provided by the seat belt
Depending on the person in the front-passenger If the belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag, the front-passenger front airbag is either deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small disabled or enabled. The front-passenger front amount of powder may also be released. The airbag can be deployed in an accident only if the restraint system warning lamp lights up. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. In general, the powder released is not haz-Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp (▷ page 42).
ardous to health but may cause short-term Your vehicle has two-stage front airbags. In the breathing difficulties to persons suffering from first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. It is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle. The front airbag is fully deployed if the second immediately or open the window in order to deployment stage is activated within a few milliseconds.
The activation threshold for the seat belt tensioners and airbags is determined based on the evaluation of the vehicle's rate of deceleration or acceleration at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The trig-
gering/deployment process should take place in good time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by:
- the distribution of forces during the collision
- the collision angle
- the deformation characteristics of the vehicle
- the characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided
Factors that can be seen and measured only
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
sive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor they provide an indication of airbag deployment
The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case!
only parts that are relatively easily deformed are
affected and the rate of deceleration is not high
Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a s impact or if the vehicle overturns, the applicable components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident.
- Sidebags and pelvisbag on the side on which an impact occurs, independently of the seat belt tensioner and seat belt usage Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: the sidebag and pelvisbag on the front-passenger side deploy under the following conditions:
- an occupant is detected in the front-passenger seat or
- the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
- Windowbag on the side on which an impact occurs, independently of seat belt usage and regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
- Seat belt tensioners, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection for the vehicle occupants in this situation
- Windowbags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations if the vehicle overturns and if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat be
i Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other.
How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident:
- frontal collision
- side impact
• overturn
dNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK- PRO luxury head restraints
Important safety notes
WARNING
The function of the head restraint may be impaired if you:
- attach objects such as coat hangers to the head restraints, for example
- use unsuitable head restraint covers ide If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfil their intended protective function in the event of an accident. In addition, objects attached to the head restraints could endanger other
vehicle occupants. This poses an increased risk of injury.
Do not attach any objects to the head restraints and only use suitable head restraint covers.
Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre regarding the availability of suitable seat or head restraint covers.
Operation
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints offer additional protection against head and neck injuries. In the event of a
near collision of a certain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards. This provides better head support.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
seat and the front-passenger seat
(▶ page 51). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. You can see that a NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint has been triggered if it is tilted forward and can no longer be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the functionality of the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end collision.
text_image
other PRO can e / a ① ② ③ P91.16-3028-31Safety
Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint
NECK-PRO head restraints
text_image
Car interior diagram with numbered arrows indicating clockwise and clockwise motion directions, labeled ①, ②, and ③.Do not place your fingers between the cushion of the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints.
▶ Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow ①
▶ Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down as far as it will go in the direction of arrow ②.
▶ With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion backwards in the direction of arrow ③ until it engages.
▶ Repeat this procedure for the second NECK—PRO head restraint.
i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints cle requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not place your fingers between the cushion of the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints.
▶ Remove resetting tool ① from the vehicle document wallet.
▶ Slide resetting tool ① into guide ② between the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and the rear cover of the head restraint.
▶ Push resetting tool ① downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage.
▶ Pull out resetting tool ①.
▶ With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion backwards in the direction of arrow ③ until it engages.
▶ Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
_Put resetting tool ① back into the vehicle document wallet.
If you have difficulty resetting the NECK- PRO luxury head restraints, have this work ① carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)
Introduction
In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes
! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE is activated.
Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-SAFE ^® , the possibility of injury in the event accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
Function
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
- in emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated
- in critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle under steers or oversteers severely
- on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected:
- the front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
- if the vehicle skids, the side windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
- vehicles with the memory function: the front passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavourable position.
- vehicles with a multicontour seat or active multicontour seat: the air pressure in the bolsters of the backrest is increased.
If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE slackens the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour seats or active multicontour seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE can then be reversed.
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
▶ Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary.
Seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Information about the convenience function can be found under "Belt adjustment" (▷ page 45).
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS)
of introduction
PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package.
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes
The intervention of PRE-SAFEPLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision.
The driver is not warned before the intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene:
- if the vehicle is reversing
- when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear-end collision
When driving, or when parking or exiting a parking space with assistance from Active Parking Assist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the
prakes.
Function
PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected:
- if the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned
- if the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent:
- the rear hazard warning lamps are activated and flash at a higher frequency
- the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary
- the seat belts are pre-tensioned
The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is cancelled:
- if the accelerator pedal is depressed when gear is engaged
- if the risk of a collision passes or is no lon detected
- if DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away
If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored.
Automatic measures after an accident
Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact:
- the hazard warning lamps are activated
• the emergency lighting is activated - the vehicle doors are unlocked
- the front side windows are lowered
- vehicles with the memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised
- the engine is switched off and the fuel supp is cut off
- vehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system: automatic emergency call
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secure in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there.
If a child younger than twelve years old and cl under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Alv
- always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child
- be sure to observe the instructions and safe notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
ger - release the parking brake
- shift the automatic transmission out of park position P
- start the engine
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, red for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt ( page 43) and the information on the correct use of the seat belt ( page 44).
Child restraint system
Observe the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (▷ page 60).
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use only a child restraint system recommended by Mercedes-Benz (▷ page 62).
WARNING
If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction the child may not be held securely. There is increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries
Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
WARNING
If the child restraint system is fitted incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always fit child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Further information on stowing objects, luggage and loads securely can be found under "Loading guidelines" (▷ page 266).
WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or subjected a load in an accident cannot perform their
intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries.
Immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system again.
The securing systems of child restraint systems are:
• the seat belt system
• the ISOFIX securing rings
• the Top Tether anchorages
If it is necessary to fit a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the information on "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (▷ page 57). Information on disabling the front-passenger front air-bag can also be found there.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
ISOFIX child seat securing system
WARNING
ISOFIX child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 22 kg who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. The child could, for example, not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use ISOFIX child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
When fitting a child restraint system, be sure observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (▷ page 60).
Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX securing rings.
! When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the centre seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be damaged.
text_image
① ② P01.12-3746-31When installing the ISOFIX child restraint system, fold protective caps ② of securing rings inwards.
▶ Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on both ISOFIX securing rings ①.
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. The ISOFIX securing rings for ISOFIX child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right of the rear seats.
Non-ISOFIX child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. When fitting a child restraint system, sure to observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (▷ page 60).
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the vehicle. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is fitted with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.e. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. An additional warning tone sounds.
Top Tether anchorage points
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P91.12-3748-31Top Tether anchorage points ④ are on the rear of the rear seat backrests.
▶ Move head restraint ① upwards.
▶ Remove luggage compartment cover ② (▷ page 271).
▶ Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
text_image
P91.20-2264-31▶ Route Top Tether belt ⑥ under head restraint ① between the two head restraint bars.
▶ Hook Top Tether hook ⑤ into Top Tether anchorage ④ on the back of rear seat back rest ③.
▶ Make sure that Top Tether belt ⑥ is not tv ted.
▶ Tension Top Tether belt ⑥. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
▶ If necessary, move head restraint ① back down again slightly (▷ page 100). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct roing of Top Tether belt ⑥.
▶ Fit luggage compartment cover ② (▷ page 271).
Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat
The sensor system for the automatic child sea recognition in the front-passenger seat detects
whether a special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with transponders has been fitted. In this case, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled.
If the front-passenger front airbag is disabled by the automatic child seat recognition, the following remain enabled on the front-passenger side:
- the sidebag
- the pelvisbag
- the windowbag
• the belt tensioner
WARNING
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR-BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. You may only transport a child on the front-passenger seat if they are seated in a suitable rearward or forward-facing child restraint system. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could:
- come into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
- be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
WARNING
Electronic devices on the front-passenger seat can affect the function of the automatic child seat recognition, for example:
- laptop
- mobile phone
• transponder cards such as ski passes or access passes
The front-passenger front airbag could deploy unintentionally or not function as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
i Ensure that your vehicle is equipped with automatic child seat recognition for the front passenger seat (▷ page 57). If this is not to case, always install a child restraint system a suitable rear seat (▷ page 60).
Do not place any of the devices mentioned above or similar devices on the front-passenger seat. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front airbag both before and during the journey.
text_image
1 PASS AIR BAG OFF P08-1670-31PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ① shows you whether the front-passenger front airbag is disabled.
▶ Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the iglock or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, pres the Start/Stop button once or twice. The system carries out a self-diagnosis.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up for approximately six seconds.
If, after the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:
- lights up, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
- is not lit, the sensor system did not detect child restraint system with transponder for automatic child seat recognition. If, in the case of an accident, all deployment criteria
Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.
Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: if it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always observe the information on "Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat" (▷ page 57).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of:
- a child restraint system that is not detected by the automatic child seat recognition sensor system
is unintentional disabling of the front-passenger front airbag - unsuitable positioning of the child restraint act system, e.g. too close to the dashboard
text_image
AIRBAG P68.60-2431-31Please observe the warning notice on the passenger sun visor; see illustration.
front-passenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the front-passenger door.
If you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up briefly. It has no function, however, and does not indicate that the front-passenger seat is equipped with automatic child seat recognition.
Always fit the rearward-facing restraint system to a suitable rear seat in this case (▷ page 60).
Observe the following information under "Rearward-facing child restraint system"
r(t> page 58) and "Forward-facing child
restraint system" (▷ page 58) as well as information on the suitable positioning of the child restraint system (▷ page 60).
WARNING
If you secure a child in a child restraint sy on the front-passenger seat and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR-BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur.
Rearward-facing child restraint system
text_image
AIRBAG P00.0P00.00-4696-31
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat
text_image
AIRBAG P00.01-4382-31If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle is equipped with automatic child seat recognition, this is indicated by a special sticker. The stick is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the If it is absolutely necessary to fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (▷ page 42) is the front-passenger front airbag disabled.
Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (▷ page 60) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to fit a forward-facing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always move the front- passenger seat as far back as possible. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the child system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed restraint system must, as far as possible, lie forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt against the backrest of the front-passenger outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt out-seat. The child restraint system must not touch and the front-passenger seat accordingly. the roof or be put under strain by the head rest. Always observe the information on suitable restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. (▶ page 60) in addition to the child restraint. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint
Problems with automatic child seat recognition
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is lit. | A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front airbag has therefore been disabled as desired. |
| ⚠ WARNINGThere is no child restraint system fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning, for example due to electronic devices on the front-passenger seat.There is a risk of injury.▶ Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g.:• laptop• mobile phone• a card with a transponder, such as a ski pass or access passIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| When you switch the ignition on, the restraint system warning lamp lights up and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly. | ⚠ WARNINGAutomatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning.Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you fit the child restraint system to a suitable rear seat.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Please also refer to the notes about the restraint system warning lamp (▷ page 230). |
Suitable positioning of the child restraint system
Introduction
Only child restraint systems which are approved information, contact the child restraint system in accordance with the ECE standard ECE R44 manufacturer or visit their website.
are permitted for use in the vehicle.
For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, this can mean that the area use is restricted. The maximum size setting of the child restraint system is not possible due to possible contact with the roof.
"Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label and the text "Universal".
text_image
universal 9 - 18 kg E1 03301095 HERSTELLER 0 0 0 7 3 8 6 P91.00-2320-31Example: approval label on the child restraint system
"Universal" category child restraint systems can be used on the seats indicated with U, UF or according to the tables "Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" or "Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint system".
Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "semi-universal" on the approval label. These can be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. For more
edformation, contact the child restraint system 4manufacturer or visit their website.
If it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat:
of Always pay attention to the instructions under "Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat" (▷ page 57).
There you will find instructions on how to correctly route the shoulder belt strap from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system (▷ page 58).
▶ Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible.
▶ Move the belt height adjustment to the lowest position.
▶ Move the backrest to an almost vertical position.
The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems
If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of cat I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not I the child restraint system.
If you use a category I, forward-facing child restraint system, you should remove the head restrain of the respective seat (▷ page 101), if possible. The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat.
Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (▷ page 54) and the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
When you remove the child restraint system you must replace the head restraints again immediately. All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before beginning the journey (▷ page 99).
Legend for the table:
X S eat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category.
L S suitable for child restraint systems as recommended; see the "Recommended child restraint systems" table (▷ page 62). Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Front-passenger seat
| Weight category Front-passenger | front airbag enabled | The front-passenger front airbag is disabled | |
| 0 | up to 10 kg X | U^1, L^1 | |
| 0+ | up to 13 kg X | U^1, L^1 | |
| I | Attaching a forward-facing child restraint system9 kg up to 18 kg | UF, L U, L | |
| I | Attaching a rearward-facing child restraint system9 kg up to 18 kg | X | U^1, L^1 |
| II | 15 kg up to 25 kg UF, L U, L | ||
| III | 22 kg up to 36 kg UF, L U, L | ||
Rear seats
| Weight category Left, right | Centre^2,3 | ||
| 0 | up to 10 kg U, L U | ||
| 0+ | up to 13 kg U, L U | ||
| I | 9 kg up to 18 kg U, L U | ||
| II | 15 kg up to 25 kg U, L U | ||
| III | 22 kg up to 36 kg U, L U | ||
Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
1 Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system of the "Universal" category with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the centre console must be lit.
^2 CLS Shooting Brake only.
^3 Child restraint systems with supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.
If you use a category I, forward-facing child restraint system, you should remove the head restrain of the respective seat (▷ page 101), if possible. The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat.
Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (▷ page 54) and the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
When you remove the child restraint system you must replace the head restraints again immediately. All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before beginning the journey (▷ page 99).
Legend for the table:
X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "Universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the "Recommended child restraint systems" table (▷ page 62).
The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For this, your vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website.
| Weight category Size category Equipment Rear seat left, | right | |||
| Carry-cot | F ISO/L1 X | |||
| G ISO/L2 X | ||||
| 0 | up to 10 kg | E ISO/R1 IL | ||
| up to approximately 6 months | ||||
| 0+ | up to 13 kg | E ISO/R1 IL | ||
| up to approximately 15 months | D ISO/R2 IL | |||
| C ISO/R3 IL | ||||
| I | 9 to 18 kg | D ISO/R2 IL | ||
| between approximately 9 months and 4 years | C ISO/R3 IL | |||
| B ISO/F2 IUF | ||||
| B1 ISO/F2X | IUF | |||
| A ISO/F3 IUF | ||||
The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the head restraint position accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Recommended child restraint systems
General notes
Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (▷ page 57) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (▷ page 60).
You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-I Service Centre.
Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat bel
| Weight category | Manufacturer | Type Approval number(E1 ...) | Order number (A 000...) | Automatic child seat recognition |
| Category 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months | Britax Römer | BABY SAFE plus II | 04 301146 970 20 00 970 36 00 | Yes |
| Category 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months | Britax Römer | BABY SAFE plus II | 04 301146 970 20 00 970 36 00 | Yes |
| Category I: 9 kg up to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years | Britax Römer | DUO plus | 04 301133 970 16 00 970 37 00 | No |
| 04 301133 970 21 00 Yes | ||||
| Category II/III: 15 kg up to 36 kg between approximately 4 years and 12 years | Britax Römer | KIDFIX ^5 | 04 301198 970 18 00 Yes | |
| 04 301198 970 19 00 970 38 00 | No | |||
| 04 301198 970 22 00 Yes |
Recommended "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems
| Weight category | Size cat-gory | Manu-facturer | Type Approval number (E1 ...) | Order numbef | Automatic child seat rec-ognition |
| Category 0+: up to 13 kg | E Britax Römer | BABY SAFE plus | 04 301146 B6 | 6 86 8224 No | |
| Category I: 9 kg to 18 kg | B1 Britax Römer | DUO plus 04 | 301133 A 000 | 970 16 00 A 000 970 37 00 | No |
| 04 301133 A | 000 970 21 00 Yes |
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could:
- open doors, thus endangering other people or road users
- exit the vehicle and be caught by oncomin traffic
- operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are travelling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Override feature for:
- the rear doors (▷ page 65)
- the rear side windows (▷ page 65)
Observe the important safety notes on the double-lock function (▷ page 79).
WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake
- shift the automatic transmission out of park position P
- start the engine
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts
of the child restraint system. There is a risk injury.
If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
text_image
① ② P72.12-3043-31Override feature for the rear side windows
text_image
1 2 P54.25-9462.31▶ To enable/disable:press button ②. If indicator lamp ① is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ① is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment.
Pets in the vehicle
You secure each door individually with the child! WARNING proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured if you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may push a button or a switch, for example. with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside.
▶ To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow ①.
▶ Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly.
▶ To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ②.
They could:
- activate vehicle equipment and become
k-trapped, for example - switch vehicle systems on or off, thus endangering other road users
In the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction, unsecured animals could be flung around the vehicle, injuring the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals correctly during a journey, e.g. in an animal transport box.
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems overview
In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems:
- ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (▷ page 66)
• BAS (Brake Assist System) (▷ page 67) - BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist (▷ page 67)
- COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (▷ page 68)
- Adaptive brake lights (▷ page 71)
- ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (▷ page 71)
- EBD (electronic brake force distribution) (▷ page 74)
• ADAPTIVE BRAKE (▷ page 74) - PRE-SAFE® Brake (▷ page 75)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are relatively further driving safety systems are deac- inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overriding and accidents.
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking _1f in
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is also in ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (▶ page 250) and display messages that can appear in the instrument cluster (▶ page 225).
as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the informa
tion regarding tyres, recommended minimum ▶ tyre tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tyres section (▷ page 317).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety
systems described in this section work as tively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General notes
tABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking.
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 66).
WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionusually further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
^e Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (▶ page 250) and display messages that can appear in the instrument cluster (▶ page 225).
Brakes
If ABS engages: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over.
To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS engages while you are braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions; this serves as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
BAS (Brake Assist)
General notes
BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 66).
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Brakes
▶ Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
General notes
BAS PLUS can help you to minimise the danger of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking.
i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (▷ page 66).
BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational.
With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:
- that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time
- that cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected.
BAS PLUS detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright.
If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS.
i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 67).
Important safety notes
WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
• intervene unnecessarily
- not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify people, this is especially the case if they are moving. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
WARNING
BAS PLUS does not react:
• to small people, e.g. children
- to animals
• to oncoming vehicles
- when cornering
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic uation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detect can be impaired.
Detection by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the following situations:
- dirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
• interference by other radar sources
• strong radar reflections, for example, in mustory car parks - a narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle
- a vehicle travelling in front on a different I
- vehicles quickly moving into the radar sens system detection range
Detection by the camera system is also impa in the following situations:
- dirt on the camera or if the camera is covered
- glare on the camera system, e.g. from the being low in the sky
- darkness
- if:
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle
- the camera system no longer detects a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-
- the typical outline of a person is not disti- tion as usual, if:
▶ Keep the brake pedal depressed until the other emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-
tion as usual, if:
guishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle have the radar sensor settings and operation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where visible damage to the front of the vehicle is apparent.
Following damage to the windscreen, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop
Function
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake pressure necessary if:
- you approach an obstacle and
• BAS PLUS has detected a danger of collision
At speeds of under30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. Braking assistance from BAS PLUS is provided at the last possible moment.
At speeds of above30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 7 km/h and 250 km/h. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, BAS PLUS may react to:
- stationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
• pedestrians in the path of your vehicle
• obstacles crossing your path, which move in the detection range of the sensors and are detected
If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously.
- you release the brake pedal
icle the danger of collision has passed
• no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle
• you depress the accelerator pedal
- you activate kickdown
- COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST - PLUS
General notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 66).
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autono-
mous braking function and Adaptive Brake Assist.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help General notes
you to minimise the danger of collision with the distance warning function can help you to vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such minimise the risk of collision with the vehicle in collision.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects a danger of collision, you will be warnedision with the vehicle in front, you will be visually and audibly. If you do not react to theearned visually and acoustically. visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical sit tions. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (▶ page 66). PLUS Adaptive Brake Assist assists you.
Important safety notes
In particular, the detection of obstacles can impaired in the following situations:
- dirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
- snow or heavy rain
• interference by other radar sources
• strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks - a narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle
- a vehicle travelling in front on a different link
- new vehicles or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system
Please observe the information in the section on running-in the vehicle (▷ page 132).
Following damage to the front end of the veh have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at lo speeds where no visible damage to the front the vehicle is apparent.
Activating/deactivating
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is automatically active when the ignition is switched on.
You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer (▷ page 214). When the system is deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the OFF symbol appears in the assistance graphics display.
Distance warning function
General notes
the distance warning function can help you to minimise the risk of collision with the vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects a risk of pedision with the vehicle in front, you will be earned visually and acoustically.
Important safety notes
Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (▶ page 66).
WARNING
The distance warning function does not react:
• to people or animals
• to oncoming vehicles
- to crossing traffic
- when cornering
Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
WARNING
The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic elevations. In such cases, the distance warning function may:
of give an unnecessary warning
- not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the distance warning function alone.
Function
The distance warning function issues a warning at speeds:
- of approximately 30 km/h or more if, over several seconds, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient.
The △ distance warning lamp then lightsthe path of your vehicle for an extended period up in the instrument cluster. of time.
- of approximately 7 km/h or more, if you rap-Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermission with the vehicle in front, it calculates the tent warning tone will then sound and the brake pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If distance warning lamp will light up in the apply the brakes forcefully, Adaptive Brake instrument cluster. Assist automatically increases the brake pres-
▶ Brake immediately to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.
or
▶ Take evasive action provided it is safe to so.
Due to the nature of the system, certain complex but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, thevation.
distance warning function can detect obstacles. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles.
dued period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. If Adaptive Brake Assist demands a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simultaneously ( page 51).
Up to a speed of approximately 250 km/h, Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of obser-
▶ Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distanceing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function.
The autonomous braking function is available the following speed ranges:
• from 7 km/h to approximately 105 km/h from moving objects
• from 7 km/h to approximately 50 km/h for stationary objects
Due to the nature of the system, complex but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the autonomous braking function to engage.
If the autonomous braking function demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFF) are activated simultaneously.
Adaptive Brake Assist
General notes
i Read the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 66).
With the help of the radar sensor system, Adaptive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in
Vare-brakes will work normally again if:
• you release the brake pedal
- a danger of collision with the vehicle in front, no longer exists
• no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (▷ page 66).
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
• intervene unnecessarily
- not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
• to people or animals
• to oncoming vehicles
• to crossing traffic
- when cornering
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may intervene in all critical conditions. There is risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene.
If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to malfunctioning radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS.
Adaptive brake lights
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 66).
The adaptive brake lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation:
• by flashing brake lamps
• the hazard warning lamps are activated
If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this w traffic travelling behind you is warned in an e more noticeable manner.
If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brake are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch of automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning button (▷ page 112).
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 66).
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface.
half ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP can also stabilise the vehicle during braking.
to a
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
^1 ETS traction control is part of ^® ESOn vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is a component of ^® ESP
Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, e.g. if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP ^® .
Important safety notes
than
iAS Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 66).
WARNING
If ESP ^ is malfunctioning, ESP ^ is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving key safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Off Drive on carefully. Have ESP ^ checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Before operating the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your You can select between the following Esta-vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the tuses:
notes on ESP (▷ page 314).
If the ☐ ESPOFF warning lamp lights up continuously, then ESP is deactivated.
If the ESP warning lamp and the ESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps (▷ page 250) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (▷ page 225).
- ESP ^ is activated
- ESP® is deactivated
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP in the situations described in the following.
i Only use wheels with the recommended type sizes. Only then will ESP function properly. It may be best to deactivate EBP the following situations:
Characteristics of ESP
General notes
If the ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP is automatically active.
If ESP® engages, the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP ^® engages:
▶ Do not deactivate ESPunder any circumstances.
▶ When pulling away, only depress the accele ator pedal as far as is necessary.
Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailir road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When the vehicle pulls away again, engine starts automatically. ESPremains in its previously selected status, e.g. if ESPwas deactivated before the engine was automatically switched off.
Deactivating/activating ESP® (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 66).
- when snow chains are used
- in deep snow
- on sand or gravel
Spinning the wheels results in a cut, which enhances traction.
i Activate ESP ^ as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESRill otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
You can deactivate or activate ESPa the on-board computer (▷ page 214).
gSP® deactivated:
The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
ESP® activated:
The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESRs deactivated
If ESP ^ is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the EWarning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP ^ will not stabilise the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
- ESP® no longer improves driving stability
- engine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels may start to spin
- traction control is still activated
- COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; it is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP
- PRE-SAFE ^ is no longer available; it is not Driving in SPORT handling mode or without activated even if you brake firmly with assist ESP ^ requires a highly qualified and experience from ESP ^ enced driver.
- PRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; it not activated even if the brakes are firmly applied with assistance from ESP
- ESP® continues to provide assistance when the brakes are firmly applied
Deactivating/activating ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 66).
You can select between the following ^® Estatuses:
- ESP® is activated
- SPORT handling mode is activated
- ESP® is deactivated
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the uations described in the following.
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESPin the situations described in the following.
In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®:
- when snow chains are used
- in deep snow
- on sand or gravel
- on specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired
Spinning the wheels results in a cut, which enhances traction.
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires a highly qualified and experienced driver.
i Activate ESP ^ as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESRill otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
text_image
1 OFF P54-25 9519-31▶ To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button ①.
The SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multi-function display.
▶ To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button ①. The SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
To deactivate ESP press button ① until the ESP OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
The OFF message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ To activate ESP briefly press button ①.
The ☐ ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ☐ ESP ONON message appears in the multifunction display.
Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the -ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ^® ESP stabilises the vehicle only to a limited degree.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
- ESP® no longer improves driving stability
• engine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels may start to spin - traction control is still activated
- ESP® continues to provide assistance when the brakes are firmly applied
Characteristics when ESPs deactivated
If ESP ^® is deactivated and one or more wheels of approximately 65 km/h.
start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the ESP ^ trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP instrument cluster does not flash. In such situation- deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction, ESP ^ will not stabilise the vehicle. tion.
If you deactivate ESP.
- ESP® no longer improves driving stability
- engine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels may start to spin
- traction control is still activated
- COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; it is not activated even if you brought firmly with assistance from ESP
- PRE-SAFE ^ is no longer available; it is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP ^
- PRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; it not activated even if the brakes are firmly applied with assistance from ESP
- ESP® continues to provide assistance when the brakes are firmly applied
ESP® trailer stabilisation
General notes
ESP ^® trailer stabilisation is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilised.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high centre of gravity or
tip over before ESP can detect this. There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly.
ESP ^® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of approximately 65 km/h.
ESP ^® trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction.
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
General notes
TBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.
Important safety notes
s i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (▷ page 66).
WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (▷ page 250) as well as display messages (▷ page 226).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 66).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (▷ page 169) and hill start assist (▷ page 136).
PRE-SAFE® Brake
General notes
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise the risk of collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian and to reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a danger of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking.
i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (▷ page 66).
PRE-SAFE ^® Brake is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package.
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving the radar sensor system and the camera syst must be switched on and operational.
With the help of the radar sensor system and camera system, PRE-SAFE Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for extended period of time.
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected.
PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright
i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 75).
Important safety notes
WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brake a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.
WARNING
PRE-SAFE ^® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions.
^e In these cases, PRE-SAFEBrake may:
a• give an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle
• neither give a warning nor intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially in PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify people, especially if they are moving. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot intervene. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you.
To maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
WARNING
PRE-SAFE ^® Brake does not react:
• to small people, e.g. children
- to animals
• to oncoming vehicles
- to crossing traffic
- when cornering
As a result, PRE-SAPEBrake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detection can be impaired.
Detection by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the following situations:
If you partially apply the brakes, the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full brake press
• dirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
• interference by other radar sources
- strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-Brake immediately to rectify the situation. storey car parks or
- a narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle ▶ Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.
- a vehicle travelling in front on a different line Detection by the camera system is also impaired in the following situations: The PRE-SAFE® Brake function can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions:
- dirt on the camera or if the camera is covered
- the driver and front passenger have their seat
- glare on the camera system, e.g. from the subelts fastened
being low in the sky • darkness • the vehicle speed is between approximately 7 km/h and 200 km/h - if: Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, PRE-
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the paSAFE® Brake can also detect: of the vehicle
- stationary objects in the path of your vehicle
- the camera system no longer detects a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects e.g. stopped or parked vehicles pedestrians in the path of your vehicle
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects if an increased danger of collision exists, the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (▷ page 51).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, the danger of collision with the vehicle in front have the radar sensor settings and operation remains and you do not brake, take evasive checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The action or accelerate quickly, the vehicle may also applies to collisions at low speeds where perform automatic emergency braking up to the visible damage to the front of the vehicle is point of full brake application. Automatic full apparent. brake application is not performed until imme-
Following damage to the windscreen, have the diately prior to an imminent accident. configuration and operation of the camera sysYou can prevent the engagement of PRE-SAFE tem checked at a qualified specialist workshopBrake at any time by:
Function
▶ To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti- • releasing the brake pedal
vate PRE-SAFE® Brake via the on-board com-The braking action of PRE-SAFE Brake is ended
puter (▶ page 214). automatically if:
If the PRE-SAFF Brake is not activated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display. you manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle the danger of collision has passed
This function will issue a warning if:
- at a speed of approximately 30 km/h or more, the distance maintained to the vehicle travel-
ling in front is insufficient for several secon
The △ distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster.
Protection against theft
Immobiliser
- at a speed of approximately 7 km/h or more you very quickly approach a vehicle in front. The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
▶ To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock.
▶ To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door.
▶ To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (▷ page 134).
▶ Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm stops.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle.
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm stops.
i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm stops.
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
text_image
1 PASS 2 AIR BAG OFF P80-20 3835-31▶ To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp ① flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds.
▶ To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO.
or
▶ Insert the key into the ignition lock.
or
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button.
The key must be in the vehicle.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open:
- a door
• the vehicle with the emergency key elemen - the tailgate
- the bonnet
▶ To stop the alarm with the key: press
or button on the key.
The alarm stops.
or
The alarm does not stop, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example.
If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system automatically sends a message to the Customer Centre. This is done by means of a text message or a data connection.
The emergency call system sends a message or establishes a data connection provided that:
- you have subscribed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
• the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system has been activated properly - the necessary mobile phone network is available
Tow-away protection
Function
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This can occur if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example.
Activating/deactivating
Tow-away protection is automatically switched on and off with the ATA (anti-theft alarm system) when:
• the doors are closed
• the tailgate is closed
Tow-away protection is active approximately 30 seconds after the ATA has been switched on (▷ page 77).
Deactivating
text_image
1 OFF 2 P54.25-9686-31▶ Remove the key from the ignition lock.
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② lights up briefly.
▶ Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is deactivated.
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away protection if you lock your vehicle and it:
• is being transported
• is being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car transporter
- is parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a s level garage
The tow-away alarm remains deactivated until you switch the ATA on again after opening a door.
Interior motion sensor
Function
When the interior motion sensor is switched on a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. This occur if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example.
Activating/deactivating
The interior motion sensor is automatically switched on and off with the ATA (anti-theft alarm system) when:
- the doors are closed
• the tailgate is closed
The interior motion sensor is active around ten seconds after the ATA has been switched on (▷ page 77).
You can prevent false alarms by doing the following before switching on the ATA:
- close the side windows
- close the sliding sunroof
- make sure that no objects, such as mascots, are attached to the rear-view mirror or the grab handles on the roof trim
Deactivating
text_image
1 OFF 2 GO. P54.25-9687-31Remove the key from the ignition lock.
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② flashes several times in rapid succession.
▶ Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated.
If you want to lock your vehicle and there are people or animals in it, you can deactivate the interior motion sensor.
The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until you switch the ATA on again after opening a door.
UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a double-lock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO (▷ page 85). Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. Observe the "Important safety notes" (▷ page 84).
Key
Important safety notes
United Kingdom only:
WARNING
When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle.
children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children.
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Let Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock.
! Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
If the vehicle has been locked from the outside,
the double lock function is activated as stand-
ard. It is then not possible to open the doors with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the or another key
double lock function by deactivating the interior with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film motion sensor (▷ page 78). The doors can then inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft This can affect the key's functionality.
alarm system is triggered if the door is opened
from the inside. Switch off the alarm
(▷ page 77).
All countries:
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can:
- open doors and endanger other persons or road users
• climb out and be injured by the traffic - operate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves.
Children could also set the vehicle in motion for example by:
• releasing the parking brake
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- starting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave ▶
do not keep the key:
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the key's functionality.
Key functions
text_image
Diagram of a car key with numbered parts labeled 1, 2, and 3P80.35-2475-31
① Locks the vehicle
② Unlocks the tailgate
③ Unlocks the vehicle
▶ To unlock centrally: press the 📤 button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
• the vehicle locks again
• protection against theft is reactivated
▶ To lock centrally: press the 🔒 button.
The key centrally locks/unlocks:
- the doors
- the tailgate
- the fuel filler flap
When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated or deactivated using the on-board computer (▷ page 219).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer▶ To (▷ page 218).
text_image
① ② P80.61-2696-31KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by Further information on the convenience clos-any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-ing feature (▷ page 92).
LESS-GO key in the vehicle (▷ page 135).
Locking and unlocking centrally
▶ To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.
▶ To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface ①.
▶ Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ② for an extended period.
byFurther information on the convenience clos-Y-ing feature (▷ page 92).
▶ To unlock the tailgate: pull the tailgate handle.
The vehicle only unlocks the tailgate.
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you need to carry the
key with you. You can combine the KEYLESS-functions with the functions of a conventional key. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the 🔒 button on the key.
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 1 m.
A check that periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in or in the direct vicinity of the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
- when the external door handles are touched
• during engine start - during driving
Reactivating and activating
GO If you do not intend to use a key for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS- GO function of the key. The key will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power.
For the purposes of activation or deactivation, the vehicle does not have to be nearby.
To deactivate: press the 🔒 button on the key twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the key (▷ page 82) flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.
To activate: press any button on the key.
Insert the key into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all its associated features are available again.
Changing the settings of the locking system
You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel alone. Removing the emergency key element
▶ To change the setting: press and hold down the 📊 and 🔒 buttons simultaneously for about six seconds until the battery indicator lamp flashes twice (▷ page 82).
If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the ☐ or ☑ button:
- locks or
- unlocks the vehicle
The key now functions as follows:
text_image
Diagram of a BMW car key with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating component movementP80.20-3747-31
▶ To unlock: press the 📤 button once.
▶ To unlock centrally: press the button twice.
▶ To lock centrally: press the 🔒 button. Further information about:
Further information about:
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows:
▶ To unlock the driver's door: touch the surface of the door handle on the driver's door.
▶ To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.
▶ To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles.
▶ To restore the factory settings: press and
hold down the 📊 and 🔒 buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (▷ page 82).
▶ Push release catch ① in the direction of the arrow and, at the same time, remove emergency key element ② from the key.
- Unlocking the driver's door (▷ page 86)
- Unlocking the tailgate (▷ page 90)
nnecking the vehicle (▷ page 86)
Inserting the emergency key element
▶ Push emergency key element ② fully into the key until it engages and release catch ① returns to its basic position.
Battery of the key
Important safety notes
Emergency key element
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element.
If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 77).
If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically.
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
Environmental note
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an
▶ To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key into the ignition lock.
environmentally responsible recycling system.
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Checking the battery
text_image
P80.35-2474-31▶ Press the ☐ or ⬇ button. The battery is OK if battery check lamp ① lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check lamp ① does not light up briefly.
▶ Replace the battery (▷ page 82).
If the battery of the key is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the 🔒 or ⬇ button:
- locks or
- unlocks the vehicle
You can obtain a battery from any qualified specialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
▶ Take the emergency key element out of the key (▷ page 81).
text_image
① ② P80.35-2478-31▶ Press emergency key element ② into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover ① opens. When doing so, do not hold battery compartment cover ① shut.
▶ Remove battery compartment cover ①.
natural_image
3D rendering of a car key with a labeled component (no text or symbols on the main body)▶ Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery ③ falls out.
Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
▶ Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contamination.
▶ Insert the front tabs of battery compartment ed cover ① into the housing and then press to close it.
▶ Insert emergency key element ② into the key (▷ page 81).
▶ Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle.
Problems with the key
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| You can no longer lock unlock the vehicle using the key. | The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.▶ Check the key battery (▷ page 82) and replace if necessary (▷ page 82).If this does not work:▶ Unlock (▷ page 86) or lock (▷ page 86) the vehicle using the emergency key element. |
| There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.▶ Unlock (▷ page 86) or lock (▷ page 86) the vehicle using the emergency key element. | |
| The key is faulty.▶ Unlock (▷ page 86) or lock (▷ page 86) the vehicle using the emergency key element.▶ Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| You can no longer lock unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. | KEYLESS-GO has been deactivated.▶ Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (▷ page 80). |
| The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.▶ Check the key battery (▷ page 82) and replace if necessary (▷ page 82).If this does not work:▶ Unlock (▷ page 86) or lock (▷ page 86) the vehicle using the emergency key element. | |
| There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.▶ Unlock (▷ page 86) or lock (▷ page 86) the vehicles using the emergency key element. | |
| There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO.▶ Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of key.▶ Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist w shop.If the vehicle cannot be locked/unlocked even using the remote trol function:▶ Unlock (▷ page 86) or lock (▷ page 86) the vehicle using the emergency key element.▶ Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist w shop. | |
| The engine cannot be started using the key. | The on-board voltage is too low.▶ Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.If this does not work:▶ Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (▷ page 308).or▶ Jump-start the vehicle (▷ page 309).or▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The engine cannot be started using KEYLESS-GO. The key is in the vehicle. | The vehicle is locked.▶ Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.▶ Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. |
| You have lost a key. | ▶ Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.▶ If necessary, have the locks changed as well. |
| You have lost the emergency key element. | ▶ Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.▶ If necessary, have the locks changed as well. |
Doors
Important safety notes
United Kingdom only:
WARNING
When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle.
be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 77).
All countries:
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, get they can:
- open doors and endanger other persons or road users
• climb out and be injured by the traffic
• operate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves.
Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:
If the vehicle has been locked from the outside the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (▷ page 78). The doors can then
• releasing the parking brake
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- starting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children.
Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside
United Kingdom only:
WARNING
When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle.
If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (▷ page 78). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened, from the inside. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 77).
All countries:
You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside, opening a door from the inside trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (▷ page 77).
You can only open the rear doors from inside vehicle if they are not secured by the child-p locks (▷ page 65).
text_image
1 2 P72-10-4205-31▶ Pull door handle ②. If the door is locked, locking knob ① pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened.
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. The switches are on the driver's door.
text_image
Car interior control panel with labeled buttons and a magnified inset showing two keys labeled 1 and 2.To unlock: press button ①.
▶ To lock: press button ②.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside,
For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle ever if it has been locked.
United Kingdom only: you can only open a door from inside the vehicle if the double-lock function has been deactivated. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (▷ page 78).
For all countries: you can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (▷ page 65).
When a locked door is opened from inside the ing the locking button for the interior locking vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be mechanism while the driver's door is open. Observed if the vehicle has been: Then proceed to lock the driver's door using
- locked with the locking button for the central locking or
- locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. Only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
text_image
① ② P54.25-9463-31▶ To deactivate: press and hold button ① about five seconds until a tone sounds.
▶ To activate: press and hold button ② for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are t ing.
You could therefore be locked out if:
• the vehicle is being pushed.
• the vehicle is being towed.
- the vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer there is a risk of poisoning.
There is a risk of poisoning.
You can also activate and deactivate the auto-Turn off the engine before opening the tail-matic locking function using the on-board com-gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. puter (▷ page 219).
Locking/unlocking driver's door with the emergency key element
If you want to centrally lock the vehicle u the emergency key element, begin by press
text_image
evi- h if 1 - 0 P72.10-4206-31▶ To unlock: turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
▶ To lock: turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
Right-hand-drive vehicle: turn the emergency key element in the opposite direction in both cases.
If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm for (▷ page 77).
Luggage compartment
hot
Important safety notes
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
singupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions.
Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.
If someone is trapped:
- press the 📋 button on the key or - pull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.
press the closing or Stop button on the tail- gate or pull the handle on the tailgate
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (▷ page 342).
Stow luggage or loads preferably in the luggage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 266).
Do not leave the key in the luggage compartment. If you do so, you could lock yourself out. You can:
- open and close the tailgate manually from outside
- open and close the tailgate automatically from outside
- open and close the tailgate automatically from inside
- limit the opening angle of the tailgate
- unlock the tailgate using the emergency key element
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
natural_image
Side view of a car with a circular dial indicator and a magnified inset showing the internal component (no text or symbols visible)Tailgate reversing function
The tailgate is equipped with an automatic reversing function. It reacts if a solid object obstructs or restricts the tailgate during the closing procedure. The tailgate opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for yo attentiveness to the luggage compartment while it is closing.
Press the button on the key.
▶ Pull and hold handle ①. Raise the tailgate.
or
▶ Pull handle ① and release it. The tailgate opens automatically.
If you pull handle ① and keep it in this position, you can open the tailgate manually. If you release the handle, the tailgate opens automat-
Closing
WARNING
The reversing function does not react:
• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
• over the last 8 mm of the closing path
In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped. There is a risk of injury.
When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
natural_image
Close-up of a car rear bumper with a numbered label pointing to the lid (no text or symbols on the object itself)▶ Pull the tailgate down using recess ①.
▶ Let the tailgate drop into the lock.
▶ Lock the vehicle if necessary with the button on the key (▷ page 79) or with KEY-LESS-GO (▷ page 80).
If KEYLESS-GO detects a key in the luggage compartment, the tailgate opens again after it closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second key outside the vehicle, the tailgate remains closed
Opening/closing automatically from the outside
Important safety notes
United Kingdom only:
WARNING
When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
- press the 📋 button on the key
is pull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door - press the closing or locking button on the tailgate
- pull the handle on the tailgate
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
get Turn off the engine before opening the tail- gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that is- there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is opening or closing.
If the vehicle has been locked from the outside opening dimensions of the tailgate can be the double lock function is activated as standfound in the "Vehicle data" section ard. It is then not possible to open the doors(▷ page 342).
from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior
motion sensor (▷ page 78). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle how you can open the tailgate automatically with the been locked from the outside. Key or the handle in the tailgate.
The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the ▶ Press and hold the 📋 button on the key door is opened from the inside. Switch off the until the tailgate opens. alarm (▷ page 77). or
All countries:
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury.
▶ Press and hold the 📋 button on the key one until the tailgate opens.
or
▶ When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle and release it again immediately (▷ page 87).
Closing
text_image
1 2 STOP P72-20-3252-31▶ Press closing button ① in the tailgate.
You can simultaneously close the tailgate and(>page 342). lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. Opening an
▶ Press locking button ② on the tailgate. If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a key in the luggage compartment, the tailgate opens again after it is closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second key outside the vehicle, the tailgate remains closed.
Opening and closing automatically from the inside
Important safety notes
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. In addition, people may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area, e.g. children, during the closing procedure. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of closing area during the closing process. Release the remote operating switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. To re open the tailgate pull on the remote operat switch.
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate opening or closing.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can found in the "Vehicle data" section
Opening and closing
text_image
is ed. ①- To open: pull remote operating switch for tailgate ① until the tailgate opens. - To close: turn key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. - Press remote operating switch for tailgate ① until the tailgate is completely closed. a You will hear a warning tone during the closing process.
You can open and close the tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.
^18 Limiting the opening angle of the tail-gate
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailga is open when the engine is running, particu-
General notes
Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be
damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outOpening side.
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 20 cm before the stop.
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on outside of the tailgate again after it has stop automatically. This does not delete the stored position.
Switching on
▶ To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the tailgate.
▶ To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: press the closing button the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again.
▶ To store the position: press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until you hear short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate then stops in the stored position when opened.
Switching off
▶ Press and hold the closing button on the tail-gate until two short tones sound.
Tailgate emergency release
General notes
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rea when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (▷ page 342).
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from outside the vehicle, use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate.
text_image
e. the ped ② ① P72.20-3254-31▶ Remove the luggage compartment cover (▷ page 271).
▶in Fold the rear seat backrest forwards
de(▷ page 269).
▶ Take the emergency key element out of the key (▷ page 81).
Insert emergency key element ② into the opening in trim ①.
▶ Turn emergency key element ② 90° clockwise.
▶ Push emergency key element ② in the direction of the arrow and open the tailgate.
▶ Insert the emergency key element into the key (▷ page 81).
Side windows
Important safety notes
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts are could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again.
WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
text_image
1 2 3 4 P54 25-9465-31Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is, however, only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window.
WARNING
The reversing function does not react:
• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small gers
• over the last 4 mm of the closing move
- during resetting
- when closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again.
① Front left
② Front right
③ Rear right
④ Rear left
▶ Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
To open manually: press and hold the corresponding button.
To open fully: press the button beyond point of resistance and release it. Our Automatic operation is started.
▶ To close manually: pull and hold the corresponding switch.
▶ To close fully: pull the corresponding switch beyond the pressure point.
in-Automatic operation is started.
▶ To interrupt automatic operation: press/ent pull the corresponding switch again.
If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling again.
If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling again.
You can continue to operate the side windows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
You can continue to operate the side windows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (▷ page 65).
Opens and closes the side windows
The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take precedence.
Convenience opening feature
General notes
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the key is used to carry the following functions simultaneously:
- unlock the vehicle
- open the side windows
- open the sliding sunroof
- switch on the seat ventilation for the driver. When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously:
The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the key. The key must be in proximity to the vehicle.
The "convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked.
Convenience opening feature
▶ Press and hold the 📤 button until the s windows and the sliding sunroof are in the desired position.
▶ To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is ope▶ To interrupt convenience closing: release ating, parts of the body could become trappedthe button.
in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Us
Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts the body are in the closing area.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
With the key:
▶ Release the button.
▶ Press the 📋 button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof reopen.
With KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Release the sensor surface on the door handle.
▶ Immediately pull and hold the door handle and keep the door handle pulled.
The side windows and the sliding sunroof open.
General notes
When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously:
- close the side windows
close close the sliding sunroof
Using the key
▶ Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip of the key at the door handle on the driver's door.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the key must be in close proximity to the vehicle.
Press and hold the button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed.
▶ Press and hold the 🔒 button until the side windows are fully closed.
▶ Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed.
▶ Make sure that all the side windows are closed.
▶ To interrupt convenience closing: release bedthe 🔒 button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used must both be closed. The key must be outside the vehicle. The gap between the key and the corresponding door handle should not be greater than 1 m.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel with a magnified inset showing a numbered component (1), no readable text or symbols present.▶ Touch recessed sensor surface ① on the If door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed.
▶ Touch recessed sensor surface ① on the door handle until the side windows are fully closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface ①.
▶ Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed.
▶ Make sure that all the side windows are closed.
▶ To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface ① on the door handle.
Resetting the side windows
If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it.
▶ Close all doors.
▶ Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (▷ page 91).
▶ Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
▶ Immediately pull the corresponding switch or the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (▷ page 91).
Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again
Problems with the side windows
WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side win closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, rel the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. | Remove the objects.Close the side window. |
| A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. | If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature. |
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes
WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become R trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
- during automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be ped.
! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged.
Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. To reduce or eliminate these noises:
- change the position of the sliding sunroof
- open a side window slightly
- open the sliding sunroof to the comfort setting
'Sliding sunroof reversing feature
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is, however, only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the sliding roof.
WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
- to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small gers
• over the last 4 mm of the closing move - during resetting
- when closing the sliding sunroof again ma ually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped:
- release the switch immediately or
- press the switch in any direction during automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Operating the sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
text_image
① ② ③ P77 20-2827-31① To raise
② To open
③ To close/lower
▶ Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igr lock.
▶ Press or pull the ☐ switch in the corresponding direction.
If you press/pull the ☐ switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. When opening, the sliding sunroof first automatically moves to the comfort setting. If you press/pull it again
the sliding sunroof opens completely. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling again.
The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door.
Rain-closing feature
When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes automatically:
- if it starts to rain
- at extreme outside temperatures
the after six hours
- if there is a malfunction in the power supply. The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised in order to ventilate the vehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated.
The sliding sunroof does not close if:
- it is raised at the rear.
- it is blocked.
- no rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor. If the vehicle, for example, is under a bridge or in a carport, the field of the sensor may be covered.
Resetting
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not operate smoothly.
▶ Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (▷ page 95).
Keep the ☐ switch pressed for another second.
▶ Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (▷ page 95).
▶ If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped:
- release the switch immediately or
- press the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Problem
The sliding sunroof can- not be closed and you cannot see the cause.
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
▶ Immediately after it blocks, pull the ☐ switch down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:
▶ Immediately after it blocks, pull the ☐ switch down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
Correct driver's seat position
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you:
- adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
text_image
Diagram of a car interior showing driver's seatbelt and steering wheel with numbered labels indicating key components.Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel ①, seat belt ② and driver's seat ③:
- you are as far away from the driver's airba possible
- you are sitting in an upright position
- your thighs are slightly supported by the se cushion
- your legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly
• the back of your head is supported at eye by the centre of the head restraint
- you can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
- you can move your legs freely
- you can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly
- you have a good overview of traffic conditions - the seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and must be routed across the centre of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area
Further related subjects:
- Adjusting the seats mechanically and electrically (▷ page 98).
- Adjusting the seats electrically (▷ page 99).
- Adjusting the steering wheel manually (▷ page 103).
- Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (▷ page 104).
- Fastening the seat belt correctly (▷ page 44).
- Adjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior mirrors (▷ page 106).
- Storing the seat, steering wheel and exter mirror settings using the memory function (▷ page 109).
Seats
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no age as in the ignition lock.
WARNING
The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of level accident or sudden braking, for example.
Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" (▷ page 46) and "Children in the vehicle" (▷ page 53).
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you:
- adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you of other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
WARNING
When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk injury.
Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information:
- do not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible.
- if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the s
- clean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care".
- do not transport heavy loads on the seat Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.
- when the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
The head restraints in the front seats are fitted with the NECK-PRO system (▷ page 50). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats.
orFor more information, contact a qualified spe-d cialist workshop.
i Further related subjects:
- Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat(▷ page 269)
Adjusting the seats manually and electrically
text_image
le of r eat liquid as ① ② ③ ④Seat cushion angle
② Seat height
③ Backrest angle
④ Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: lift lever ④ and slide the seat forwards or backwards.
▶ Release lever ④ again.
Ensure that the seat engages audibly.
Adjusting the seats electrically
text_image
Diagram showing car interior control panel with numbered arrows and a magnified view of the dashboard area① Head restraint height
② Seat cushion angle
③ Seat height
④ Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
⑤ Backrest angle
i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-SAFE® is activated and the front-passenger seat is in an unfavourable position, it is not to a better position.
i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (▷ page 109).
i Vehicles with the through-loading feature and memory function: if you fold down a rear seat backrest, the respective front seat is moved forwards slightly if necessary.
i Vehicles with memory function: when the seat is moved forwards or backwards, the headrest is moved up or down automatically.
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you:
- adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
WARNING
The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example.
Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
Observe the important safety guidelines for seats (▷ page 97).
Adjusting the head restraints manua
Adjusting the head restraint height
natural_image
Interior view of a car backseat with a highlighted seatbelt and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)▶ To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position.
▶ To lower: press release button ① and push the head restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the angle of the head restraints to adjust the side bolsters: pull or push
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the rear wheel and seat, with blue arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)▶ Push or pull the lower edge of the head restraint in the direction of the arrow.
Adjusting the head restraint height electrically
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted seatbelt component (no text or symbols visible)▶ Slide switch for head restraint height adjustment ① up or down in the direction of the arrow.
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
text_image
Diagram of car interior showing directional arrows and numbered positions (①, ②) indicating movement or flow in a vehicle.right or left-hand side bolster ① into the desired position.
▶ To adjust the angle of the head restraint: pull or push the head restraint in the direction of arrow ②.
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.
Rear seat head restraints
Lowering the rear seat head restraints from the front
text_image
1 P54-25-9460-31▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Press button ①.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint angle
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a blue directional arrow on the backrest (no text or symbols)▶ Pull or push the bottom of the head restraint until it has reached the desired position.
The tilt angle can only be adjusted on the two outer head restraints. The centre head restraint is only height-adjustable.
Removing and fitting the rear seat heat restraints
Adjusting the multicontour seat
WARNING
The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off.
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P91.25-2615-31
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a seatbelt mechanism with blue directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols present)Before the head restraints can be removed, the rear seat must be tilted forwards.
▶ To remove: pull the head restraint up to stop.
▶ Press release catch ① and pull the head restraint out of the guides.
▶ To refit: insert the head restraint so that notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.
▶ Push the head restraint down until you head engage in position.
① To adjust the thigh cushion
② To adjust the backrest contour in the lumbar region
③ To adjust the backrest contour in the upper back region
④ To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-rest
You can adjust the contour of the front seat individually so as to provide optimum support for your back and sides.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition back (▷ page 133).
Adjusting the active multicontour the seat
The active multicontour seat can be adjusted via the multimedia system (see the digital Owner Manual).
Adjusting the lumbar support
text_image
① P91.10-3794-31You can adjust the contour of the driver's seat so as to provide optimum support for your back.
▶ Move adjustment lever ① in the direction of the arrow until the desired backrest contour is achieved.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
text_image
1 2 3 4 P91.10-3792-31① To raise the backrest contour
② To soften the backrest contour
③ To lower the backrest contour
④ To harden the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back.
Seat heating and seat ventilation
Switching the seat heating on/off
WARNING
If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occu pants with limited temperature sensitivity or limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk injury.
Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating repeatedly.
text_image
of r is 1 P54.25 9+67-31Driver's and front-passenger seat
text_image
P54-26-0528-31Rear seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.
Driver's and front-passenger seat: the system automatically switches from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes.
Rear seats: the system automatically switches from level 3 to level 2 after approximately five minutes.
The system automatically switches down from Level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.
The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
▶Offurn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
To switch on: press button ① repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.
▶ To switch off: press button ① repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
text_image
Car infotainment panel with control buttons and a highlighted seating icon labeled '1'Driver's and front-passenger seat
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected.
▶ Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ To switch on: press button ① repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set.
▶ To switch off: press button ① repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
If the vehicle battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.
You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (▷ page 92). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.
Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The seat heating or seat The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical concom-ventilation has switched ers are switched on.
off prematurely or can- not be switched on.
▶ Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat ventilation can be switched back on manually.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you:
- adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
WARNING
Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock.
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
WARNING
The steering wheel may move unexpectedly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion.
text_image
① ② ③ ② P46.15-2575-31① Release lever
② To adjust the steering wheel height
③ To adjust the steering wheel position (fore and-aft adjustment)
▶ Push release lever ① down completely. The steering column is unlocked.
▶ Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.
▶ Push release lever ① up as far as it will The steering column is locked.
▶ Check that the steering column is locked.
go.
When doing so, try to push the steering wheel to switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow ① or ②. up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. Indicator lamp ③ lights up or goes out.
i Further related subjects:
- EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (▷ page 105)
- Storing settings (▷ page 109)
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
text_image
① ③ ② P54.25-P49A-31▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▶ page 133).
He To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow ① or ②.
Indicator lamp ③ lights up or goes out.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the key from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is switched off.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is switched off.
i The steering wheel heating does not switch off automatically.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
text_image
① ② ① ② P46.15-2576-31① To adjust the steering wheel height
② To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)
Problems with the steering wheel heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The steering wheel heating has switched itself off prematurely or cannot be switched on.
-The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.
▶ Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel heating will switch back on automatically.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if there is a risk of entrapment by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function's position buttons. This function is available only on vehicles with a memory function (▷ page 108).
WARNING
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lo control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (▷ page 220).
Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel tilts upwards if you:
- remove the key from the ignition lock
- with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door; KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1
- with the key: open the driver's door; the key is in position 0 or 1 must be in the ignition loop (▷ page 133)
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper stop.
Position of the steering wheel for driving
The steering wheel is moved to the previously set position if:
- the driver's door is closed and
- with KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/Stop button once
or
- with the key:you insert the key into the ignition lock
If you close the driver's door with the key inserted in the ignition lock, the steering wheel is automatically moved to the previously set position.
an The last position of the steering column is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you is store the setting with the memory function (▷ page 109).
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the key in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer (▷ page 220).
WARNING
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from road users driving behind to you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident.
You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you.
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
natural_image
Close-up of a car side mirror with a blue curved arrow pointing to the front wheel (no text or symbols visible)Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzle switch ① forwards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you:
- adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
text_image
① ② ③ P54.25-9470 31▶ Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Press button ① for the left exterior mirror or button ② for the right exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected exterior mirror using button ③ as long as the indicator lamp is lit.
▶ Press button ③ up, down, or to the right or left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window heating is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Heating takes a maximum of ten minutes.
i The exterior mirrors can also be heated manually by switching on the rear window heating.
Folding the exterior mirrors in/out trically
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a directional control panel and a circular icon with number 1, no readable text or symbols present.▶ Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Briefly press button ①. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. Otherwise, they could vibrate.
If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, y can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.
Resetting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you switch on the "Fold in mirror when locking" function in the on-board computer (▷ page 221).
▶ Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition (▷ page 133).
▶ Briefly press button ①.
Folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function activated in the on-board computer (▷ page 221):
- the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside
- the exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door
If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out.
eExterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position (forwards or backwards), proceed as follows:
▶ Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: manually move the exterior mirror into the correct position.
▶ Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold button ① until you hear a click and then the mirror engaging in position (▷ page 107).
The mirror housing is engaged again and can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (▷ page 106).
you
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors
WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass of an matic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Electrolyte auto- is wheel
harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury.
steering
If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following:
- immediately rinse off electrolyte from you skin with water.
Seats, - immediately and thoroughly rinse electro-locklyte out of eyes using clean water.
- if electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse out your mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
- if electrolyte comes into contact with skin or eyes or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
- immediately change out of clothing that has been in contact with electrolyte.
- if an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
The exterior mirror on the driver's side and rear-view mirror automatically switch to anti-dazzle mode if, simultaneously:
• the ignition is switched on and
- incident light from headlamps strikes the sor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not dip if reverse gear is er or if the interior lighting is switched on.
th If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.
Using the memory button
You can store the parking position of the exte- gaged prior mirror on the front-passenger side using memory button M ④. Reverse gear must not be engaged.
Parking position of the exterior mi on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror such that you can see the rear wheel that side as soon as you engage reverse gea You can store this position.
Using reverse gear
text_image
① ② ③ ④ M 1 2 3 P54.25-9472.31▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
ror(▷ page 133).
▶ With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use button ③ to adjust the exterior mirror. The rear wheel and the kerb should be visible in the exterior mirror.
▶ Press memory button M ④ and one of the arrows on button ③ within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move.
▶ If the exterior mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps.
Calling up a stored parking position
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button ②.
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position:
① Button for the exterior mirror on the drive side
② Button for the exterior mirror on the front passenger side
③ Button for the exterior mirror setting
④ Memory button M
▶ Park the vehicle and turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Press button ② for the exterior mirror on front-passenger side.
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position.
▶ Use button ③ to adjust the exterior mirror a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb.
The parking position is stored.
the
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position:
- as soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h
- if you press button ① for the exterior mirror on the driver's side.
Memory function
the Important safety notes
WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, the adjustments could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's side while the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
If children activate the memory function, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
▶ Adjust the seat (▷ page 99).
On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (▷ page 104) and the exterior mirrors (▷ page 106).
▶ Press memory button M and then press one of key the memory position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected memory position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.
WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.
Calling up a stored setting
▶ Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the stored position button.
The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the key is not in the ignition lock.
Storing settings
With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people.
The following settings are stored as a single memory preset:
- position of the seat, backrest and head restraint
• active multicontour seat: seat contour, dynamic function level - driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides
text_image
M 1 2 3 P54.25-9473-31Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to leg requirements and voluntary recommendations.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set by:
• the light switch (▷ page 110)
the combination switch (▷ page 112)
• the on-board computer (▷ page 217)
Driving abroad
General notes
If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border (exception: vehicles with static LED headlamps). This prevents oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Symmetrical dipped beam headlights do not illuminate large an area of the edge of the carriageway.
Light switch
Operation
text_image
ne eg- as 1 2 3 4 5 AUTO P P82.10-7.5/13-31Vehicles with static LED headlamps
It is not necessary to switch your headlamps symmetrical dipped beam when driving in countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which thecle is registered. Legal requirements are fulfilled without switching the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam.
1 ←P Left-hand parking lamps
2 P←→ Right-hand parking lamps
3 Side lamps, licence plate and instrument cluster lighting
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
5 Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps
⑥ 0‡ Rear fog lamp
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
Vehicles with MULTIBEAM LED
You can switch the headlamps to symmetrical asymmetrical dipped beam using the "dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left" function via the on-board computer ( page 217). This must be switched back to asymmetrical dipped beam upon your return. Symmetrical dipped beam headlights do not iminate as large an area of the edge of the criageway. In this case, "highway mode" and "extended-range fog lamps" are not available.
▶oTurn the light switch to AUTO.
The exterior lighting, except the side/parking lamps, switches off automatically if you:
- remove the key from the ignition lock
- open the driver's door with the key in position 0 in the ignition lock
^car Automatic headlamp mode
WARNING
When the light switch is set to AUTO, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to .
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times.
AUTO is the preferred light switch position.
The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light, but not in the event of poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spr
- With the key in position 1 in the ignition Ie the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
- If you have switched on the Daytime driving lights function in the on-board computer, the daytime driving lights or the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically while the engine is running, depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
▶ To switch on the automatic headlamps: turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
The daytime driving lights improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day.
When the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the green ≥00≤ side lamps and D dipped-beam headlamps indicator lamps on the instrument cluster light up.
Dipped-beam headlamps
WARNING
When the light switch is set to AUTO, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to .
When the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in the ID position, the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on even if the light sensor does not sense dark ambient light conditions. This is advantageous when there is fog or rain.
▶ To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.
Turn the light switch to the position.
The green 📋D indicator lamp on the instrument cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves the visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of heavy fog. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently looking when operating the rear fog lamp.
To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the I in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.
▶ Turn the light switch to the ☐ or AUTO position.
▶ Press the 0¢ button. The yellow 0¢ indicator lamp on the instrument cluster lights up.
Side lamps
When the battery is discharged heavily, the side lamps or parking lamps are automatically switched off to facilitate an engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and in a well like area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. Avoid using the ≥00≤ side lamps for periods lasting several hours. Where possible, switch on the right P≤ or left P≤ parking lamp.
▶ To switch on the side lamp: turn the light switch to the ≥00≤ position. The green ≥00≤ indicator lamp on the instru- ment cluster lights up.
Parking lamps
Switching on the parking lamps ensures that the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
▶ To switch on the parking lamp: turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove the key.
▶ Turn the light switch to the P ≤slant (left-hand side of the vehicle) or P ≤slant (right-hand side of the vehicle) position.
Combination switch
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54.25 047-31① Main-beam headlamps
② Turn signal, right
③ Headlamp flasher
④ Turn signal, left
▶ To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ② or ④.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.
▶ To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction arrow ② or ④.
▶ To switch on the main-beam headlamps turn the light switch to the 📋 or AUTO position.
▶ Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ①. In the AUTO position, the main-beam head-lamps are switched on only when it is dark the engine is running.
The blue ☑D indicator lamp on the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on.
▶ To switch off the main-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its normal position.
The blue ☐D indicator lamp on the instrument cluster goes out.
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus: if Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, it automatically controls activation and deactivation of the main-beam headlamps (▷ page 113).
▶ Headlamp flasher: pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow ③.
Hazard warning lamps
text_image
Car dashboard control panel with warning sign and warning triangle icon, showing status indicators and a numbered callout.▶ To switch the hazard warning lamps on or off: press button ①.
The turn signal lamps flash when the hazard warning lamps are switched on. If you now switch on a turn signal lamp using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
The hazard warning lamps switch on automatically if:
of an airbag is deployed or
- the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed: of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 10 km/h again after a full brake application.
The hazard warning lamps continue to operate even if the ignition is switched off.
Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED
General notes
MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adjust to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions and offer advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering light function, motorway mode and extended-range fog lamps. The system is active only when it is dark.
You can activate or deactivate the adaptive functions of MULTIBEAM LED via the Intell.Intell Light Sys. menu item in the on-board computer (▷ page 217).
Active light function
Extended range fog lamps
The active light function is a system that moves extended-range fog lamps reduce the glare the headlamps according to the steering move experienced by the driver and improve the illu-ments of the front wheels. In this way, relevant nation of the edge of the carriageway.
areas remain illuminated while you are drivingActive: if you are driving at speeds below
This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals sooner.
70 km/h and you switch on the rear fog lamp.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Not active:if, following activation, you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch
Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the active light function evaluates the course of the lane which you are driving and adjusts the light in advance.
off the rear fog lamp.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Cornering light function
General notes
The cornering light function improves the illu-With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you can mination of the road over a wide angle in the automatically switch between dipped-beam, direction you are turning, enabling better visi-partial main-beam and main-beam headlamps.
bility in tight bends, for example. It can be vated only when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on.
Active:
- if you are driving at speeds below 40 km, and switch on the turn signal or turn the ing wheel
- if you are driving at speeds between 40 k and 70 km/h and turn the steering wheel
The cornering light function may remain lit for short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.
Cornering light function with roundabout function:
The cornering light function is activated on both sides before entering a roundabout through and glare for the driver caused by the reflections evaluation of the current GPS position of the is thus avoided.
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout. In this way, pedestrians crossing the road, for example, are illuminated by the windscreen near the overhead control panel.
by your vehicle in good time.
Partial main-beam illumination is a form of illumination whereby the main beam is directed past other road users. Other road users are kept out of the main beam. This prevents glare. If there is a vehicle in front, for example, the main-beam headlamps illuminate the areas to its right and left, and the vehicle in front is illuminated by the dipped-beam headlamps.
The system automatically adapts the dipped-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it switches on the main-beam headlamps again.
If the main-beam or partial main-beam head-lamps are causing too much reflection from tef-
the signs, the lights are automatically dimmed and glare for the driver caused by the reflections is thus avoided.
The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.
Motorway mode
Motorway mode increases the range of the beam.
Active: if you are driving at a speed above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for at least 1,000 m or if you are driving at a speed above 130 km/h.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation.
Important safety notes
WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not recognise road users:
• who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
• who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may not recognise road users who do
have lights, or may recognise them too late. this, or in similar situations, the automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. There is a risk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the main-beam headlamps in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of:
• poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain snow
- dirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off
▶ To switch on: turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
▶ Press the combination switch forwards beyond the pressure point (▷ page 112). The □ indicator lamp on the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor switches on the dipped-beam head-lamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approximately 25 km/h:
The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users.
At speeds above approximately 30 km/h:
- if no other road users are detected, the main-beam headlamps are automatically switched on
- if other road users are detected, the pa main-beam headlamps are automatically switched on
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up.
InAt speeds below approx. 25 km/h or when there is sufficient street lighting:
- the partial main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically
- the main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically
The indicator lamp on the instrument cluster goes out. The indicator lamp on the multifunction display remains lit.
▶ To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light to switch to another position.
The □ indicator lamp on the multifunction display goes out.
Headlamps misted up on the inside
Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P82.20-4264-31① Off Switches the rear interior lighting on/
② Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off
③ Switches the right-hand front reading lamp on/off
④ ☐ Switches the front interior lighting on/off
⑤ Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off
Rear-compartment overhead control panel
text_image
① ② P82.20-4265-31① Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off
② ☐ Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the key is in position 2 in ignition lock.
The colour and brightness of the ambient lighting may be set using the on-board computer (▷ page 217).
Automatic interior lighting control
▶ To switch on or off: press the ☐ butte When the automatic interior lighting control is switched on, the button is flush with the overhead control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches on if you:
- unlock the vehicle
- open a door
- remove the key from the ignition lock
The interior lighting is activated for a short time when the key is removed from the ignition lock.
You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (▷ page 218).
Replacing bulbs
The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED bulbs. Do not replace the LED light sources of your vehicle yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop with the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required.
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Windscreen wipers
Switching the windscreen wipers on off
! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid.
! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on t- the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windscreen becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper if blades or scratch the windscreen.
For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather.
text_image
5 4 3 2 1 6 P54.25-9924-311 0 Windscreen wipers off
2 ⋯ Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity)
3 .... Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity)
4 — Continuous wipe, slow
5 = Continuous wipe, fast
⑥ Single wipe
To wipe with washer fluid
▶ Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ig lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the ⋯ or
••• position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the ••• position, the rain sensor is
more sensitive than in the ⋯ position, causing the windscreen wiper to wipe more frequently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen was no longer be wiped properly. This could mean you are unable to observe the traffic condition
Switching the rear window wiper on/off
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 et P54.25-07-31① Switch
2 Wipes with washer fluid
3 | Switches on intermittent wiping
40 Switches off intermittent wiping
5 Wipes with washer fluid
▶ Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition hit/lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Turn switch ① on the combination switch to the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on, the symbol appears in the instrument cluster.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! Never open the bonnet/tailgate if a wiper arm is folded away from the windscreen/rear window.
Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/rear window.
Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen/rear window, the wind-
screen/rear window may be damaged by the replacing the rear window wiper blade force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have R the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper.
Replacing the wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed.
▶ Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen
text_image
① P82-30-3169-31▶ Firmly press release knob ① and pull the wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow.
Fitting the wiper blades
▶ Position new wiper blade ① in the retainer on the wiper arm and slide it into place in the opposite direction of the arrow. The wiper blade audibly engages.
▶ Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly.
▶ Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen
text_image
Diagram showing car hood with numbered parts and directional arrows, likely illustrating a mechanical or electrical component assembly.▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0
This is the same as the key having been removed.
▶ Fold the wiper arm away from the rear widow.
▶ Press both release clips ②.
▶ Fold wiper blade ① in the direction of arrow ③ away from wiper arm ④.
▶ Remove wiper blade ① in the direction of arrow ⑤.
Fitting a wiper blade
text_image
on e tly. P8Z-30-3171-31▶ Position new wiper blade ① with recess ⑥ on lug ⑤.
▶ Fold wiper blade ① in the direction of arrow ③ onto the wiper arm until retaining clips ② engage in bracket ④.
▶ Make sure that wiper blade ① is seated correctly.
▶ Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear window.
| Problems with the windscreen wipers | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The windscreen wipers are jammed. | Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windscreen wiper movement. The wiper motor has been switched off.▶ Switch off the engine.▶ Remove the key from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:▶ Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed.▶ Remove the cause of the obstruction.▶ Switch the windscreen wipers back on. |
| The windscreen wipers fail completely. | The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.▶ Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.▶ Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The windscreen washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the centre of the windscreen. | The spray nozzles are misaligned.▶ Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. |
Overview of climate control system
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. Otherwise, the windows could mist up.
To prevent the windows from misting up:
- switch off climate control only briefly
- activate air-recirculation mode only briefly
- switch on "Cooling with air dehumidification"
- activate the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved when the side windows and the roof are closed.
The "Residual heat" function can only be activated for 3- or deactivated with the ignition switched off climate control. (▷ page 126).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the "Convenience opening" feature (▷ page 92). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odours. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As this depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. Climate control
i It is possible that the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the key has been removed. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the automatic
Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone)
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 MAX ZONE A/C REAR AUTO OFF 10 9 8 7 P68.10-4674-31① To set the temperature, left (▷ page 123)
② To demist the windscreen (▷ page 124)
③ To switch the ZONE function on/off (▷ page 124)
④ To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (▷ page 121)
⑤ To switch the rear window heating on/off (▷ page 124)
⑥ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 123)
⑦ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 125)
⑧ To set the air distribution (▷ page 123)
⑨ To increase the airflow (▷ page 123)
⑩ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 123)
⑪ To switch the climate control on/off (▷ page 121)
⑫ To set climate control to automatic mode (▷ page 122)
Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone)
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 MAX REST A/C REAIR AUTO 20 22 24 18 26 16 28 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ZONE OFF 20 22 24 16 26 28 19 18 22°C 17 15 16 P68.10-4678-31Front control panel
① To set the temperature, left (▷ page 123)
② To demist the windscreen (▷ page 124)
③ To switch the residual heat on/off (▷ page 126)
④ To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (▷ page 121)
⑤ To switch the rear window heating on/off (▷ page 124)
⑥ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 123)
⑦ To switch the ZONE function on/off (▷ page 124)
⑧ To switch the climate control on/off (▷ page 121)
⑨ To set the air distribution (▷ page 123)
⑩ To increase the airflow (▷ page 123)
⑪ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 123)
⑫ To set the climate mode (▷ page 122)
⑬ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 125)
⑭ To set climate control to automatic mode (▷ page 122)
Rear control panel
⑮ To increase the airflow (▷ page 123)
⑯ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 123)
⑰ Display
⑱ To reduce the temperature (▷ page 123)
⑲ To increase the temperature (▷ page 123)
Notes on using the automatic climate control
the bottom of the screen in the multimedia system display. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions.
Automatic climate control
Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use climate controDuring automatic engine switch-off, the climate optimally. control only operates at a reduced capacity. If
- Activate climate control using the AUTO and you require the full climate control output, you A/C buttons. The indicator lamps above the can switch off the ECO start/stop function by AUTO and A/C buttons light up. pressing the ECO button (▷ page 137).
- In automatic mode, you can also use the button to set the climate mode (FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended.
- Set the temperature to 22^ .
- Only use the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly until the windscreen is clear again.
- Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. When climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise miss the windows could mist up. Therefore, only up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
- Switch on climate control primarily using
- Use the ZONE function to adopt the temper- the AUTO button (▷ page 122).
i Switch on climate control primarily using r- the AUTO button (▷ page 122).
ature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp above the ZONE button goes out.
- Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC: use the residual heat function if you want to heat or vent late the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off.
- If you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at
Activating/deactivating
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock d- (▷ page 133).
To activate: press the AUTO button.
The indicator lamp in the AUTO button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.
▶ To switch off: press the OFF button.
on The indicator lamp in the OFF button lights up.
Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up n quickly. Therefore, deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function only briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is available only when the engine is running. Th inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Activating/deactivating
▶ To activate: press the A/C button.
The indicator lamp in the A/C button lights up.
In vehicles with auxiliary heating, one of the indicator lamps on the auxiliary heating button lig up when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated.
▶ To deactivate: press the A/C button.
The indicator lamp in the A/C button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function h a delayed switch-off feature.
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The indicator lamp in the A/C button flashes three times or remains off. The cooling with air dehumidification function cannot be activated. | The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactiva due to a malfunction. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
Setting climate control to automatic ▶ To switch to manual mode: press the button.
General notes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated automatically in automatic mode.
Automatic control
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition (▷ page 133).
▶ Set the desired temperature.
▶ To switch on: press the AUTO button. D The indicator lamp in the AUTO button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can the climate mode (▷ page 122).
▶ To switch to manual mode: press the button.
or
▶ Press the 🎩 or 🎩 button.
The indicator lamp in the AUTO button goes out.
Setting the climate mode
The "Set climate mode" function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.
In automatic mode you can select the following climate modes:
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE I ow airflow, slightly warmer and draught-free setting
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Press the AUTO button.
Press the AIR FLOW button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display.
Setting the temperature
Setting the air distribution
THERMATIC automatic climate control Air distribution settings
Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ To increase or reduce: turn temperature control ① or ⑥ anti-clockwise or clockwise (▷ page 119).
Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 °C.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control
You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as as for the rear compartment.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ To increase or reduce the temperature the front compartment:turn temperature control ① or ⑥ anti-clockwise or clockwise (▷ page 120).
Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 °C.
▶ To increase or reduce the temperature the rear compartment using the front trol panel:press the ☐zone button.
The indicator lamp in the ☐zone button goes out.
The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the rear compartment and the front-passenger side.
▶ Turn temperature control ① anti-clockwise or clockwise (▷ page 120).
Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 °C.
▶ To increase or reduce the temperature the rear compartment using the rear (
trol panel: press the ▼ or ▲ button the rear control panel.
Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 °C. If
Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents
Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents
Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents
Directs the airflow through the demister vents
Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the demister vents
Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents
Directs the airflow through the demister vents, the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents
Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards.
Setting the air distribution
in con turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
Press the 📋 button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display.
Setting the airflow
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock _all (▷ page 133).
To increase: press the 🎨 button.
▶inTo reduce: press the ☉ button.
You can use THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately.
If the battery is not charged sufficiently, the blower output may be reduced. Once the battery is sufficiently charged again, full blower output will be available.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
▶ To activate: press the ☐zone button.
The indicator lamp in the ☐zone button lights up.
THERMATIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side-not adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment.
▶ To deactivate: press the ☐zone button.
The indicator lamp in the ☐zone button goes out.
THERMATIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment.
▶ To deactivate: press the MAX button. The indicator lamp in the MAX button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. s Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.
^net Demisting the windows
Windows misted up on the inside
Activate the A/C cooling with air dehumidification function.
▶ Activate automatic mode AUTO.
Adjust the side air vents so that the heated air is directed towards the side windows.
▶ If the windows continue to mist up, activate the "Windscreen demisting" function MAX.
You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again.
Windows misted up on the outside
▶ Press the button repeatedly until the or symbol appears in the display.
▶ Adjust the side air vents so that no air is directed towards the side windows.
Demisting the windscreen
You can use this function to defrost the wind-screen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows.
Switch off the windscreen demisting function soon as the windscreen is clear again.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition (▷ page 133).
▶ To activate: press the MAX button.
The indicator lamp in the MAX button light up.
The climate control system switches to the following functions:
- high airflow
- high temperature
• air distribution to the windscreen and from side windows
• air-recirculation mode off
If the battery is not charged sufficiently, the blower output may be reduced. Once the battery is sufficiently charged again, full blower output will be available again.
Rear window heating
General notes
lock
The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. It otherwise switches off automatically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off.
Switching on/off
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Press the REAR button.
The indicator lamp in the REAR button lights up or goes out.
Problems with the rear window heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The rear window heatingThe battery has not been sufficiently charged.
has switched off prema-▶ Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
turely or cannot be acti-
vated. interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating
can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air temporarily if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.
If you activate air-recirculation mode, the windows can mist up more quickly, particularly at a low temperatures. Use air-recirculation mode only briefly to prevent the windows from misting up.
Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
• after approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 5 °C
after approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated
after approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5 °C if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated
Activating/deactivating
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition loc (▷ page 133).
▶ To switch on: press the 📄 button.
The indicator lamp in the 📄 button lights up.
THERMATIC automatic climate control: air-recirculation mode is activated automatically at hig outside temperatures.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: air-recirculation mode is automatically activated at high levels of pollution or at high outside temperatures.
When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp above the button does not light up. Outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.
▶ To deactivate: press the 📄 button. The indicator lamp in the 📄 button goes out.
Convenience opening or closing using the air-recirculation button
WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
WARNING
During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. There is a risk of injury.
When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. If someone becomes trapped, immediately press the ☐ switch in the door to stop the movement of the side windows. To continue closing the side window, pull on the ☐ switch.
▶ Convenience closing feature: press and hold the 📄 button until the side windc and the sliding sunroof are closed. The indicator lamp in the 📄 button light up. Air-recirculation mode is activated.
If parts of the body are in the closing area convenience closing, proceed as follows:
▶ Press the ☐ button to stop the side windows.
The side windows stop.
▶ To then open the side windows, press the ☐ button again.
▶ Press the ☐ button to stop the sliding roof.
The sliding sunroof stops.
▶ To then open the sliding sunroof, pull back the ☐ button.
Notes on the automatic reversing function for: Residual heat is switched off automatically:
- the side windows (▷ page 91)
• the sliding sunroof (▷ page 94)
▶ Convenience opening feature: press and hold the button until the side window and the sliding sunroof have opened. The windows and the sliding sunroof move back their original position.
The indicator lamp in the 📄 button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated.
If you open the side windows or the sliding roof manually after closing with the conveniend
closing feature, they will remain in this posit when opened using the convenience opening feature.
Switching the residual heat on/off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat the engine to continue heating the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature.
Activating/deactivating
▶ Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (▷ page 133).
▶ To switch on: press the REST button. The indicator lamp in the REST button lights up.
If the residual heat function is switched on, the windows may mist up on the inside.
The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting.
If you switch on the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
▶ To switch off: press the REST button.
The indicator lamp in the REST button goes out.
• after approximately 30 minutes
- when the ignition is switched on
- if the battery voltage drops
- after approximately 30 minutes
- when the ignition is switched on
- if the battery voltage drops
- when the auxiliary heating is switched on side to
Auxiliary heating
Important safety notes
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle, especially carbon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries.
You should switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces which do not have an extraction system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle away from the wind.
WARNING
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot.
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass twigs may ignite if they come into contact with:
• hot parts of the exhaust system
• the exhaust gas itself
There is a risk of fire.
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, make sure that:
- no flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle components
- the exhaust gas can escape from the exhaust pipe unhindered
- the exhaust gas does not come into conta with flammable materials.
Before switching on
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Set the desired temperature.
Auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation can also be switched on if the manually set climate control is activated. Optimum comfort is attained by setting the system to automatic mode. Set the temperature to 22 °C.
The auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation be switched on/off using the button on the centre console or the remote control.
The on-board computer can be used to spec up to three departure times, one of which is the preselected (▷ page 219).
The auxiliary heating and the exhaust gas out are situated in front of the right-hand front wheel.
Switching the auxiliary heating/venti- lation on or off using the button on the centre console
! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventilation draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance.
i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly - once a month - for about ten minutes.
The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to the set temperature. This occurs without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the fuel tank must be filled above the reserve range to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode
The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. This time limit can be altered. To do this, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature.
text_image
Car infotainment panel with control buttons and a magnified inset showing airflow or water flow indicators.the colours of the indicator lamps in button ① mean the following:
- blue: auxiliary ventilation is switched on or red: auxiliary heating is activated
yellow: departure time is preselected (▷ page 219)
To switch on the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation: press button ①.
The red or blue indicator lamp in button ① lights up.
To switch off the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation: press button ①.
The red or blue indicator lamp in button ① goes out.
Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-▶ To activate: press and hold the ON button. lation on or off using the remote control ON is shown in the remote control display.
▶ To deactivate: press and hold the OFF button. OFF is shown in the remote control display.
General notes
Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls your vehicle. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Checking the status of the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation
Store the remote control for the auxiliary heating so that the auxiliary heating cannot be switched on unintentionally. In particular, ensure that the remote control for the auxiliary heating is kept out of the reach of children.
▶ Briefly press button ON. The following messages may appear in the display:
The remote control has a range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by:
- sources of radio interference
- solid objects between the remote control and the vehicle
- the remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle
- transmitting from an enclosed space If the remote control battery is low, the battery symbol on the left of the display is shown as empty. Replace the remote control battery and observe the important safety notes when doing so (▷ page 129).
Activating/deactivating the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation
text_image
Mercedes-Benz ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 P83.70-5525-31Display Meaning
The auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation is switched off.
The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation.
The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating.
A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears in the display.
Remote control
① Display
② ON Activates the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation
Checks the status
③ ▷ Sets the departure time
④ OFF Deactivates the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation
⑤ Sets the departure time
A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently activated. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. If the vehicle is not started after this time, the running time is increased by five minutes.
The longer you press the ◀ or ▶ button, the faster the time changes.
▶ Press the ON and OFF button simultaneously. The new departure time is stored.
Activating the set departure time
A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently activated. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. If the vehicle is not started after this time, the running time is increased by five minutes.
▶ Briefly press button ON.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display.
▶ Press the ON button.
The symbol, the departure time and, depending on the selected departure time, the letter A, B or C appear in the display
Deactivating the set departure time
▶ Briefly press button ON.
The status of the auxiliary heating is shown in the display.
▶ Press the ▶ button.
The first departure time stored appears in the display.
Press the OFF button. OFF is shown in the remote control display.
If the engine has not yet reached operating temperature when it is started, the auxiliary heating running time is increased. The auxiliary heating continues to run until the operating temperature is reached. If this is the case, the symbol appears in the remote control display and the running time is zero minutes.
Replacing the remote control battery
Important safety notes
Setting the departure time
Make sure that the time set in the vehicle is correct before setting the departure time (see the Digital Owner's Manual). Otherwise, the auxiliary heating may switch on at the wrong time and at an unsuitable location. When setting the departure time, also observe the important safety notes (▷ page 126).
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
▶ Briefly press button ON.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▷ button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display.
▶ Press the ON and OFF buttons simultaneously. The ⏻ symbol in the remote control display flashes.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▷ button to set the desired departure time.
Environmental note
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an
environmentally responsible recycling system.
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
Replacing the battery
text_image
A 2 1
natural_image
Close-up of a gray remote control device with a circular dial and labeled component (B), no visible text or symbols beyond the number '3' and label.P83.70-5526-31
A CR2450 lithium battery is required when replacing the battery.
▶ Press a pointed object into recess ①.
▶ Slide battery cover ② backwards in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Insert new battery ③ with the lettering facing upwards.
▶ Slide battery cover ② in the opposite direction to the arrow on the remote control until it engages.
Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| FAIL (¶) The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty.► Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. | |
| FAIL The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off.The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.► Charge the starter battery. | |
| The auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation is faulty.► Have the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| The battery symbol on the left of the remote control display is shown as empty. | The remote control battery is discharged.► Replace the remote control battery (▷ page 129). |
Air vents
Important safety notes
Adjust the rear air vents and the air vent in the glove compartment (see Digital Owner's Manual).
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes:
- keep the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.
- never cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior.
Adjusting the air vents
Air vents are located:
• on the left and right-hand side of the dashboard
• in the middle of the dashboard
• in the glove compartment
• in the rear-compartment centre console
text_image
Car interior diagram with numbered annotations pointing to a component, likely for safety or diagnostic reference.Example
① Demister vent
② Side air vent
③ Thumbwheel for side air vent
▶ To open or close: turn thumbwheel ③ up or down.
Running-in notes
Important safety notes
In certain driving and driving safety systems, the every 50,000 km or 3 years sensors adjust automatically while a certain disThese oil changes prolong the service life of the tance is being driven after the vehicle has be differential. Have the oil change carried out at a delivered or after repairs. Full system effective qualified specialist workshop. ness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process.
Brake pads/linings and discs that are either no or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
The first 1500 km
If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life.
- Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds for the first 1500 km.
- Avoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle.
- Change gear in good time, before the rev counter needle is 23 of the way to the red of the rev counter.
- Do not shift down a gear manually in order brake.
- Try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
Additional notes on running in Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
- Do not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for the first 1500 km.
- Only allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly.
After 1500 km, you may gradually accelerate the vehicle to full road and engine speeds.
You should also observe these notes on running in if the engine or parts of the drive train on vehicle have been replaced.
Self-locking rear axle differential (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil to improve protection of the rear axle differential:
• after a running-in period of 3000 km
thevery 50,000 km or 3 years
These oil changes prolong the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
ch-in
Driving
Important safety notes
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a
misk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another.
area
WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.:
- shoes with thick soles
• shoes with high heels - slippers
rThere is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can:
• overheat and cause a fire
- lose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. I the parking brake fully before driving off.
If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on. The engine cannot be started.
KEYLESS-GO
! Do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train.
ase General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with keys featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the key must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds to recognise it. You can then use the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine temperatures (below +20 °C), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to prote
the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving full throttle when the engine is cold.
Key positions
Key
text_image
0 1 2 3 RADIO MEDIA RADI TEL 10-2511-310 To remove the key
1 Power supply for some consumers, such the windscreen wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position
3 To start the vehicle
A check that briefly establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when the engine is started.
To start the vehicle without actively using the key:
- the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock
• the key must be in the vehicle - the vehicle must not be locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO (▷ page 80)
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
• with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key
• with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
• inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO. If you lock the vehicle with the key's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
as you will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button
- you will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for around three seconds. This funcRemove Start/Stop button ① from ignition tion operates independently of the ECO start/ lock ②.
stop automatic engine switch-off function.
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
text_image
① ② RADIO MEDIA NAV1 TEL 电话: 10-2512-31① Start/Stop button
② Ignition lock
When you switch on the ignition, all of the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up.
Indicator and warning lamps, see (▷ page 247).
If Start/Stop button ① has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition.
▶ To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button ① once.
The power supply is switched on. You can activate the windscreen wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
• the driver's door is opened and
- you press Start/Stop button ① twice when this position
▶ To switch on the ignition: press Start/S button ① twice.
The ignition is switched on.
If you press Start/Stop button ① once wh in this position, the ignition is switched off again.
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key.
You can switch between Start/Stop button mode and key operation only when the transmission is in position P.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the key is in the vehicle:
- the vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop button
• the electrically powered equipment can be operated
Starting the vehicle
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can:
• open doors and endanger other persons or road users
• climb out and be injured by the traffic
- operate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves.
Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:
• releasing the parking brake
- shifting the automatic transmission out of inpark position P
- starting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system parts of the engine that heat up. There is a part of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system.
the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function.
▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
Press the Start/Stop button once a risk (▷ page 133).
Vehicles with a petrol engine: the eng starts.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow activated and the engine starts.
General notes
i Vehicles with a petrol engine: the cata General notes
lytic converter is preheated for up 30 sec or after a cold start. The sound of the engine change during this time.
Automatic transmission
▶ Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display shows P.
i You can start the engine in transmission position P and N.
Starting procedure with the key
may WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling spe and you engage transmission position D or the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
! If a warning tone sounds and the ReleaseReI park. brake message appears in the multifunction display, the parking brake is still applied. Release the parking brake.
To start the engine using the key instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling of the ignition lock. away.
▶ Vehicles with diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▶ page 133). The □00 preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time.
▶ Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (▷ page 219).
You can shift the transmission from position P to the desired position only if you depress the
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you carbrake pedal. If the brake pedal is not depressed, start the engine without preglow if the engine DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but is warm. the parking lock remains engaged.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the key verter to read more quickly.
into the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It is the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
WARNING
After a while, hill start assist no longer hold the vehicle and it may roll away. There is a of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill star assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
- you are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient
• the transmission is in position N - the parking brake is applied
- ESP® is malfunctioning
General notes
text_image
1 ECO P54.33-3641-31① ECO start/stop display
The ECO start/stop function is activated when you ask start the engine.
If the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving.
If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated ( page 137) or a malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the ECO symbol is not displayed.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: in addition, the Stop/Start active message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C.
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions.
When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the transmission in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational and the ECO symbol is displayed in green in the multifunction display if:
uto the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green
- the outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system
- the engine is at normal operating temperature
- the set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached
nd the battery is sufficiently charged
- the system does not detect moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on
• the bonnet is closed
off the driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened
If the conditions for automatic engine switch-off are not all fulfilled, the ECO symbol is lit yellow.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: in addition, the Stop/Start inactive message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display.
All the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is switched off automatically.
The HOLD function can also be activated the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic step phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated.
All other models: the engine can be switch off automatically a maximum of four times (initial stop, then three subsequent stops) in succession. The ECO symbol is shown in yellow the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the ECO symbol is shown in green in multifunction display, automatic engine switch-off is again possible.
Automatic engine start
The engine is started automatically if:
- you deactivate the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button
- in transmission position D or N, the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is active
- you depress the accelerator pedal
- you engage reverse gear R
- you move the transmission out of position
- you switch to drive program S, S+ or M (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
- you unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door
• the vehicle starts to roll
• the brake system requires this - the temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range
- the system detects moisture on the wind-screen when the air-conditioning system is switched on
• the battery's charge status is too low
i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine.
If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the ECO symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display.
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
text_image
1 ECO 2 P54 28-9507-31▶ To deactivate: in drive program C, press ECO button ①.
or
▶ Switch to drive program S, S+ or M(▷ page 144).
Indicator lamp ② and the ECO symbol in the multifunction display go out.
The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive inactive message in the AMG menu in multifunction display goes out.
▶ To activate: press ECO button ①.
Indicator lamp ② lights up.
If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the auto-
P matic transmission switches to drive program C.
If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off ( page 136) are fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. In addition, the Stop/Start active message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display.
If the conditions for automatic engine switch-off (▷ page 136) are not all fulfilled, the ECO symbol is lit yellow. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. In addition, the Stop/Start inactive display message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display.
If indicator lamp ② is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will thenTo deactivate: press ECO button ①. not be switched off automatically when the vehilndicator lamp ② and the ECO symbol in the cle stops. multifunction display go out.
All other models
text_image
1 ECO 2 P54-25-93-79-31▶ To activate: press ECO button ①. Indicator lamp ② lights up. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (▷ page 136) are fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If the conditions for automatic engine switch-off (▷ page 136) are not all fulfilled, the ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available.
If indicator lamp ② is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops.
Problems with the engine
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The engine does not start. | The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.► Deactivate the HOLD function (▷ page 169) or DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 167).► Try to start the engine again. |
| The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. | ·The engine electronics are malfunctioning.·The fuel supply is malfunctioning.Before attempting to start the engine again:►Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock.or►Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.►Start the engine again (▷ page 134). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery.If the engine does not start after several attempts:►Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display shows 0. | The fuel tank is empty.►Refuel the vehicle. |
| The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. | The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged.▶ Jump-start the vehicle (▷ page 309).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The starter motor was exposed to excessively high thermal load.▶ Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes▶ Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| Vehicles with a petrol engine:The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. | The engine electronics or a mechanical component of the engine management system is/are malfunctioning.Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop. |
| The coolant temperature display is showing more longer being cooled sufficiently.than 120 °C. The coolant warning lamp may also be on and a warning tone may sound. | The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is displayed is showing more longer being cooled sufficiently.Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down.Check the coolant level (▷ page 290). Observe the warning notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. |
| If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. Coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.▶ If the coolant temperature is below 120 °C, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. |
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling spe and you engage transmission position D or the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.
Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Overview of transmission positions
text_image
R N P N D P27.60-3751-31P Park position with parking lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive
Transmission position and drive program display
The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.
text_image
① ② PRND S P54.33-3642-31① Transmission position display
② Drive program display
Additionally, displays next to the selector level mark the current transmission position.
The displays light up when the key is inserted in
the ignition. The displays go out when the key is DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its removed from the ignition. original position. The current transmission posi-
If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should p away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program C or S.
Engaging park position P
text_image
① P P27.60-3752-31▶ When the vehicle is stationary, press button ①.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
text_image
R N P N DP Park position with parking lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column.
This DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display (▷ page 140).
Transmission position and drive program display
The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.
text_image
R E N P D1 ② ① P54.83-3643-31① Transmission position display
② Drive program display
The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission position you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should p- away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S.
Engaging park position P
! If the engine speed is too high, do not show the automatic transmission directly from D R, from R to D or directly to P. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged.
▶ Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direct of arrow P. Transmission position display P is shown in the multifunction display.
Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengages the parking lock. The transmission is in neutral N. In order to shift from park position P directly R or D:
• depress the brake pedal and
- push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down past the first point of resistance
Engaging park position P automatically
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
- you switch off the engine using the key and remove the key
- you switch off the engine using the key or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door
- you open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R
Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (▷ page 170) and on DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 165).
Engaging reverse gear R
! Only shift the automatic transmission to lay when the vehicle is stationary.
If the transmission is in position D or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.
If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.
The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (▷ page 136).
Shifting to neutral N
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can:
- open doors and endanger other persons or road users
• climb out and be injured by the traffic - operate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves.
Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:
• releasing the parking brake
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- starting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children.
▶ If the transmission is in position D or R: put the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
▶ If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
If you switch off the engine with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically.
With the key: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.
With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P.
If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system:
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
▶ Insert the key into the ignition lock.
▶ All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Shift to neutral N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the parking brake.
▶ Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D
▶ If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.
▶ If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.
P
Park position
This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is stationary (▷ page 175).
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
- you switch off the engine using the key and remove the key
- you switch off the engine using the key or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door
- you open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R
R
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is stationary.
N
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged.
If ESP ^® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission only to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically.
! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission.
Drive
The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available.
Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. Gearshifting is determined by:
• the selected drive program
• the position of the accelerator pedal
- the road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Your driving style influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear:
- little throttle: early upshifts
- more throttle: late upshifts
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program.
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
gear depending on the engine speed.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lowervehicles with the AMG Sport package
▶ Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Towing a trailer
Towing a trailer is not possible with all mode. For further information, see (▷ page 202).
▶ Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients.
▶ Manual drive program: depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, shift into a gear (▷ page 145) in which the engine will run in the middle of the engine speed range. This also applies if cruise control, DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC are activated.
Program selector button
General notes
text_image
① E S P27.60-3747-31All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG sports package)
▶ Press program selector button ① repeated until the letter for the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display.
text_image
① S E M P27.60-3748-31▶ Press program selector button ① repeatedly until the letter for the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display.
The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics.
Further information about permanent drive program M (▷ page 146).
In addition to permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (▷ page 145).
E Economy Comfortable, economical driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gearshifting
For further information on the automatic drive program, see (▷ page 144).
i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program E each time the engine is started.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
text_image
① S S* C M RS P54 25-9548-31Drive program selector with manual drive program
▶ Turn drive program selector ① until the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display in the speedometer.
The drive program indicator on drive program selector ① lights up in red.
i Further information about permanent drive program M (▷ page 146).
In addition to permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (▷ page 145).
| C Controlled Efficiency | Comfortable, economical driving |
| S Sport Sporty driving style | |
| S+ SportPlus Particularly sporty driving style | |
| M Manual Manual gearshifting | |
| RS RACE START | Optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill |
For further information on the automatic drive program, see (▷ page 144).
i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started.
i RS cannot be selected during normal driving. For further information on RACE START, see (▷ page 170).
Steering wheel gearshift paddles
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with labeled parts including controls and steering wheelIn the manual drive program, you can change gears manually using steering wheel gearshift paddles ① and ②.
Further information about permanent drive program M (▷ page 146).
Further information about temporary drive program M (▷ page 145).
You can only change gear with the steering wheel gearshift paddles when the transmission is in position D.
Automatic drive program
Automatic drive program E (C)
Drive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles) is characterised by the following:
- comfort-oriented engine and automatic transmission settings.
- optimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
- the vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully.
- the vehicle has improved driving stability, e.g. on slippery road surfaces.
- the automatic transmission shifts up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin.
Automatic drive program S
Drive program S (or, in the case of Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is characterized by the following:
- sporty engine and automatic transmission settings.
- the automatic transmission shifts up later. Fuel consumption may be higher as a result the later automatic transmission shift points.
Manual drive program M
General notes
In this drive program, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel geashift paddles. The transmission must be in portion D to do this.
You can activate manual drive program M in automatic drive programs E, C and S.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG sports package: as well as temporary drive program M you can also activate permanent drive program M (▷ page 143).
Further information about permanent drive program M (▷ page 146).
Activating
▶ Shift the transmission to position D.
▶ Pull the left or right steering wheel gearshift paddle (▷ page 144).
Manual drive program M is temporarily activated. The multifunction display shows M at the selected gear.
Shifting gears
If you pull on the left or right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle, the automatic transmission switches to manual drive program M for limited amount of time. In cases where it is missing, the automatic transmission shifts up or down to the next gear.
▶ To shift up: pull the right-hand steering w gearshift paddle (▷ page 144). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear.
If the maximum engine speed in the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmis-
sion automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage.
To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (▷ page 144).
The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down.
i Automatic downshifting occurs when coast ing.
Gearshift recommendation
text_image
R T2 N P ① ② P54.33-3644-31The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting a fuel-efficient driving style. The multifunction display shows you the recommended gear.
▶ Shift to recommended gear ② according to gearshift recommendation ① when shown in the multifunction display.
fDeactivating
If you have activated manual drive program M, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions, the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain.
If manual drive program M has been deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts into the automatic drive program that was last selected, per-E, C or S.
You can also deactivate manual drive program M yourself:
▶ Pull on the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle and hold it in place (▷ page 144). or
▶ Switch the transmission position. n-
• All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehMercedes-AMG vehicles
cles: use the DIRECT SELECT lever (▷ page 140)
- Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the lever (▷ page 140)
or
▶ Change the drive program.
- All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG ve cles: use the drive program selector bu (▷ page 143)
- Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the drive program selector (▷ page 144)
Manual drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with the AMG sports package)
General notes
In this drive program, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission must be in position D to do this.
As well as this permanent drive program M, can also activate temporary drive program M (▷ page 145).
! In manual gearshift program M, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevi-ving. You must make sure that the engine onspeed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
text_image
120 km/h 3 UP ① ② 84 °C 98 °C Stop/Start active P54.33-3998-31① Gear indicator
② Upshift indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown on the multifunction display.
When the UP message appears in the multifunction display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle.
Activating the manual drive program Gearshift recommendation
▶ All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press the program selector button repeatedly until drive program M appears in the multifunction display (▷ page 143).
▶ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector until drive program M appear in the multifunction display (▷ page 144). The indicator M on the drive program select lights up in red.
In manual drive program M, you can change yourself using the steering wheel gearshift padles if the transmission is in position D. The multifunction display shows the selected and engaged gear.
Upshifting
▶ Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear.
text_image
R 12 N P ① ② ① P54.33-3644-31The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting a fuel-efficient driving style. The rec-gear-commended gear is shown on the multifunction display.
▶ If relevant gearshift recommendation ① appears in the multifunction display on the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (▷ page 144). The automatic transmission shifts to recommended gear ②.
Downshifting
▶ Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle.
The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.
If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down.
For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed.
Kickdown
You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M.
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.
▶ Shift back up once the desired speed is reached.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M.
Deactivating the manual drive program
▶ Press the program selector button (▷ page 143).
▶ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn the drive gram selector (▷ page 144).
| Problems with the transmission | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The transmission has problems shifting gear. | The transmission is losing oil.▶ Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| 7G-TRONIC:The acceleration ability is deteriorating.The transmission no longer changes gear. | The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift intosecondgear and reverse gear.▶ Stop.▶ Shift the transmission to positionP.▶ Switch off the engine.▶ Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.▶ Shift the transmission to positionDorR.IfDis selected, the transmission shifts intosecondgear; ifRis selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.▶ Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| 9G-TRONIC:The acceleration ability is deteriorating.The transmission no longer changes gear. | The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is in positionN.▶ Stop.▶ Shift the transmission to positionP.▶ Switch off the engine.▶ Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.▶ Shift the transmission to positionDorR.▶ Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
Transfer case
This section only applies to vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC). The front and rear axles are constantly driven.
! Performance tests may only be carried out on a two-axle roller dynamometer. Otherwise, the braking system or the transfer case could be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information on performance tests.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.
Refuelling
Important safety notes
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel, incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and exploitation.
You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling.
WARNING
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury.
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into conta with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
- Wash the fuel off any affected areas of with water and soap immediately.
- If you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thoroughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention.
- If fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting.
- Change any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately.
WARNING
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk fire and explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up.
WARNING
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel.
Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the in fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painte thorsurfaces. You could otherwise damage the k paintwork.
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process, Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle.
of further information on fuel and fuel quality (▷ page 337).
Refuelling
General notes
Observe the important safety notes (▷ page 148).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you unlock or lock the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO.
The position of the fuel filler cap is dis- played in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi- cle.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Opening the fuel filler flap
text_image
Diagram showing car wheel and internal components with numbered annotations indicating parts of the engine or valve assembly.① Open the fuel filler flap
② Insert the fuel filler cap
③ Tyre pressure table
④ Instruction label on the fuel type to be refu elled
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed.
▶ Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow ①.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
▶ Open the fuel filler flap fully.
▶ Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Insert the fuel filler cap, held in a horizontal position, into the recesses in the fuel filler hinge arm from above.
▶ Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.
▶ Only fill the fuel tank until the fuel pump nozzle switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Fuel may otherwise leak out.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps.
Closing the fuel filler flap
▶ Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.
▶ Close the fuel filler flap.
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central locking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing.
Fuel filler flap emergency release
text_image
① ② P88.60-2403-31▶ Open the tailgate.
▶ Open the right-hand side trim panel.
▶ Fold down the trim.
▶ Detach the emergency release from retainer ①.
Pull the emergency release in the direction of arrow ②.
The fuel filler flap is released.
Open the fuel filler flap.
| Problems with the fuel and fuel tank | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. | ⚠ WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.There is a risk of fire or explosion.▶ Apply the electric parking brake.▶ Switch off the engine.▶ Remove the key from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:▶ Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed.▶ Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The engine does not start. | The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry.▶ Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel.▶ Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (▷ page 133).▶ Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly.If the engine does not start:▶ Turn the ignition on again for a maximum of ten seconds (▷ page 133).▶ Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly.If the engine does not start after three attempts:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. | The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.▶ Unlock the vehicle (▷ page 79). |
| The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.▶ Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (▷ page 81).▶ Open the tailgate.▶ Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release (▷ page 150). | |
| The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
Parking
Important safety notes
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-withal position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.
WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake
- shift the automatic transmission out of park position P
- start the engine
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
▶ Firmly depress the parking brake.
▶ All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): shift the transmission to position P.
text_image
P ① P P27.60-3752-31! Always secure the vehicle correctly against▶ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: when the vehicle rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivis stationary, press button ①. etrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is safeguarded against rolling away unintentionally:
• the parking brake must be applied
- the transmission must be in position P and key must be removed from the ignition lock
- the front wheels must be turned towards the kerb on steep uphill or downhill gradients
▶ With the key: turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated.
▶ With KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button (▶ page 133).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0: "key removed".
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically.
With the key: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the key
from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.
With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the drive or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P.
If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system:
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
▶ Insert the key into the ignition lock.
▶ All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Shift to neutral N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the parking brake.
▶ Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for about three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.
Parking brake
WARNING
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again.
WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle's, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake
• shift the automatic transmission out of pa ng position P - start the engine
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
text_image
the vehicle /nc- ① ② P42.20-2663-31The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake.
To apply: depress parking brake ② firmly. The (1) indicator lamp in the instrument a- cluster lights up if the engine is running.
▶ To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Pull release handle ①.
The (①) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Parking up the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer six weeks, it may suffer from lack of use.
▶ Contact a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.
You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could a for example, the power steering and the b boosting effect. You will require considerable more effort to steer and brake. There is a of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Drive sensibly - save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
▶ The tyres should always be inflated to the ommended tyre pressure.
▶ Remove unnecessary loads.
▶ Remove roof racks when they are not need
▶ Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
▶ Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
▶ Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Service Booklet or by the service interval displ
Fuel consumption also increases when driving cold weather, in stop-start traffic, on short journeys and in hilly terrain.
th Eco display
text_image
ECO DISPLAY 62 % from start Acceleration Constant Coasting P54.33-3481-31The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Consumption can be significantly influenced by your driving style.
The ECO display consists of three bars:
• AccelerationAcceleration
• ConstantConstant
• CoastingCoasting
The percentage count is the mean value of the three bar values. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage count indicates a more economical driving style.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption.
In addition to driving style, the consumption is affected by many other factors, such as:
load
- tyre pressure
- cold start
- choice of route
• the use of electrical consumers
These factors are not included in the ECO display.
The evaluation of your driving style takes the following three categories into consideration:
- AccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of processes):
- the bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds
- the bar empties: sporty acceleration
- ConstantConstant (assessment of driving at all times):
- the bar fills up: constant speed and avance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration
- the bar empties: fluctuations in speed
- CoastingCoasting (assessment of all dec processes):
- the bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes.
- the bar empties: frequent braking
An economical driving style involves driving at a moderate engine speed.
To achieve a higher value in the categories Acceleration and Constant:
- observe the gearshift recommendation
- drive the vehicle in drive program E
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the motorway, only the bar for Constant will change.
The ECO display summarises the driving characteristics from the start of the journey, its completion. Therefore, there are dynamic changes in the bars at the start of a journey. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For more dynamic changes, perform a manual reset.
Further information on the ECO display (▷ page 209).
Brakes
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface, an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident.
I acceleration Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
Charger into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle and when towing a trailer.
This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS.
This will use the braking effect of the engine so less braking will be required to maintain the vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Heavy and light loads
WARNING
The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There a risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.
Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This improves the grip of the brakes.
Wet road surfaces
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after a car wash or after driving through deep water.
You will have to depress the brake pedal more. The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicles. This may lead to noise when braking. This is dependent on:
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle speed
washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion.
- braking force - environmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity
Limited braking performance on salt-treated roads
If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of may form on the brake discs and pads. This increase the braking distance considerably.
- In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions.
- Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey.
- Maintain a much greater distance to the vcle in front.
New brake pads/linings
Brake pads/linings and discs that are either or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved.
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.
AMG high-performance and ceramic brakes
The high-performance brake system is only installed on the Mercedes-AMG CLS 63 S Mercedes-AMG CLS 63 S 4MATIC models. The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age (service life) that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further information about this from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Always be aware of this and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during the running-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. If you regularly drive at high speeds, it is particularly important to have the brake system checked and maintained regularly.
Driving on wet roads
Aquaplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if:
- you are driving at low speeds
- the tyres have adequate tread depth
For this reason, drive in the following manner in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which daquaplaning can occur:
- lower your speed
- avoid tyre ruts
- avoid sudden steering movements
- brake carefully
Driving on flooded roads
! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in fr or in the opposite direction create waves. may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed:
This Shift the transmission to position N.
▶ Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering.
These notes must be observed under all cirThe outside temperature indicator is not cumstances. You could otherwise damage designed to serve as an ice-warning device the engine, the electronics or the transmis-is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
If you must drive on stretches of road on wh water has collected, please bear in mind that:
- in the case of standing water, the water level must be no higher than the lower edge of vehicle body
- you should drive no faster than walking pa
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions.
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
Winter driving
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface(tinpage 320).
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Further information on driving with summer effect, the drive wheels could lose their griptyres (▷ page 319).
This increases the risk of skidding and having observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (▷ page 319).
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
Further information on driving with snow chains
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heat running, make sure the exhaust pipe and around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.
Further information on driving with summer tyres (▷ page 319).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (▷ page 319).
Driving systems
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one well thought-out system - for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users.
Further information on driving safety systems (pt) page 66).
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration steering and braking manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
Cruise control
General notes
"Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must select a low
gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make up the braking effect of the engine. This relieves load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
③ To store the current speed or calling up the last stored speed ④ To store the current speed or a lower speed ⑤ To switch between cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC ⑥ To deactivate cruise control
Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions are appropriate for maintaining a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store road speed above 30 km/h.
You can operate cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected:
Important safety notes
- LIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident. LM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-TRONIC is selected nor override the laws of physics. Cruise contrWhen you activate cruise control, the multifunc cannot take into account road, weather or traffic display shows the stored speed for five second conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You ands. The symbol also appears in the mulresponsible for maintaining a safe distance from function display. the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for bra ing in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use cruise control:
Speedometer with segments: when cruise control is activated, the segments from the stored speed to the end of the scale light up.
- in road and traffic conditions that do not all you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads.
- on smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.
- when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow.
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.
The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
text_image
① ⑥ ⑤ ③ ② ④ P54.25-0180-31① To store the current speed or a higher speed
② LIM indicator lamp
▶ Check whether LIM indicator lamp ② is off. ce If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the g, direction of arrow ⑤. LIM indicator lamp ② in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected.
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled:
• the parking brake must be released.
- you are driving faster than 30 km/h.
- ESP ^ must be switched on, but not intervening.
• the transmission must be in position D.
- the cruise control function must be selected (▷ page 158).
Storing and maintaining the current speed
You can accept the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h.
▶ Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever up ① down ④.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically braking the vehicle.
Storing the current speed or calling the last stored speed
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it is lo than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ③.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it C stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.
Setting a speed
▶ Press the cruise control lever up ① for a If higher speed or down ④ for a lower speed
- Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached.
▶ Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored.
To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ④ to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments.
To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ④ beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments.
Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: the
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards ⑥.
or
▶ Brake.
you
or
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ⑤.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ② in the cruise control lever lights up.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: you depress the parking brake
• you are driving at less than 30 km/h
- ESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP
- you shift the transmission to position N while driving
- you are driving at less than 30 km/h - ESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP - you shift the transmission to position N while driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise control off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine.
SPEEDTRONIC
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED-⑤ TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. SPEED-TRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. SPEEDTRONIC is only an Use the cruise control lever to operate cruise aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe Control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle SPEEDTRONIC. speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected:
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.
You can set a variable or permanent limit speed:
• variable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up and
- permanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (▷ page 161)
i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stor
General notes
SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep down hill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC
General notes
text_image
① ⑥ ⑤ ③ ④ ② P54.25-0480-31① To store the current speed or a higher ② LIM indicator lamp
③ To store the current speed or calling up the last stored speed
④ To store the current speed or a lower speed
⑤ To switch between cruise control or ci- DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEED-TRONIC
To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC
Use the cruise control lever to operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC.
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected:
• LIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected
• LIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED- -TRONIC is selected
You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running.
Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored.
▶ Check whether LIM indicator lamp ② is on. u If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already selected.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ⑤.
LIM indicator lamp ② in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected.
Storing the current speed
You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running.
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ④. The current speed is stored and shown in the multifunction display.
Speedometer with segments: the segments light up from the start of the scale up to the stored speed limit.
Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ③.
Setting a speed
▶ To adjust the set speed in 10 km/hincr ments: briefly press the cruise control lever switch off the engine.
up ① beyond the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ④ for a lower speed.
or
▶ Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up ① for a 160 km/h (e.g. when driving on winter tyres) higher speed or down ④ for a lower speed and 240 km/h(> page 218).
▶ To adjust the set speed in 1 km/hincrements: briefly press the cruise control lever appears in the multifunction display.
up ① to the pressure point for a higher speed permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active even or down ④ for a lower speed. if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated.
or
▶ Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
Press the cruise control lever up ① for a higher speed or down ④ for a lower speed.
Switching SPEEDTRONIC to passive
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC is switched to passive mode. The following message appears in the multifunction display: SPEEDTRONIC passive.
You can then exceed the stored speed. SPEE TRONIC is activated again if you:
- drive slower than the stored speed without kickdown
- set a new speed or
• call up the last speed stored again
The SPEEDTRONIC passive message in the multifunction display disappears.
Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC
It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEE TRONIC by braking.
There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC:
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards you or ⑥.
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ⑤.
LIM indicator lamp ② in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected
Permanent SPEEDTRONIC
You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h (e.g. when driving on winter tyres) and 240 km/h(>page 218).
eShortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display.
Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated.
You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
DISTRONIC PLUS
the General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance from the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system.
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention,
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the
instrument cluster. Brake immediately to increase the distance from the vehicle in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.
DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the speed range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients.
Important safety notes
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
- people or animals
- stationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
• oncoming and crossing traffic
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic uation and be ready to brake.
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly recognise other road users and complex traffic conditions.
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
- give an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle
- neither give a warning nor intervene
• accelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be prepared brake, particularly if DISTRONIC PLUS warns you.
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.
If this deceleration is not sufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a risk of an accident.
Apply the brakes yourself in these situations and try to take evasive action.
! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations:
- when towing away
- in a car wash
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC
PLUS cannot take road and weather conditions or traffic conditions into account. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
givpeed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
sit-• in road and traffic conditions that do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads
- on smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid
- when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of:
- dirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
- snow or heavy rain
to interference by other radar sources
- the possibility of strong radar reflections, e.g. in multi-storey car parks
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored.
^3 This speed can:
• be too high for a filter lane or a slip road
- be so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left (in countries where they drive on the right)
- be so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (in countries where they drive on the left)
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ P54.25-0482-31① To activate and store the current speed or higher speed
② To set the specified minimum distance
③ LIM indicator lamp
④ To activate and store the current speed call up the last stored speed
⑤ To activate and store the current speed or lower speed
⑥ To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC
⑦ To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
You can operate variable SPEEDTRONIC and DISTRONIC PLUS with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected
- LIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-TRONIC is selected.
• LIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS selected.
Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS
▶ Check whether LIM indicator lamp ③ is off. If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selected.
▶ If it is not, move the cruise control lever in direction of arrow ⑥.
LIM indicator lamp ③ in the cruise control lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
Activation conditions
To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
- the engine must be running. It may take up to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use.
• the parking brake must be released. - ESP ^ must be switched on, but not interve ing.
• Active Parking Assist must not be activated
• the transmission must be in position D. - the driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened.
- the front-passenger door and the rear door must be closed.
• the bonnet must be closed.
• the vehicle must not be skidding. - the DISTRONIC PLUS function must be selected (▷ page 163).
Activating
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ④, or move it up ① or down ⑤. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
▶ Move the cruise control lever repeatedly up ① or down ⑤ until the desired speed is set.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired is stored speed.
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well.
If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC suspended message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front the will then not be maintained. The position of the accelerator pedal will determine the speed.
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h.
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ④, up ① or down ⑤. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
Activating at the current speed/last stored speed
WARNING
If you call up a stored speed and this is ferent from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is risk of an accident.
Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you not know what the stored speed is, store desired speed again.
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ④.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time ^4 is activated, the current speed is stored. Oth
erwise, it sets the vehicle speed to the previously stored value.
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
Pulling away and driving
▶ If you want to pull away with DISTRON PLUS: remove your foot from the brake ped
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ④.
or
▶ Accelerate briefly.
The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed that of the vehicle in front.
If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. Ve
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a diff ^① . The following function is not operational in ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then all countries.
brakes automatically.
If DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle in front, the system operates like a cruise control to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicleactive and you:
this way, the specified minimum distance you have selected is maintained.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed the set speed.
Selecting the drive program
DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S or M (AMG vehicles: S, S+ or M) driving program (▷ page 143).
^dif Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E (AMG vehicles: C) driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-start traffic.
Changing lanes
dDISTRONIC PLUS aids you when switching to the overtaking lane, if:
- you are driving faster than 70 km/h
- you switch on the respective turn signal
- DISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front
al. e•il DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of th-a collision
If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small.
i Vehicles with COMAND Online multime- dia system: when you change lanes,
DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the right lane in the case of left-side traffic or the left lane in the case of right-side traffic.
Vehicles with Audio 20 multimedia system: when you change lanes, DISTRONIC
PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehicles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehicles.
Vehicles with a COMAND Online multime- dia system
The following function is not operational in all countries.
DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information
from your navigation system so that it can adapt to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is proactive and you:
- approach or drive around a roundabout
- approach a T-junction
•turn off at a motorway exit
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily maintains the current driving speed and does not acceler-
ate. This is based on the current map data in navigation system.
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the speed you set.
The system takes into account the fact that overtaking on the right is not permitted on motorways or high-speed major roads at speed
above 80 km/h. The driving speed is adjusted the speed of the queue of vehicles in the adjacent lane to the left.
iWhen DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if:
the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened
- the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop dsfunction
a system fault occurs
• the power supply is insufficient
i Prevention of overtaking on the right applies to countries where traffic drives on the right.
In countries where traffic drives on the left overtaking on the left is prevented accordingly.
Stopping
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if
- there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply.
- DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
- the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.
• the battery is disconnected. - the accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Setting a speed
▶ Move the cruise control lever up ① for a higher speed or down ⑤ for a lower speed
- Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached.
▶ Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is
d activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to
if the new speed stored.
▶ To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly move the cruise control lever up ① or down ⑤ to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments.
▶ To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly move the cruise control lever up ① or down ⑤ beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments.
If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
Setting the specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS maintains to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (▷ page 166).
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient distance to the vehicle in front and comply
Further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 167).
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has stopped, it will cause your vehicle to brake and come to a halt.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake.
Depending on the specified minimum distance, with the minimum distance as required by your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front of the current distance behind the vehicle in front. The if necessary.
specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever.
text_image
P54.25-2491-31▶ To increase: turn control ② in direction (DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.
▶ To decrease: turn control ② in direction DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.
Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the speedometer
text_image
123.0 km 26590 20.5°C R E N P D5 P54-33-36 11:81When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ② in the set speed range light up. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ② between speed of the vehicle in front ① and stored speed ③ light up.
For design reasons, the speed displayed in five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC the speedometer may differ slightly from the PLUS. stored speed for DISTRONIC PLUS.
Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the multifunction display
Showing the assistance graphic
▶ Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (▷ page 213).
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
text_image
100 m 50 m ① ② ③ 0 m ④ 20.5 °C R P54.33-3553-31① Vehicle in front, if detected
② Distance indicator: current distance from the vehicle in front
③ Specified minimum distance from the vehicle in front; adjustable
④ Own vehicle
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated
text_image
100 m 50 m ① ② 0 m ③ ④ DISTRONIC PLUS 130 km/h 20.5 °C R P54.33-3552-31① Vehicle in front, if detected
② Specified minimum distance from the vehicle in front; adjustable
③ Own vehicle
④ DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated)
You will see the stored speed for approximately five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
text_image
P54.25-0488-31There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS:
▶ Briefly push the cruise control lever forwards ①.
or
▶ Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ③. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ② in the cruise control lever li up.
If you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the DISTRONIC PLUS off message appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if:
- you apply the parking brake
- ESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP
• the transmission is in the P, R or N position - you pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors is open
• the vehicle is skidding - you activate Active Parking Assist
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS off message appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations:
- Cornering, entering and exiting a bend: the ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
- Driving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
- Other vehicles changing lane: DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short.
- Narrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
- Obstacles and stationary vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
General notes
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a steering wheel and dashboard, with an inset magnified view highlighting the number 1 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle the centre of the driving lane by means of erate steering interventions in a speed range from 0 - 200 km/h.
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera ①, at the top of the windscreen.
In a speed range from 0 - 60 km/h, Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam.
At speeds of more than 60 km/h, Steering Assist focuses on detected lane markings (left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in front detected lane markings are not present.
If these conditions are not present, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assistance.
DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the function to be available. • the
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRON PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for standing in lane.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions and does not detect all road users. you are following a vehicle which is driving
towards the edge of the carriageway, your vehicle could come into contact with the kerb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle.
Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected.
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane.
The support offered by the system may be impaired if:
- there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray
- there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet)
the windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
- no, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area
- the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
- the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
- the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge
• the road is narrow and winding
• there are highly variable shade conditions on the road
The system is switched to passive and no longer to assists you by performing steering interventions if:
ibyou actively change lanes
•you switch on the turn signal
•you take your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time
i After you have finished changing lanes, steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are automatically active again.
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not provide assistance:
• on very sharp corners
- when towing a trailer
- a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre been detected and displayed
Also observe the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 162).
The steering interventions are carried out with limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself.
If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have
still not started to steer and have not taken of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot switch to passive mode. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.
Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
▶ Activate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using the on-board computer (▷ page 215).
The DTR+: steering assistant On message appears in the multifunction display.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are active
Information in the multifunction display
text_image
20.5°C ① P54.33-3605-31If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated but not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol ① appears in grey. If system provides you with support by means steering interventions, symbol ① is shown in green.
Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
▶ Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using the on-board computer (▷ page 215).
The DTR+: steering assistant Off message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot deactivated automatically.
HOLD function
General notes
hold the HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: you
- when pulling away, especially on steep slopes
- when manoeuvring on steep slopes
- when waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
Important safety notes
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
- there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply
- the HOLD function is deactivated by the accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant
- the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with
of • the battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle from rolling away.
When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-• you depress the brake pedal again with a cer-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat- tain amount of pressure until HOLD disap-ically in certain situations. pears from the multifunction display.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate • you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-the following or similar situations: mission is shifted automatically to position P if:
- when towing away
- in a car wash
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if:
• the vehicle is stationary
- the driver's door is closed or if your seat is fastened
• the parking brake is released
- the transmission is in position D, R or N
• DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
- the engine is running or if it has been auto the power supply is insufficient matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function
Activating the HOLD function
text_image
20.5°C ① HOLD P54.33-3606-31met.
▶ Depress the brake pedal.
▶ Quickly depress the brake pedal further until the HOLD message ① appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.
▶ Make sure that the activation conditions are You can activate RACE START if:
If depressing the brake pedal the first time does (▶ page 73) not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead then try again. position
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if:
- you depress the accelerator and the transmission is in position D or R.
- you shift the transmission to position P.
- the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened
- the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function
• the bonnet is opened
- a system fault occurs
the power supply is insufficient
p
belt RACE START
Important safety notes
Observe the safety notes for the SPORT handling mode (▷ page 73).
RACE START is only available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
Only activate RACE START on dedicated race circuits.
RACE START enables optimum acceleration from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface.
Activation conditions
eYou can activate RACE START if:
• the doors are closed
- the engine is running and it has reached an oil operating temperature of approximately
80 °C. This is the case when the oil temperature gauge in the multifunction display is shown in white.
- SPORT handling mode is switched on pages (▶ page 73)
the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position
- the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot)
• the transmission is in position D
Activating RACE START
▶ Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed.
▶ Turn the drive program selector clockwise (▷ page 144) until the RS lamp lights up. The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display.
If the activation conditions are no longer filled, RACE START is cancelled. The RACERA START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (▷ page 144). or
▶ To confirm: pull the right steering wheel sh paddle (▷ page 144). The RACE START available Depress acceleratoraccelerator message appears function display.
If you do not depress the accelerator pedal, observe the notes on driving with a trailer fully within two seconds, RACE START is can page 202).
celled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed rises to approximately 3500 rpm.
The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction dis
If you do not release the brake pedal with five seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration.
The RACE START active message appears in the multifunction display.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handle mode remains switched on.
RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions no longer fulfilled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.
i After using it several times in short succession, RACE START will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven.
AIRMATIC
Vehicle level
important safety notes
WARNING
People's limbs may become trapped if they are located underneath the vehicle or between the vehicle body and the tyres which the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of
finjury.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate in the multi- vicinity of the wheel arches.
Your vehicle regulates its height automatically. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The following vehicle levels are possible:
ay. Normal
• Raised: the vehicle is raised by approximately 25 mm when compared with the normal level
- Lowered: the vehicle is lowered by approximately 10 mm when compared with the normal level
The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be set manually.
The "Lowered" vehicle level is set automatically:
• at speeds above 140 km/h
- if you have selected "Sports mode" (▷ page 172)
Setting the vehicle level
Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock.
Setting the raised level
text_image
1 2 P54.25-9823-31▶ Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ② is not lit:
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② lights up. The vehicle is adjusted to the raised level.
The Vehicle rising message appears in the display.
The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you:
• drive at a speed above approximately 120 km/h
- drive for approximately three minutes at a speed above 80 km/h
The "Raised level" remains saved when you are not driving within these speed ranges.
Setting the normal level
▶ Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ② is lit:
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level.
Suspension setting
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort.
The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on:
- your driving style, e.g. sporty
• the road surface condition, e.g. bumps - your individual selection, i.e. sport or comfort
Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock.
Sport mode
text_image
SPORT COMF 1 2 3 P54.25-0324-31The firmer suspension setting in sports mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② lights up. You have selected "Sports mode".
The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.
Comfort mode
text_image
SPORT COMF 1 2 3 P54.25-0524-31In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Select Comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of motorway.
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ③ lights up. You have selected "Comfort mode".
The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.
AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension
Important safety notes
WARNING
People's limbs may become trapped if they are located underneath the vehicle or between the vehicle body and the tyres where the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of injury.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches.
WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
The vehicle is slightly lowered if you:
• have selected comfort suspension tuning and
- you lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds of switching off the engine
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody may thus become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of a wheel arch or the underbody when you lock the vehicle.
The vehicle is lowered by about 20 mm if:
- you have selected "Comfort tuning"
- you switch off the engine and
- you lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds
When parking, position your vehicle so that, does not make contact with the kerb as th vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
Suspension settings
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort.
The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on:
- your driving style, e.g. sporty
• the road surface condition, e.g. bumps - your individual selection of Sport, Sport + or Comfort
Sport mode
text_image
1 2 4 3 AMG P54.25-9525-31① Mode deletion button
② Button for storing, calling up and displaying the selected mode
③ Sport + mode indicator lamp
④ Sport mode indicator lamp
The firmer suspension setting in Sport mode ensures better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, thg. on winding country roads.
▶ Press button ① once.
Indicator lamp ④ lights up. You have selected Sport mode.
f: The AMG Ride Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.
Sport + mode
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode primarily when driving on race circuits.
If indicator lamps ③ and ④ are off:
▶ Press button ① twice.
Indicator lamps ③ and ④ light up. You have selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.
If indicator lamp ④ lights up:
▶ Press button ① once.
Second indicator lamp ③ lights up. You have selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.
Comfort mode
When Comfort mode is selected, the handling characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Select Comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. o straight stretches of motorway.
▶ Press button ① repeatedly until indicator lamps ③ and ④ go out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.
Storing and calling up settings
Once the suspension setting and drive program selected:
have been selected, you can store and call u your settings using AMG button ②.
▶ To store: press and hold AMG button ② you hear a tone.
▶ To call up: press AMG button ②. The stored suspension setting and drive program are selected.
▶ To display: briefly press AMG button ②. Your selection appears in the multifunction display.
Vehicle level
Important safety notes
WARNING
People's limbs may become trapped if they are located underneath the vehicle or between the vehicle body and the tyres where the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of injury.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure no on is underneath the vehicle or in the immediat vicinity of the wheel arches.
become trapped or that the vehicle has not been damaged, for example, on the kerb.
i The vehicle level at the rear axle may change visibly if you park the vehicle and the outside temperature changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle level lowers; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises.
Changing the rear axle level
This function is only available on the Mercedes-AMG CLS 63 4MATIC.
The vehicle level at the rear axle depends on the selected suspension mode and the vehicle speed.
The vehicle level at the rear axle changes while driving depending on which suspension mode is
selected:
p. Comfort: +10 mm
• Sport + and Sport: -15 mm
When changing from Comfort to Sport or Sport +, the rear axle is lowered by approximately 25 mm. When changing from Sport or Sport + to Comfort, the rear axle is raised by approximately 25 mm. The level change also occurs when stationary.
If you drive faster than 170 km/h, the rear axle level is set to a middle level. This increases road safety and reduces air resistance. If you then drive slower than 150 km/h, the level of the rear axle is again adjusted to correspond to the selected suspension mode.
Load compensation
The vehicle can compensate for differences in the vehicle level by raising or lowering the rear axle. This is the case, for example, when people get out of the vehicle or when luggage is removed.
A load compensation occurs if:
e• a door or the tailgate is opened
e• the parked vehicle is unlocked
The engine needs to be running for larger level changes.
The vehicle may be lowered if you press the suspension setting selector button or the AMG but-
ton. The vehicle is lowered even if the vehicle at a standstill.
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive)
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning has been selected, the vehicle's ground clearance decreases. Make sure that no objects
Neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over-ede the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a speed, for braking in good time and for staying pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to lane. malfunction.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on. When pulling away, only depress the acceler-
- When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary.
• Accelerate less when driving.
ARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you:
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.
This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes.
switch on the ignition
shift the transmission to position D, R or release the parking brake
ARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 1 · km/h . It is reactivated at lower speeds.
Benz implied warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raise. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground.
In wintry driving conditions, the maximum G effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary.
Range of the sensors
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip.
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take into account obs cles located:
- below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects
- above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.
PARKTRONIC visually and audibly indicates the distance between your vehicle and an object.
text_image
① ① ① P54:65-5205-31PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute
for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking.
① Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (▷ page 296).
! When parking, pay particular attention to scra objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources.
Range
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54.65-5797-31
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54.65-5799-31① approx. 60 cm (corners)
② approx. 80 cm (corners)
③ approx. 120 cm (centre)
④ approx. 100 cm (centre)
Minimum distance
Centre Approx. 20 cm
Corners Approx. 15 cm
If there is an obstacle within this range, the event warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Warning displays
text_image
Car dashboard interface with numbered connection points and a magnified view of the dashboard's key componentsWarning display for the front area
① Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle
② Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle
③ Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness ③ light up.
The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running.
| Transmission position | Warning display |
| D min- | Front area activated |
| R, N or the vehicle rolling backwards | Rear and front areas activated |
| P | No areas activated |
One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
- sixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds.
- seventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds.
This indicates that you have now reached minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
text_image
1 OFF P 2 P54-25 94.92-31① Indicator lamp
② Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
the indicator lamp ② lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Towing a trailer
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.
Problems with PARKTRONIC
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Only the red segments the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds.PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. | iPARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactivated.► If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified cialist workshop. |
| Only the red segments the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. | iThe PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.► Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (▷ page 296).► Switch the ignition back on. |
| The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or sound waves.► See whether PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. |
Active Parking Assist
General notes
during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (▷ page 175).
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates substitute for your attention to the immediate a suitable parking space. Active steering intersurroundings. The responsibility for safe vention and brake application can assist you
manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
Make sure that no persons, animals or objects that are:
are in the manoeuvring range.
When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces
that are:
- parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel
- on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement
• on straight roads, not bends
WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with other road users. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure.
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles.
! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a share angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres.
Active Parking Assist may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.:
- in a zone where parking or stopping is prohibited
- in front of driveways or entrances and exits
• on unsuitable surfaces
Parking tips:
- on narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space
- parking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly
- parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly
- snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately
- pay attention to the PARKTRONIC (▷ page 176) warning messages during the parking procedure
- you can intervene in the steering procedure, correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist ^® will then be cancelled.
- when transporting a load that protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist
- never use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted
- pay attention to the specified tyre pressure. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle.
WARNING
^19 there are objects above the detection range:
• Active Park Assist may steer too early
- the vehicle may not stop in front of these objects
This could cause a collision. There is a risk of an accident.
If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
Further information on the detection range (▷ page 175).
Active Parking Assist does not assist you with parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if:
- two parking spaces are located directly next to one another
- the parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low kerb
- you forward-park
Active Parking Assist does not assist you with
parking in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if:
• the parking space is on a kerb
the system reads the parking space as being blocked, such as by foliage or grass paving blocks
- the area is too small for the vehicle to manoeuvre into
- the parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
flowchart
graph TD
A["①"] --> B["P"]
C["②"] --> B["P"]
D["③"] --> B["P"]
style A fill:#fff,stroke:#000
style B fill:#fff,stroke:#000
style C fill:#fff,stroke:#000
style D fill:#fff,stroke:#000
note right of A "20.5°C"
note right of C "P54.33-3608-31"
Example: detected parking space
① Detected parking space on the left
② Parking symbol
③ Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist will detect only parking spaces:
- parallel or at right angles to the direction travel
- that are parallel to the direction of travel are at least 1.5 m wide
- that are parallel to the direction of travel at least 1.0 m longer than your vehicle
- that are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m wider than your uncle
Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the size of a parking space if it is right angles to the direction of travel. You need to judge whether your vehicle will fit the parking space.
When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you see parking symbol ② as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right the left also appears. Active Parking Assist dis
plays only parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain activated until you confirm the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the OK but
ton on the multifunction steering wheel. The ▶ system automatically determines whether the ▶ parking space is parallel or at right angles to direction of travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it.
Parking
WARNING
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if:
- there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply.
- the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with.
• the battery is disconnected. - the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
ofThere is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it and against rolling away.
When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are responsible for braking in good time.
▶ Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol shows the desired parking space in the instruction cluster.
▶ shift the transmission to position R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
message appears in the multifunction
wi display.
To cancel the procedure: press the ← button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.
▶ To park using Active Parking Assist: press the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Release the multifunction steering wheel.
▶ Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When reversing, drive at a speed
below 10 km/h. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space.
Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces.
The Park Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Shift the transmission to position D while vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction.
The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.
▶ Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space.
The Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
Additional transmission shifts may be necessary.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist switched off message
appears in the multifunction display and you hear a tone. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver ha
ing to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled when you depress the accelerator pedal.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available.
▶ Manoeuvre if necessary.
▶ Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (▷ page 176).
Parking tips:
- The way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front of and
behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist
a guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
- You can also preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be cancelled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position.
Exiting a parking space
In order that Active Parking Assist can assist you when exiting the parking space:
re the border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A kerb, for example, is too small.
- the border of the parking space must not be a too wide. Your vehicle can be manoeuvred into a position at a maximum of 45^ to the starting position in the parking space.
- a manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 mm must be available.
If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space. You are, responsible for braking in good time.
Active Parking Assist can assist you with exiting a parking space only if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist.
Start the engine.
▶ Release the parking brake.
▶ Switch on the turn signal in the direction in which you intend to pull away.
▶ Shift the transmission to position D or R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ To cancel the procedure: press the ← button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.
or
park-
▶ To exit a parking space using Active ing Assist: press the OK button on the tifunction steering wheel.
The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Release the multifunction steering wheel.
▶ Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 10 km/h when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled.
▶ Shift the transmission to position D or R as required or according to the message when the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundingssurroundings message appears tifunction display.
You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you reverse after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position.
▶ Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary.
Parkencelled message appears in the multi- mfunction display. or
▶ Press the PARKTRONIC button in the centre console (▷ page 177). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately cancelled. You hear s. Doone and the Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display.
Active Parking Assist is cancelled automatic if:
- the transmission is shifted too early - transmission position P is selected - parking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible - you are driving faster than 10 km/h - a wheel spins and ESPintervenes or fails. In such cases the warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist cancelled message.
When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you must steer and brake again yourself.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator pedal again.
Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display. You will then ha
to steer and merge into traffic on your own. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take or should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the the steering before the vehicle has exited the electrical connection is established between parking space completely. This is useful if you your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking recognise that it is already possible to pull out. Assist is no longer available. PARKTRONIC is the parking space. deactivated for the rear area.
-Towing a trailer
for vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly increased.
Cancelling Active Parking Assist
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any time.
▶ Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at once. You hear a tone and the Park Assist
Reversing camera
General notes
natural_image
Exterior view of a car showing the front wheel and side panel, with an inset close-up highlighting a component (no text or symbols)Reversing camera ① is an optical parking and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror.
The text shown in the multimedia system depends on the language setting. The following are examples of reversing camera display in the multimedia system.
Important safety notes
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals objects in range while manoeuvring and parking
The reversing camera will not function or will function only in a limited manner:
- if the tailgate is open
• in heavy rain, snow or fog
• at night or in very dark places - if the camera is exposed to very bright light
- if the area is lit by fluorescent lamps or LED lighting (the display may flicker)
- if there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in water
- if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (▷ page 296)
- if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack).
On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines, depending on technical conditions.
i The reversing camera is protected from rain-drops and dust by means of a flap. When the reversing camera is activated, this flap opens. The flap closes again when:
- you have finished the manoeuvring process
- you switch off the engine
- you open the boot
See the notes on cleaning (▷ page 296).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the reversing camera has been deactivated.
Switching the reversing camera on/off
text_image
Security camera view showing parking lot with lane markings and numbered annotationsP54.65-5266-31
▶ To switch on: make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system (see Digital Owner's Manual).
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The reversing camera flap opens. The multi-media system shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines.
The image from the reversing camera is available throughout the manoeuvring process.
▶ To switch the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the controller, select symbol ① for the "Reverse parking" function or symbol ② for "Coupling up a this trailer".
The symbol of the selected function is highlighted.
▶ To deactivate: shift the transmission to position P.
or
▶ Drive forwards a short distance.
Displays in the multimedia system
The reversing camera may show a distorted v of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at Obstacles are not shown by the reversing camera in the following locations:
• very close to the rear bumper
• under the rear bumper
- in the area immediately above the tailgate handle
! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
• the bumper of a parked vehicle
• the drawbar of a trailer
• the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
• the rear section of an HGV
- a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom most guideline.
text_image
Diagram of a parking lot with numbered lanes and traffic signs, likely for navigation or road tracking.P54.65-5270-31
text_image
5 6 8 7 viewP54.65-5271-31
⑤ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehic
⑥ Vehicle centre axis (locating aid)
⑦ Bumper
⑧ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
When the transmission is shifted to position guide lines appear in the camera image.
The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.
text_image
m- 9 11 10 P54.65-5826-31⑨ Front warning displays
⑩ Rear warning displays
⑪ Additional vehicle symbol: PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator
① Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
② White guide line without turning the steer wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
④ Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
When PARKTRONIC is operational (▷ page 176), the vehicle icon appears in multimedia system display ⑪. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays ⑨ and ⑩ are also active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system display.
"Reverse parking" function
Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle
Reversing straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54.65-5273-31① White guide line without turning the steerin wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)
② Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
③ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
④ Red guide line at a distance of approximate 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
▶ Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (▷ page 182). The lane and the guide lines are shown.
▶ With the help of white guide line ①, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space.
▶ Using white guide line ① as a guide, careful reverse until you reach the end position. Red guide line ④ is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.
text_image
① ② P54.65-5274-31① Parking space marking
② Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
▶ Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill.
▶ Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (▷ page 182).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ② reaches parking space marking ①.
- Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully.
text_image
① P54.65-5275-31① Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
▶ Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible.
text_image
① ② P54.65-5276-31① White guide line at current steering wheel angle
② Parking space marking
▶ Turn the steering wheel to the centre position while the vehicle is stationary.
text_image
① ② ③ P54.65-5277-31① Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
② White guide line without turning the steering wheel
③ End of parking space
▶ Reverse carefully until you have reached the end position.
Red guide line ① is then at the end of parking
space ③. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.
"Coupling up a trailer" function
text_image
① ② P54.65-5268-31① Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
② Trailer drawbar
This function is only available on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch.
Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of trailer drawbar ② so that it is slightly higher than the ball coupling.
▶ Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar ②.
text_image
tely ng ① ② ③ ④ ⑤P54.65-5267-31
(1) Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the ball coupling
② Trailer drawbar locating aid
③ Trailer drawbar
④ Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" function
⑤ Ball coupling
For technical reasons, the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch in the multimedia system display is either only partially visible or not at all.
▶ Select symbol ④ using the controller. The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selected. The distance specifications now only
apply to objects that are at the same levelinstance when parking or at exits with reduced the ball coupling. visibility.
▶ Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer You can show images from the 360^ camera in drawbar locating aid ② points approximately full-screen mode or in seven different split-in the direction of trailer drawbar ③. screen views on the multimedia system. A split-
▶ Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ③ reaches the red guide line. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The distance between the trailer drawbar and
the red guide line is now approximately The seven split-screen views are:
- top view and image from the reversing camera (130° viewing angle)
- top view and image from the front camera (130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle)
- top view and enlarged rear view
- top view and enlarged front view
- top view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer tow hitch)
- top view and images from the rear-facing side cameras (rear wheel view)
- top view and images from the forward-facing side cameras (front wheel view)
text_image
Security camera screenshot showing three labeled lanes (①, ②, ③) on a road with vehicles in the background.P54.65-5269-31
① Symbol for the wide-angle view function
② Own vehicle
③ PARKTRONIC warning displays
You can also use the reversing camera to select
a wide-angle view.
When PARKTRONIC is operational (▷ page 176),
a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the • as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle display of the multimedia system. If the symbol in top view in split-screen mode or PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn• at the bottom right as red or yellow brackets ing displays ③ light up in the multimedia system around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode in yellow or red accordingly.
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera is a camera system that con-red line: an object is present in the immediate sists of four cameras. close range of the vehicle
The system evaluates images from the following cameras: In
- reversing camera
- front camera
- two cameras in the exterior mirrors
The cameras cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system assists you, for
When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view.
Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed:
• as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle symbol in top view in split-screen mode or • at the bottom right as red or yellow brackets • around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode
The line thickness and colour of the brackets show how far the vehicle is from an object.
- yellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC is active
- yellow brackets with normal lines: an object is present in close range of the vehicle
on-red line: an object is present in the immediate close range of the vehicle
Important safety notes
The 360^ camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360^ camera is not a substitute for attentive driving.
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that it are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking.
You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.
You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
The 360° camera will not function or will function only in a limited manner:
- if the doors are open
- if the exterior mirrors are folded in
- if the tailgate is open
• in heavy rain, snow or fog
• at night or in very dark places - if the cameras are exposed to very bright light
- if the area is lit by fluorescent lamps or LED lighting (the display may flicker)
- if there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter
- if the camera lenses are dirty or covered
- if the vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted are damaged. In this event, auto have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop
Do not use the 360° camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or damage objects when parking the vehicle.
Guide lines are always shown at road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer coupling.
The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments (e.g. licence plate holder, rear bicycle carrier).
On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension, due to the technical conditions, leaving the standard height can result in:
- inaccuracies in the guide lines
- inaccuracies in the display of generated images (top view)
Activation conditions
The image from the 360^ camera appears if:
- the multimedia system is switched on
- the 360^ camera function is switched on
Activating the 360° camera
▶ Press the 📄 button in the centre console for longer than two seconds. The following appears depending on whether transmission position D or R is selected:
- a split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or
- a split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera
▶ Briefly press the 📄 button in the centre console.
The vehicle menu appears.
▶ Select 360° camera and press 🕒 to confirm. The following appears depending on whether transmission position D or R is selected:
- a split screen with top view and the image t from the front camera or
- a split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera
^W11 Switching on the 360° camera with reverse gear
You can show images from the 360° camera automatically by engaging reverse gear.
- Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system (see Digital Owner's Manual).
To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the reversing camera.
Selecting the split-screen view or full-screen mode
Switching between split-screen views:
▶ To switch to the line with the vehicle symbols: slide the controller ↑◎.
▶ To select one of the vehicle icons: turn (◎) the controller.
Switching to full-screen mode:
▶ To switch to 180^ view: turn ☐ the controller to select and press 🔍 to confirm.
i The full-screen option is only available in following views:
- Top view with image from the reversing camera
- Top view with image from the front camera
Displays in the multimedia system
Important safety notes
The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations:
• under the front and rear bumpers
• very close to the front and rear bumpers
- in the area immediately above the tailgate handle
• very close to the exterior mirrors
- in the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view
! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.
• the bumper of a parked vehicle
• the drawbar of a trailer
• the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
• the rear section of an HGV
- a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom most guideline.
the Guide line for the maximum steering angle
④ Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
e⑤ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
text_image
w all. e ⑥ ⑦ ⑨ ⑧ P54.65-4872-31⑥ Vehicle centre axis (locating aid)
⑦ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
⑧ Bumper
⑨ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
When the transmission is shifted to position R, guidelines appear in the camera image.
The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.
Top view with image from the front cam- ^m era
Top view with image from the reversing camera
text_image
① ② ⑤ ④ ③ P54.65-4871-31① Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
② Symbol for the split-screen setting with top view and reversing camera image
text_image
ng ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ 6 P54.65-4869-31① Symbol for the split-screen setting with top view and front camera image
② Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 4.0 m from the front of the vehicle
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
④ Yellow lane marking the course the tyres take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
You can also select the side camera setting for the rear-facing view.
⑤ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the front of the vehicle
Top view with trailer view
⑥ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the front of the vehicle
text_image
Aerial and satellite imagery showing a car on the left and a vehicle on the right, with numbered annotations indicating key locations.P54.65-4873-31
Top view and enlarged rear view
natural_image
Top-down view of a car on the ground with a close-up inset showing the front side of the car's rearview (no visible text or symbols)P54.65-4874-31
① Symbol for the trailer-view setting
② Trailer drawbar locating aid
③ Ball coupling
④ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the ball coupling
① Symbol for the split-screen setting with top view and reversing camera image enlarged. The lines are shown at the level of the trailer coupling.
② Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you.
This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view.
Top view with image from the side eras
text_image
Street photo with visible car and road markings, numbered annotations (1, 2, 3) indicating locations or zones of interest.P54.65-4868-31
180^ view
text_image
① ② ③ am-P54.65-4870-31
① Symbol for the full-screen setting with the reversing camera image
② Own vehicle
③ PARKTRONIC warning displays
i 180° view can also be selected as front view.
① Symbol for top-view setting with image from forward-facing side cameras
② Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirror (right side of vehicle)
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirror (left side of vehicle)
Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example.
Stopping the 360° camera display
The 360^ camera display is stopped:
- when you select transmission position P
- when you are driving at moderate speeds
The previous display appears in the multimedia take a break system display. You can also switch the display by selecting the symbol in the display and confirming with the controller.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 60 km/h Itp the assistance menu (▷ page 213) of the on-200 km/h speed range. If ATTENTION ASSISTboard computer you can call up the current sta-detects typical indicators of fatigue or increastus information. ing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may not always detect fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration until too late, or may not detect them at all. The system is not a substitute for well-rested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all:
- if the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes
- if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes
- if there is a strong side wind
- if you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration
- if you are predominantly driving at a speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h
- if you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUS active steer assist activated
- if the time has been set incorrectly
- in active driving situations, such as when change lanes or change your speed
The evaluation of your attention level is deleted and restarted when continuing the journey, if:
- you switch off the engine
- you take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
v and
Displaying the attention level
text_image
ATTENTION ASST. Break 02:35 h ago Attention level low high P54.33-3607-31▶ Select the assistance graphics display for ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (▷ page 213).
The following information appears:
• the length of the journey since the last break
• the attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low
- if ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h.
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
▶ Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-with board computer (▷ page 215).
The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected:
StandardStandard selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal.
SensitiveSensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the OFF symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated driver in the instrument cluster. Driving onto a it is automatically reactivated after the engine section of road in the wrong direction triggers a has been switched off. The sensitivity selected warning. Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs corresponds to the last selection activated with camera system ① attached behind the top (standard/sensitive). of the windscreen. The data and general traffic
Warning in the multifunction display
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: Attention Assist: Take a break!break!
In addition to the display message shown in multifunction display, you will then hear a waiting tone.
▶ If necessary, take a break.
▶ Confirm the display message with the OK button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not a break, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
Vehicles with COMAND Online multifunction display: if a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in the multimedia system. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function
be activated and deactivated in the multimed system.
Traffic Sign Assist
General notes
text_image
① P54.00-2962-31with camera system ① attached behind the top of the windscreen. The data and general traffic regulations stored in the navigation system are additionally used to determine the current speed limit.
If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the display of the speed limits and ever-taking restrictions is updated.
The display can also be updated without a visible traffic sign if:
• the vehicle changes roads, e.g. slip road of motorway exit
- a village or town boundary is passed that stored in the digital map
- the last traffic sign detected by the camera has not been repeated
Take a sign indicating the end of a restriction (speed limit or overtaking restriction) is passed, the sign is displayed for five seconds. The currently applicable traffic regulation continues to appear in the assistance graphic display.
The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions).
The sign indicating the end of a restriction only appears with the restriction in the instrument cluster when:
a the regulation must be observed with the restriction
- Traffic Sign Assist is unable to reliably determine whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit appears in the instrument cluster either.
text_image
① 20.5°C R P64.33-3602-31Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, display ① appears in the assistance graphic (▷ page 213).
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum per- mitted speed and overtaking restrictions to the
Important safety notes
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not able to correctly display speed limits and over taking restrictions. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display.
The system may be either functionally impaire or temporarily unavailable if:
- visibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog spray
- there is glare, e.g. from the sun being low the sky
- there is dirt, ice or misting on the windscreen relevant
in the vicinity of the camera - traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to ice or snow
- signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes
- the information in the digital street map of navigation system is incorrect or out of dat
- the traffic signs are insufficiently lit at night(80 mph) apply with an unknown restriction.
Switching the message function on/o
If you activate the Traffic Sign Assist display the on-board computer, the traffic regulations (speed limits and overtaking restrictions)
appear in the instrument cluster for five seconds. This function is not available in all countries. In each case. The wrong-way warning and their no entry signs are passed, a warning message traffic sign display for speed limits and overtake appears in the instrument cluster should Trafficing restrictions remain active even when the Sign Assist detect that you are driving in the display has been deactivated. Wrong direction. You will then also hear a warn-
▶ Switch on the Traffic Sign Assist message function via the on-board computer (▷ page 214).
Instrument cluster display
Showing the assistance graphic
▶ Call up the assistance graphic display function using the on-board computer (▷ page 213).
Detected traffic signs are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Speed limit with unknown restriction
text_image
1 100 2 80 3 Limited 20.5 °C R P54.33-3550-31① Maximum permitted speed
Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for which the restriction in the additional sign is
een relevant
③ Additional sign for unknown restriction
Adirmaximum permitted speed of 100 km/h (100 mph) and a speed limit of 80 km/h
(80 mph) apply with an unknown restriction.
No entry (wrong-way warning)
text_image
Please check direction of travel P54.33-3548-31This function is not available in all countries. If no entry signs are passed, a warning message appears in the instrument cluster should Traffic
Sign Assist detect that you are driving in the wrong direction. You will then also hear a warning tone. You should immediately check your direction of travel in order to avoid danger to yourself and other road users.
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 192) and Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 194).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning lamp lights up on the exterior mirror and draws your attention to vehicles
detected in the monitored area. If you then Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not switch on the corresponding turn signal to indicated.
change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible warning.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h.
Important safety notes
WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles:
- overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area
- when the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great
As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the s of the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail detect some vehicles and is not a substitute attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles.
Radar sensors
text_image
① ② ③ ② ③ P54.70-2752-31Driving and parking
At a distance of approximately 0.5 m ② from the vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the a up to 3.0 m next to ③ and behind ① your vehicle, as shown in the picture.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side of their lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. • warnings may be issued in error when driving Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice close to crash barriers or similar solid boun-slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensor-daries
must not be covered, e.g. by cycle racks or over-hanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the following of the events allowed that are modified: warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, e.g. lorries, for a prolonged time
function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly.
Monitoring range
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the following situations:
- dirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
• poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray - narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles
- very wide lanes
- narrow lanes
- vehicles not driving in the middle of their lane
- crash barriers or other road boundaries
Indicator and warning lamp
text_image
① P54.70-2673-31① Indicator lamp (yellow) Warning lamp (red)
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.
If Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp ① in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Blin
Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp ① on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than Ge 12 km/h.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated.
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the brightness of the surroundings.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the blind spot monitoring range and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds.
The red warning lamp flashes. If the turn s remains on, detected vehicles are indicated the flashing of the red warning lamp. There no further warning tones.
Activating Blind Spot Assist
▶ Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (▷ page 215).
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps ① in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Towing a trailer
If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Blind Spot
Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.
You can deactivate the indicator lamps in how the exterior mirrors.
To do so, you will need to deactivate Blind Spot Assist if:
• the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock
• the engine is not running
- the electrical connection to the trailer has been established
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
text_image
ac- ① P54 00-2962-31Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera ① at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally.
This function is available in a speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration through the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Important safety notes
WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly identify lane markings.
In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may:
- give an unnecessary warning
- not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep in lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There a risk of an accident.
Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
- the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected
- the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge
• the road is narrow and winding - there are highly variable shade conditions on the road
Activating Lane Keeping Assist
▶ Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (▷ page 215).
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic (▷ page 213) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Standard
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you have switched on the turn signal. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
- a driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot take into account road weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good t and for staying in lane.
Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. in its lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function if:
Adaptive
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you have switched on the turn signal. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
time driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.
cleyou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
- you brake hard.
• you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly.
nt you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
f'ou ensure that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane
Marking, the system detects certain conditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
- you approach the outer lane marking on a bend
• the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway • the system detects solid lane markings
COV-
The warning vibration occurs later if:
• the road has narrow lanes
- you cut the corner on a bend
Active Driving Assistance package
General notes
The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 161), Active Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 196) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 198).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning lamp lights up on the exterior mirror and draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and always make sure that there is sufficient dis-audible warning. If a risk of side impact is detectance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. ted, a course-correcting brake application may help you avoid a collision. Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the free space in the direction of travel and to the side before making a cou correcting brake application. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensors.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h.
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving.
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles:
- overtaking too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area
- if the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.
Radar sensors
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator trim are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks of overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. In such cases, Active Blind Spot Assist may no longer function properly.
Monitoring range
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54.70-2752-31At a distance of approximately 0.5 m ② from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m next to ③ and behind ① your vehicle, as shown in the picture.
The detection of vehicles may be impaired in others if the difference in speed is less than case of: 12 km/h.
- dirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
- poor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or sp Vehicles in the monitoring range will then be indicated late or not at all.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle m indicated, especially if the vehicles are not d ing in the middle of their lane. This may be case if there are vehicles at the edge of the lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
- warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders
- warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, e.g. lorries, for a longed time
Warning lamp
text_image
P54.70-2673-3① Warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at spee below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.
If Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicative lamp ① in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Aa Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp ① on the corresponding side lights up red. A warning is always is when a vehicle enters the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
others if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the sur- roundings.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signal to change lanes by be and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp ① flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp ①. There are no further warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This designed to help you avoid a collision.
WARNING
A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.
natural_image
Top-down view of two cars with a numbered annotation (2) pointing to the car's side, no visible text or symbols on the cars or background.If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the warning lamp ① flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display ② underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
The course-correcting brake application is available Active Lane Keeping Assist
able in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h.
Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur if:
- there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, on both sides of your vehicle
• a vehicle approaches too closely on the side - you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds
- you clearly brake or accelerate
- a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP ^ or PRE-SAFE ^ Brake
- ESP® is deactivated
- a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre detected
Activating Active Blind Spot Assist
▶ Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (▷ page 215).
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Warning lamps ① in the exterior mirrors I up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Towing a trailer
If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you when driving, the radar sensor system must be have correctly established the electrical con-operational.
nection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is
then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Blind3
Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.
General notes
text_image
t le h ① P54.00-2962-31Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera ① at the top of the windscreen. Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane.
This function is available in a speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not detect traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings.
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can:
- give an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle
- neither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
The system may be impaired or may not func if:
- there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, ra fog or spray
- there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet)
- the windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
- the radar sensors in the front or rear bump or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured snow
- no or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction are
- the lane markings are worn away, dark or ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
- the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and the lane markings thus cannot be detected
- the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge
• the road is narrow and winding - there are highly variable shade conditions of the road
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane broken lane markings are detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made.
Warning vibration through the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel pass over a lane marking. It will warn you by mea intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Lane-correcting brake application
WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist war you or makes a lane-correcting brake application.
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist only detects traffic conditions or road users to a limited extent. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application, e.g
after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of an accident.
An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.
text_image
pers by os- ov- ① P54.83-3604-31smadu leave your lane under certain circumstances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.
This is intended to help you return the vehicle to the original lane.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display ① appears in the multifunction display. A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking detected as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning and must have been issued by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be detected.
In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can have an influence on brake application: oncom-
ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi- cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.
A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:
- you clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate
- you cut the corner on a sharp bend
- you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration
- you have switched on the turn signal
- a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist
- ESP® is deactivated
• the transmission is not in position D - on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established
- an obstacle has been detected in the lane which you are driving - a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre been detected and displayed
There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keeping Assist could misjudge the given traffic situation. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if:
- you steer slightly in the opposite direction
- you switch on the turn signal
- you clearly brake or accelerate
A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if:
- a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP ^ , PRE-SAFE ^ Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist
- lane markings are no longer detected
Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist
▶ Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (▷ page 215).
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic display (▷ page 213) are shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
you have switched on the turn signal. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
a driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you have switched on the turn signal. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
- a driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.
- you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
- you brake hard.
- you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly.
- you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system detects certain conditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
in
• you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
• the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway
- the system detects solid lane markings
ep-
The warning vibration occurs later if:
• the road has narrow lanes
- you cut the corner on a bend
Towing a trailer
If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting.
Towing a trailer
Important safety notes
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer combination if it begins to swerve. The vehicle/-trailer combination could even overturn.
There is a risk of an accident.
On no account should you attempt to straighten out the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing speed. Decrease your
speed and do not countersteer. Brake if nec Make sure that the following values are not necessary:
WARNING
If the maximum permissible load for a carrier system is exceeded, the carrier could come loose from the vehicle and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident an injury.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load when using a carrier.
• the permissible noseweight
• the permissible trailer load
the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle
- the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer
The applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found:
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the engine cooling system may necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis
• in your vehicle documents
- on the identification plates of the trailer to hitch and the trailer
- on the vehicle identification plate
If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
You will find permissible trailer loads under "Technical data" (▷ page 344).
Retrofitting a trailer tow hitch is only permissible if a trailer load is specified in your vehicle documents. If this is not the case, then the vehicle not approved for towing a trailer.
For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Exceeding the maximum permissible nose-weight of the trailer drawbar on the ball coup may cause damage.
Damage may be caused to the following:
- towing vehicle
- trailer
- ball coupling
- trailer tow hitch
The vehicle/trailer combination could become unstable.
The vehicle/trailer combination could also become unstable if the noseweight used is low than the minimum permissible noseweight.
To avoid hazardous situations:
- make sure to check the noseweight before each journey
- use a noseweight as close as possible to maximum noseweight
- do not exceed the maximum permissible noseweight
- do not use a noseweight lower than the m imum noseweight
OCU- WARNING
If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and
injury.
Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in.
When reversing the towing vehicle, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle.
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different to when driving without a trailer.
The vehicle/trailer combination:
- is heavier
ne is restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability
• has an increased braking distance
• is affected more by strong crosswinds
^11 -demands more sensitive steering
• has a larger turning circle
This can impair the vehicle's handling characteristics. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Maintain a safe distance. Drive carefully.
When towing a trailer, always adjust your speedmbination may not exceed a maximum speed to the current road and weather conditions. Dof 100 km/h for reasons concerning the oper-not exceed the maximum permissible speed foating permit. This also applies in countries in your vehicle/trailer combination. which the maximum permissible speed for vehi-
Notes on towing a trailer
General notes
Trailer towing is not possible on the following models:
• Mercedes-AMG CLS 63
• Mercedes-AMG CLS 63 4MATIC
• Mercedes-AMG CLS 63 S
• Mercedes-AMG CLS 63 S 4MATIC
When towing a trailer, set the tyre pressure of the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure table in the filler flap (▷ page 320).
On vehicles without level control, the height of the ball coupling will alter according to the lock placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.
Please note that when towing a trailer, the following driving systems have limited availability ^If or are not available at all.
- PARKTRONIC (▷ page 175)
• Active Parking Assist (▷ page 177) - Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 192)
You will find permissible trailer loads under "Technical data" (▷ page 344).
Driving tips
When towing a trailer, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated. The ECO symbol turns yellow in the multifunction display. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (▷ page 136).
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permitted speed is. Observe the maximum permissible speed in the relevant country.
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. See the "Technical data" section to find out whether this applies to you vehicle (▷ page 344). In the event of an increased rear axle load, the vehicle/trailer
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different to when driving without a trailer and the vehicle will consume more fuel.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients.
This also applies to:
- activated COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (▷ page 68)
- activated cruise control
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously.
Driving tips
the trailer swings from side to side:
▶ Do not accelerate under any circumstances.
▶ Do not countersteer.
▶ Brake, if necessary.
- Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer.
- Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
- The values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability from a standstill, decrease with increasing altitude.
Folding the ball coupling in/out
Folding out the ball coupling
WARNING
If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged, the trailer can detach. There is a risk of an accident.
Always engage the ball coupling as described.
under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ③ flashes.
WARNING
If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury.
Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in.
natural_image
Front view of a car's rear bumper with a blue curved arrow indicating a motion or change (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)
text_image
② ① P68.00-7391-31Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle you must fold out the ball coupling.
The release wheel is located behind the left-hand side trim panel in the luggage compartment.
Opening the cover:
▶ Turn handle ① anti-clockwise and fold cover ② down.
text_image
P31.10-3549-31▶ Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages in a vertical position. Indicator lamp ③ goes out.
The multifunction display shows the Checkcheck trailer hitch lock display message until the ball coupling is engaged.
▶ Remove the protective cap from the ball coupling and store it in a safe place.
▶ Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling is clean and greased.
The trailer power socket is integrated in the ball coupling and folds out with it.
Folding in the ball coupling
Fold the ball coupling in if you are not using the trailer tow hitch.
▶ Place the protective cap on the ball coupling. The release wheel is located behind the left-hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage compartment.
Opening the cover:
▶ Turn handle ① anti-clockwise and fold cover ② down.
Unlocking and lowering the ball coupling:
▶ Grip release wheel ④ so that your thumb lies on the thumb rest and turn it around anticlockwise. The ball coupling unlocks and lowers. Indicator lamp ③ flashes.
Unlocking and folding out the ball coupling press the ball coupling until it engages behind
▶ Grip release wheel ④ so that your thumb lie on the thumb rest.
▶ Turn release wheel ④ anti-clockwise until the ball coupling releases and folds out from
the bumper. Indicator lamp ③ goes out and the message in the multifunction display disappears.
Coupling up a trailer
▶ Make sure that the transmission is in position P.
▶ Apply the electric parking brake.
▶ Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle.
▶ Couple up the trailer.
▶ Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.
▶ Check that the trailer lighting system is wo ing.
▶ Push the combination switch upwards and downwards and check whether the corresponding turn signal indicator on the trailer is flashing.
A connected trailer is only detected when the electrical connection is established correctly and when the lighting system is working properly. The function of other systems also depends on this, for example:
- ESP®
- PARKTRONIC
• Active Parking Assist
Uncoupling a trailer
WARNING
If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over run brake, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This pose a risk of injury.
Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake.
WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
If you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicle is lowered. This can cause you or others to become trapped between the vehicle body and tyres, or underneath the vehicle. This poses a risk of injury.
Make sure that no-one is in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arch or underneath the vehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable. be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake.
Remove the installed adapter cable before folding in the ball coupling. Otherwise, damage may occur to the rear bumper and the d adapter cable.
▶ Make sure that the transmission is in position P.
▶ Apply the electric parking brake.
▶ Secure the trailer against rolling away.
▶ Remove the trailer cable and uncouple the trailer.
Trailer power supply
! You can connect accessories to the permanent power supply up to a maximum of 240 W. and You cannot charge a trailer battery using the power supply.
When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer socket is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock.
The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9.
The power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10.
The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest.
To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key to position 2or 0 respectively (▷ page 133).
You can find more information about fitting the trailer electrics at a qualified specialist workshop.
^e Failure check for LEDs
If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, a malfunction message may appear in the multifunction display even if there is no fault. The reason for the error message may be that the current has fallen below the minimum of 50 mA.
To ensure reliable operation of the failure indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting must be guaranteed a minimum current of 50 mA.
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could
Trailer with 7-pin connector
General notes
Trailer with 7-pin connector: you can connect to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Fitting the adapter
text_image
nect ng 3 1 2 P31.10-3470-31! Make sure that there is sufficient cable p so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering.
! Remove the installed adapter cable before folding in the ball coupling. Otherwise, damage may occur to the rear bumper and the adapter cable.
Open the socket cover.
▶ Insert the plug connector with lug ① into groove ③ on the socket.
▶ Turn bayonet connection ② clockwise to stop.
▶ Let the cover engage.
▶ If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties.
Problems with trailer towing
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The unlocked ball coupling cannot be engaged. The indicator lamp flashes. | ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The ball coupling does not unlock and fold out, even though:• the vehicle is stationary• the release wheel of the ball coupling has been turned around to the left | Unlock the ball coupling again and fold it out.If the ball coupling still does not unlock and fold out:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
Important safety notes
WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.
WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function restrictions relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. The is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The on-board computer only shows messages warnings from certain systems in the multifur tion display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as sible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview; see the instrument cluster i tration (▷ page 34).
Displays and operation
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available.
- Cruise control activated (▷ page 157):
The segments light up from the stored speed to the end of the scale or to a permanently set speed limitation.
- Variable SPEEDTRONIC activated (▷ page 160): The segments light up from the start of the n-scale to the selected speed limitation.
- DISTRONIC PLUS activated (▷ page 161): One or two segments in the stored speed range light up.
- DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up.
Rev counter
! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine.
The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the measured air temperature and not the road surface temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (▷ page 208).
The multifunction display shows changes in the lostside temperature with a delay.
Coolant temperature gauge
WARNING
If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in
the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade.
The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side ( page 34). Under normal operating conditions and with the correct coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 °C.
At high outside temperatures and when driving in mountainous terrain, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale.
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with numbered parts and labeled controls① Multifunction display
② Right control panel
③ Left control panel
▶ To activate the on-board computer: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.
You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Vehicles with a COMAND Online multime
dia system: you can find further information on LINGUATRONIC in the separate operating manual.
Vehicles with Audio 20 multimedia sys-
tem: you can find further information on voice-operated control for navigation in the manufacturer's operating manual.
Left control panel
- Calls up the menu and menu bar
Press briefly:
- Scrolls through lists
- Selects a submenu or function
- In the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene
- In the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number
Press and hold:
- In the Audio menu: selects a pre-set list or a station list in the desired frequency range, or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling
- In the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open
- Confirms the selection or display message
- In the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number
Press briefly:
- Back
- Switches off voice-operated control for navigation or LINGUA-TRONIC
- Hides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used
- Exits the telephone book/redial memory
Press and hold:
- Calls up the standard display in the TripTrip menu
Right control panel
| Rejects or ends a callExits the telephone book/redial memory | |
| Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial memory | |
| + - | Adjusts the volume |
| Mute | |
| Switches on voice-operated control for navigation or LINGUA-TRONIC |
Multifunction display
text_image
123.4 miles 126593 Trip Navi Audio Tel 20.0°C R A N P D2 P64 347 8 81① Text field
② Menu bar
③ Drive program
④ Transmission position
⑤ Permanent display: outside temperature or speed
- Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (▷ page 113)
• ECO ECO start/stop function (▷ page 136)
• HOLD HOLD function (▷ page 169) - 120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries)
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu. Operating the on-board computer (▷ page 207). Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
- TripTrip menu (▷ page 208)
- NaviNavi menu (navigation instructions) (▷ page 210)
• AudioAudio menu (▷ page 211) - Tel menu (telephone) (▷ page 212)
- Assist. menu (assistance) (▷ page 213)
- Serv.Serv. menu (▷ page 215)
- Settings menu (settings) (▷ page 216)
- AMGAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (▷ page 221)
The display messages dependent on the multi-media system. For this reason, the displays for the Audio, Navi and Tel menus may differ slightly from those in your vehicle.
Trip menu
Standard display
▶ To display menu bar②: press the ▶ or ▶ button on the steering wheel. Text field ① shows the selected menu or s menu as well as display messages. If you do not press the buttons any longer, menu bar ② is faded out after a few sec
Possible displays in the multifunction display:
bar
| Category | Value | |---|---| | 1 | 123.0 | | 2 | 26753 |▶ Press and hold the ← button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip meter ① and total distance recorder ② appears.
• ↑ Gearshift recommendation, when manually (▷ page 145)
• P Active Parking Assist (▷ page 177)
• Cruise control (▷ page 157)
• LIM SPEEDTRONIC (▷ page 160)
Trip computer "From start" or "FromDisplaying the range and current fuel reset" consumption
text_image
From start 150 mi 1:30 h 31.6 mpg 60 mph 4 3 P54.33-3483-31
text_image
Distance 185 mi Consumption mpg P54.33-3482-31① Distance
② Driving time
③ Average speed
④ Average fuel consumption
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select From start or From reset.
The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was res (▷ page 209).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press ▲ or ▼ to select the display with approximate range and the current fuel consumption.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only displays the approximate range.
The approximate range that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. It there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refuelled
In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From start:
- the ignition has been switched off for more than four hours
• 999 hours have been exceeded
• 9,999 kilometres have been exceeded
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From reset.
ECO display
The ECO display is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. Res
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select ECO DISPLAYDISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset.
Further information on the ECO display (▷ page 154).
Digital speedometer
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the digital speedometer.
A gearshift recommendation can also appear in the display.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendation is shown in the status bar of the multifunction display.
Observe the information on gearshift recommendation ↑ when shifting manually (▷ page 145).
Resetting values
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the function that you wish to reset.
▶ Press OK to confirm your selection.
▶ Press ▼ to select Yes and press OK to confirm.
You can reset the values of the following functions: ③ Current road ④ Symbol indication
- Trip meter
- "From start" trip computer
- "From reset" trip computer
- ECO display
If you reset the values in the "ECO display" the values in the "From start" trip compute are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in the "ECO display" are also reset.
Navigation menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions.
Observe the additional information on navigation in the Digital Owner's Manual of the media system.
▶ Switch on the multimedia system.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the wheel to select the Navi menu.
Route guidance not active
text_image
Direction of travel ①—NE ② MERCEDESSTRASSE P54.33-3485-31① Direction of travel
② Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
text_image
181 mi ① ④ 3 mi ③ MERCEDESSTRASSE P54.33-3487-31① Distance to the destination
② Distance to the next change of direction
③ Current road
④ Symbol indicating "follow the road's course"
Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation
text_image
Benzstrasse ① ③ 650 yd ② P54.33-3488-31① Road to which the change of direction leads
② Distance to change of direction and visual distance display
③ Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is announced, you will see change-of-direction symbol ③ and distance graphic ②. This shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation
text_image
A8 MÜNCHEN 1 2 0.4 ml P54.33-3489-31① Road to which the change of direction leads
② Distance to change of direction and visual distance display
③ Lanes not recommended
④ Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction
⑤ Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended ③: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane.
Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ④: in this lane you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane.
Other status indicators of the navigation system
text_image
Direct. of dest. Area of dest. reached P54.33-3486-31The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status. Possible displays
- New route... or Calculating route A new route is calculated.
- Road not mapped
The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognised, new roads, car parks or private land.
- No routeNo route
No route could be calculated to the selected destination.
• ☐: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
text_image
FM 1:97.1 Mhz ① ② P54.33-3490-31① Active station list
② Station with preset position
The menu shows station ② with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station ② if this has been saved.
▶ Switch on the multimedia system and select radio.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. Only
▶ To select a preset list or station list: use the press
and briefly hold the ▲ or ▼ button until
the preset list or station list in the desired frequency range is shown.
▶ To select a station: briefly press ▲ or ▼.
i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is an optimised digital transmission standard designed for the mobile reception of radio transmissions.
Audio player or audio media operation
text_image
DISC 02 ①—Track 3 P54.33-3491-31Audio files from various audio players or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle.
Switch on the multimedia system and select audio CD or MP3 mode.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
▶ To select the next/previous track: briefly press the ▲ or ▼ button.
▶ To select a track from the track list (rapi scrolling): press and hold the ▲ or ▼ button until desired track ① appears.
If you press and hold the ▲ or ▼ button the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio players or media support this function. If track information is saved on the audio player or media, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track.
DVD-Video operation
text_image
DISC 02 ① Scene 1 P54.33-3492-31Only for vehicles with COMAND Online: you can use the Audio menu to operate video DVDs. press
▶ Switch on the multimedia system and select video DVD.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steer wheel to select the Audio menu.
▶ To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the ▲ or ▼ button.
▶ To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the ▲ or ▼ button until desired scene ① appears.
TV operation
text_image
TV ①—N-TV P54.33-3493-31Only for vehicles with COMAND Online: you use the Audio menu to select station ①.
The preset position is only displayed along channel ① if this has been saved. You can stations in the multimedia system.
▶ Switch on the multimedia system and select TV.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
▶ To select a saved channel: briefly press ▲ or ▼ button.
▶ To select a channel from the channel li press and briefly hold the ▲ or ▼ button.
Depending on the digital TV broadcaster, radio stations can also be received. The multifunction display shows TV (Radio).
Telephone menu
Introduction
WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle, while driving will distract you from traffic con
ditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving.
▶ Switch on the mobile phone, see the manufacturer's operating instructions.
▶ Switch on the multimedia system.
▶ Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket (▷ page 280).
or
▶ Establish a Bluetooth connection to the multimedia system, see digital Owner's Manual.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display:
with Telephone ready or the name of the net-sawork provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive.
Telephone No service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network.
i You can obtain further information about the suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®
at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
- on the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
^u Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the TelTel menu, a display message appears in the multi-function display.
You can accept a call at any time irrespective of the selected menu.
▶ Press the 📞 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call.
Rejecting or ending a call
▶ Press the 📞 button on the steering wheel to reject or end an incoming call.
Selecting an entry in the phone book Assistance menu
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
▶ Press the ▲, ▼ or OK button to switch to the phone book.
▶ Authorise access to the phone book on the phone.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired name.
or
Introduction
Depending on the equipment fitted in the vecle, you have the following options in the
Assist.Assist. menu:
• Showing the assistance graphic e (▷ page 213)
- Activating/deactivating the Traffic Sign Assist display (▷ page 214)
- Deactivating/activating ESP® (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (▶ page 214)
- Activating/deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot of DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 215)
- Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake (for page 214)
■ Aotivating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (▷ page 214)
- Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
a(▷ page 215)
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 215)
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 215)
Showing the assistance graphic
▶ To start rapid scrolling: press and hold □ or ▲ for longer than one second.
The names in the phone book are displayed• quickly one after the other.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list.
▶ If only one telephone number is stored a name: press the 📞 or OK button start dialling.
or
▶ If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 📞 or OK button to display the numbers.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the number you want to dial.
▶ Press the ☐ or OK button to start o ling.
or
▶ To exit the telephone book: press the [or ←] button.
Redialling
The on-board computer saves the last names numbers dialled in the redial memory.
text_image
OFF 100 m 50 m 0 m P54.33-3496-31▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu.
▶ Press ▲ or ▼ to select Assist.
graphicgraphic.
Press OK to confirm.
The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the dial-
assistance graphic.
The assistance graphic shows you the status and further information on the following driving systems or driving safety systems:
- Traffic Sign Assist (▷ page 191)
• DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 161) - PRE-SAFE® Brake (▷ page 75)
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steel wheel to select the Tel menu.
▶ Press the button to switch to the memory.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired name or number.
▶ Press the 📞 or OK button to start ling.
or
▶ To exit the redial memory: press the or ← button.
- COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (▷ page 68)
- ATTENTION ASSIST (▷ page 190)
- Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 194)
• Active Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 198) - rear window wiper (▷ page 116)
▶ Press ▼ to display the ATTENTION ASSIS assessment.
Traffic Sign Assist
You can activate or deactivate the warning tion of Traffic Sign Assist in the Traffic Sign
AssistAssist menu. When the message funct activated, detected traffic signs and information appear in the multifunction display for five seconds.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the wheel to select the Assist. menu.
▶ Using ▲ or ▼, select Traffic Sign AssistAssist.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The current selection appears.
▶ To activate/deactivate the message function: press OK again.
Further information about Traffic Sign Assist (▷ page 191).
Deactivating/activating ESP®
i Observe the important safety notes on ^® ESP (▷ page 71).
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP in the situations described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate E&P the following situations:
- when using snow chains
- in deep snow
- on sand or gravel
Deactivating/activating ESP® on Mercedes-AMG vehicles (▷ page 73).
For further information about ESP see (▷ page 71).
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu.
▶ Press ▲ or ▼ to select ESP.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The current selection appears.
To activate/deactivate: press OK again.
ESP® is deactivated if the OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running.
If the warning lamp and the OFF warning func lamp are lit continuously, ESPs not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps (▷ page 250).
Observe the information on display messages (▶ page 225).
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance package.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select PRE-SAFE Brake.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The current selection appears.
To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
When PRE-SAFE ^® Brake is deactivated, the assistance graphic shows the ☐OFF symbol in the multifunction display.
riskFor more information on PRE-SAFBrake, see (▷ page 75).
Activating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Collision Prevent..
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The current selection appears.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the assistance graphic shows the ▶!6- OFF symbol in the multifunction display.
Further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (▷ page 68).
Activating/deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the wheel to select the Assist. menu.
▶ Using ▲ or ▼, select DTR+: steer.asst.asst.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The current selection appears.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
When Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated, the multifunction display shows the DTR+: steering assistant On message.
Further information about DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (▷ page 168).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the s wheel to select the Assist. menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Attention Assist.
▶ Press OK to confirm your selection. The current selection appears.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to set Off, Standard or Sensitive.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the OFF symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display.
For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (▷ page 190).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select y. Blind Spot Assist.
▶ Press the OK button.
The current selection appears.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK ton again.
Further information about Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 192).
Further information about Active Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 196).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
but-Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu.
are ▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the Lane Keep. Assist.
▶ Press the OK button. The current selection appears.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to set Off, Standard or Adaptive.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting. Further information about Lane Keeping Assist (page 194).
Further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 198).
Service menu
Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Serv.S. menu:
- Calling up display messages in the message e memory (▷ page 224) - Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning sys- tem (▷ page 322)
- Checking the tyre pressure electronically (▷ page 323)
- Calling up the service due date (▷ page 292)
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, In the Settings menu you have the following options:
- Changing the instrument cluster settings (▷ page 216)
- Changing the light settings (▷ page 216)
- Changing the vehicle settings (▷ page 218)
- Changing the heating settings (▷ page 219)
- Changing the convenience settings (▷ page 220)
- Restoring the factory settings (▷ page 221)
Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for tance
The Display unit Speed-/odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain plays appear in kilometres or miles in the tifunction display.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steeri wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Instrument cluster submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. ▶ You will see the selected setting: km or miles.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to the:
- the digital speedometer in the Trip menu
- the total distance recorder and trip meter
- the trip computer
• the current consumption and the range - the navigation instructions in the Navi menu
- cruise control
- SPEEDTRONIC
- DISTRONIC PLUS
• ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Selecting permanent display
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is unavailable.
The Permanent display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed.
^1 The speed display is inverse to your speedometer.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Instrument cluster submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Permanent display: function.
The current setting, outside temperature or Addit. speedo [mph]:, appears.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Lights dis-
Setting the brightness for the instrument cluster lighting and switches
dis mul- The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis- plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted with the Brightness Display/
ering switches: switches: function.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Lights_lights submenu.
Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Brightness Display/switches: function. The current setting appears.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to adjust the brightness to any level from Level 1 to Level 5 (bright).
▶ Press the OK or ← button to save the setting.
If the light switch is set to the AUTO, ≥00 ≤ or position, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light.
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display.
In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is unavailable.
Switching the daytime driving lights on/off
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the ste wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightsLights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select t Day lights function.
If the Day lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the ⚙ symbol the multifunction display are shown in orange.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting. Further information on daytime driving lights (▷ page 110).
Switching adaptive functions on/off, MULTIBEAM LED
The Intell. Light Sys. function is used to switch the adaptive functions of MULTIBEAM LED on/off.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steeri wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightsLights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Intell. Light System function.
If the Intell. Light Sys. function has been switched on, the cone of light and the symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
When you switch the Intell. Light Sys. function on, you activate the following functions:
- Motorway mode
• Active light function
• Cornering light function with roundabout function - Extended range foglamps
If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, the multifunction displays shows the Intell. Light System: system inoperative Inactive for left-side traffic or Intell. Light System: system inoperative Inactive for right-side traffic/traffic display message instead of the Intell. Light System function in the Lights submenu (▷ page 217). This display message
will only appear if the setting for driving on the left/right is set opposite to your vehicle's country version.
Observe the additional information on the adaptive functions of MULTIBEAM LED (▷ page 112).
Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right
Only vehicles with MULTIBEAM LED have this function.
You can use this function to switch between in symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam (▷ page 110).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightsLights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Dipped beams Setting for: function. You will see the selected setting: Right-Right-side traffic or Left-side traffic.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Testing
If you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is the stationary.
If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are unavailable. These are only deactivated if the setting for driving on the left/right is set opposite to your vehicle's country version.
A qualified specialist workshop can set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right.
Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightsLights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Amb. brightness function. The current setting appears.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to adjust the brightness to any level from Off to Level 5 (bright).
▶ Press the OK or ← button to save setting.
Setting the ambient lighting colour
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steeri wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightsLights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Amb. light col. function.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to set the our to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR.
▶ Press the OK or ← button to save setting.
Activating/deactivating the surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steeri wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightsLights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Using ▼ or ▲, select the Surround lightinglighting function.
If the Surround lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily:
▶ Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. If you have activated the Surround lighting function and the light switch is set to the position, the following functions are activated when it is dark:
- surround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
with the key. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated (▷ page 110).
the exterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the boot lid/tailgate, the exterior lighting goes off after 15 seconds.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, he when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up:
- Side lamps
- Surround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off
If you activate the Lighting delayed sw.-off function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition lock.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightsLights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Lighting delayed sw.-off function. When the Lighting delayed sw.-off function is activated, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
Press the OK button to save the setting.
ehicle
Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the VehicleVehicle submenu.
lock.
▶Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select the Limit speed (winter tyres): function.
The current setting appears.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to adjust permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of ten (160 km/h to 240 km/h). The Off setting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off.
▶ Press the OK button to store the entry.
Observe the additional information on permanent SPEEDTRONIC (▷ page 161).
Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steer wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the VehicleVehicle submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Automatic door locks function.
If the Autom. locking function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the vehicle's doors in orange.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
If you activate the Auto. door locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed around 15 km/h.
For further information on the automatic locking feature; see (▷ page 86).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steeri wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the VehicleVehicle submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the 🔒 symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Heating
Auxiliary heating departure time
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle, especially carbon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries.
You should switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces which do not have an extraction system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. to guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle away from the wind.
WARNING
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot.
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass twigs may ignite if they come into contact with:
- hot parts of the exhaust system
g the exhaust gas itself
There is a risk of fire.
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, make sure that:
- no flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle components
• the exhaust gas can escape from the exhaust pipe unhindered
- the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.
Operating the auxiliary heating/ventilation draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance.
Only vehicles with auxiliary heating have this function.
In the Heating submenu, you can select a stored departure time or change a departure time.
The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating adopts the THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC temperature setting.
You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using Comfort the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console.
i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes.
Further information on auxiliary heating (▷ page 126).
Selecting the departure time or deactivating a selected departure time
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steer wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the HeatingHeating submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
You will see the selected setting.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select one of the three departure times or Timer off (no timer active).
▶ Press OK to confirm.
If a departure time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary heating button.
Changing the departure time
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steeri wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the HeatingHeating submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
You will see the selected setting.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select A, B or Change C.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
You can now change the departure time.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button to select the display to be changed: hours, minutes.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to set the selected display.
▶ Press the OK button to store the entry. The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary heating button lights up.
Comfort
Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle at occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.
If someone is trapped:
- press one of the memory function position buttons, or
- move the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the ering ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
Using ▼ or ▲, select the Easy Entry/ExitExit function.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (▷ page 105).
Switching belt adjustment on/off
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Belt adjustment function.
When the Belt adjustment function is activated, the seat belt is displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
For further information on belt adjustment, see ▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select No or (▷ page 45). YesYes.
Switching the fold mirrors in when locking function on/off
Press the OK button to confirm the selection.
If you have selected Yes and confirmed, the insultifunction display shows a confirmation message.
This function is only available when the vehicle equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
When you switch on the Auto. fold in function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger doorth the exterior mirrors fold out again.
or safety reasons, not all functions are reserved. The Limit speed (winter tyres): function permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set to the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset the light in the Light submenu, you must
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Auto. fold in function.
If the Auto. fold in function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the vehicle's exterior mirror in orange.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a car's side mirror and a digital camera control panel with a numbered dial (no text or symbols on the device itself)If you have switched on the Auto. fold in function and you fold the exterior mirrors in using button ① on the door, they will not fold out automatically (▷ page 107).
You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button ①.
Resetting to factory settings
Warm-up
text_image
① ② 3 UP 120 km/h 84 °C 98 °C Stop/Start active ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P54.33-3678-31① Digital speedometer
② Gear indicator
③ Upshift indicator
④ Engine oil temperature
⑤ Coolant temperature
⑥ Status indicator for ECO start/stop function (▷ page 136)
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP ③ indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program.
Engine oil temperature: if the engine is at normal operating temperature, the multifunction display shows oil temperature ④ in white.
If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ④ in blue, the engine is not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid using the
full output of the engine during this time.
(1)
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steeri wheel to select the Settings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Factory setting submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm. The Reset all settings? function appears.
SETUP
flowchart
graph TD
A["①"] --> B["S"]
C["②"] --> D["ON"]
E["③"] --> F["SPORT+"]
style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
① Drive program (C/SS+ or M)
② ESP® mode ON, OFF or SPORT handling mode SPORTSPORT
③ Suspension setting COMFORT, SPORT or SPORT +SPORT +
SETUP shows the drive program, ES(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the suspension setting.
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel select the AMG&MG menu.
▶ Press ▲ repeatedly until SETUP appears. or
▶ Briefly press the AMG button on the centre console (▷ page 173).
RACE TIMER
Displaying the intermediate time
text_image
120 km/h 3 L1 00:1471 Interm. Time New Lap P54.33-3508-31▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button to select Interm. Time.
▶ Press OK to confirm. The intermediate time is shown for five seconds.
Starting a new lap
text_image
120 km/h 3 ③ L2 00:11 90 ① BL 00:11 60 Interm. Time New Lap P54.33-35 10-31① RACETIMER
② Fastest lap time (best lap)
③ Lap
Displaying and starting the RACETIMER ▶ Press OK to confirm New Lap.
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on closed race circuit. Do not use the function public roads.
a i A maximum of 16 laps may be stored. The on 16th lap can only be completed with FinishFinis LapLap.
text_image
120 km/h 3 L1 00:00 00 ① ② Start P54.33-3506-31① Lap
② RACETIMER
Stopping the RACETIMER
text_image
Stop Race-Timer? No Yes P54.33-35 12-31You can start the RACETIMER when the engine press the ← button on the steering wheel. running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition OK to confirm Yes. lock.
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel select the AMGAMG menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until the RACETIMER appears.
▶ To start: press the OK button to start the RACETIMER.
The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 3 and then press OK to confirm Start, timing is continued.
the
Resetting the current lap
▶ Stop the RACETIMER.
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ to select Reset Lap.
▶ Press OK to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
text_image
Reset Race-Timer? No Yes P54.33-35 15-31If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset.
▶ Reset the current lap.
▶ Press OK to confirm Reset.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press ▼ Yes to select and confirm with OK.
All laps are deleted.
Overall evaluation
text_image
① RT 00:47:53.09 ② ⑤ 242 km/h ø 154 km/h ③ ④ 122.0 km P54.33-35 18-31① RACETIMER overall evaluation
② Total time driven
③ Average speed
④ Distance covered
⑤ Maximum speed
If you store at least one lap and stop the RACE-TIMER, an overall evaluation will then be available.
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the AMG&MG menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until the overall evaluation appears.
Lap evaluation
text_image
①—L1 06:98 09—② ⑤—242 km/h ø 186 km/h—③ ④—22.0 km P54.33-3513-31① Lap
② Lap time
③ Average lap speed
④ Lap length
⑤ Top speed during lap
If you store at least two laps and stop the RACE-TIMER, the lap evaluation function then becomes available.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
▶ Press ▲ repeatedly until the lap evaluation appears.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol ①.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a different lap evaluation.
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
• HOLD function (▷ page 169)
- Parking (▷ page 152)
Hides display messages
▶ Press the OK or ← button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages:
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to scroll through the display messages.
Safety systems
Display messages
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ES(Electronic Stability Program) are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty. In addition, the 📄, 📌 OFF and Ⓗ warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
If ESP ^ is not operational, ESP ^ is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.
▶ Drive on carefully.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
inoperative See Own- er's Manualer's Manual
ABS and ESP are faulty.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
In addition, the Ⓐ, ⬇, ⬇OFF and ⬇(a) warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
If ESP ^® is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilise the vehicle.
There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 inoperative See Own-er's Manualer's Manual | ESP®is faulty.Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.In addition, the [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation.If ESP®is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
  inoperative See Own-er's Manualer's Manual | EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and®ESE faulty.Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.In addition, the [IMAGE], [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired.The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.If ESP®is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
 Release parkingRelease parkingbrakebrake | You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Release the parking brake. |
 Check brake fluid level level | There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the red (1) warning lamp lights up in the instrum cluster and a warning tone sounds.⚠ WARNINGBraking efficiency may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and tr conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fau |
 Check brake pad wear | The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Inoperative Inoperative | One or more main features of the MB Contact are malfunction▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Collision Preven-Collection Assist Plus currently unavailable-see Owner's Manual | COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperativePossible causes:• The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio static other sources of electromagnetic radiation.• The system is outside the operating temperature range.• The on-board voltage is too low.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display mes goes out.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:▶ Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditio▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Restart the engine. |
| Collision Preven-Collection Assist Plus inoperative inoperative | COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily unavailable to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Man. | Important PRE-SAFE® functions have failed. All other occupant sa systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE Functions currently limited See Owner's ManualManual | PRE-SAFE® PLUS or PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:The function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.The system is outside the operating temperature range.The on-board voltage is too low.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out.PRE-SAFE® PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake are operational again.If the display message does not disappear:Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).Restart the engine.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP(▷ page 73). |
| PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE Functions limitedFunction limitedSee Owner's Manual | PRE-SAFE® PLUS or PRE-SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a malfunction with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Radar sensors dirtySee Owner's Manual | The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.Possible causes:dirt on sensorsheavy rain or snowwhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure.e.g. in desert-like areasAt least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioningor is temporarily unavailable:COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSPRE-SAFE® BrakePRE-SAFE® PLUSActive Lane Keeping AssistActive Blind Spot AssistDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go PilotIf the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist w not perform a course-correcting brake application.A warning tone also sounds.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and driving safety systems will be available again. The display messagedisappears.If the display message does not disappear:Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).Switch off the engine.Clean all sensors (▷ page 296).Restart the engine.The display message disappears. |
| [EDSA] | If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle.Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts(▷ page 46). |
| [DDTA] | If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle.WARNINGA seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engag in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection.This poses an increased risk of injury.If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belt(▷ page 44).Observe the additional information on the rear seat belt status indi-cator (▷ page 46). |
 Restraint sys. malfunction Consultfuncti workshopworkshop | The restraint system is faulty. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on the restraint system (▷ page 41). |
 Front left malfunction Consult work- shoporFront right malfunction Consult workshopworkshop | The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right.The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
 Rear left malfunction Consult work- shoporRear right malfunction Consult workshopworkshop | The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right.The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
 Rear centre malfunction Consult work- shopshop | The restraint system is malfunctioning at the rear centre. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
 Left windowbag malfunction Consultfuncti [SWC5]borRight malfunction Consult work- shopshop | The left or right windowbag is malfunctioning.The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
Lights
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Left dipped beam (example) | The bulb in question is faulty.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.i LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed. |
 Intell. Light System inoperatively | The adaptive functions of MULTIBEAM LED are malfunctioning. Lights remain available without the adaptive functions of MULTIBELED.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Malfunction See Owner's Manual | The exterior lighting is faulty.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.► Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic condition► Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).► Check the fuses (▷ page 315).► If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning no you do so.If the multifunction display still shows the display message:► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
 AUTO lights inoperative | The light sensor is faulty.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Switch off lights | You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A tone also sounds.► Turn the light switch to the AUTO position. |
| Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailableSee Owner's Manual | Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inerative.Possible causes:· The windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.· Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.► Clean the windscreen.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational againAdaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again message is displayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is operational again. |
| Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative | Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Engine | |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Top up coolant See Owner's ManualOwner's Manual | The coolant level is too low.⚠ Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.▶ Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (▷ page 290).▶ If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
 | The fan motor is faulty.▶ If the coolant temperature is below 120 °C, continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.▶ Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. |
 Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine offoff | The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGNever drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine has overheated can cause some fluids that may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet.There is a risk of injury.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Wait until the engine has cooled down.▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.▶ Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 120 °C. The engine may otherwise be damaged.▶ Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.▶ If the temperature increases again, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 °C. |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 See Owner's Manual | The battery is no longer being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes: · faulty alternator · torn poly-V-belt · a malfunction in the electronics! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overhead. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and tr conditions, and switch off the engine. ▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152). ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual Owner's Manual | The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge too low.A warning tone also sounds. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and tr conditions, and switch off the engine. ▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152). ▶ Observe the instructions in the [→] See Owner's Manual display message. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling | The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds. ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. ▶ Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (▷ page 289). ▶ If necessary, top up the engine oil (▷ page 289). ▶ Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop i engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.merc benz.com. |
 Add 1 litre engine oil when next refu-elling | Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. ▶ Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (▷ page 289). ▶ If necessary, top up the engine oil (▷ page 289). ▶ Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop i engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any fied specialist workshop oron the Internet at http://bevo.merc benz.com. |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Engine oil levelStop vehicle Switchengine offengine off | Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Check the engine oil level (▷ page 289).▶ If necessary, top up the engine oil (▷ page 289). |
 Reserve fuel level | The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into the reserve range.▶ Refuel at the nearest filling station. |
 | There is very little fuel in the fuel tank.Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated.▶ You must refuel at the nearest filling station. |
 Please replace airfilterfilter | Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Clean the fuel filterter | Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Refill AdBlue atworkshop See Owner's Manualer's Manual | The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Refill AdBlue atworkshop No startin .. km | The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Refill AdBlue atworkshop Eng. startnot possible | The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can no longer start the engine.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
 Check AdBlue SeeOwner's Manual | The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Eng. start not possible in ..km | The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also soun ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
 Eng. start not possible | The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also soun You can no longer start the engine. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
Driving systems
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Attention Assist:Take a break! | Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds.▶ If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get enough rest. |
 Attention Assist:Attention Assistinoperativeinoperative | ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Vehicle rising:Vehicle rising | Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. |
 Vehicle rising:Vehicle risingPlease wait:Please wait | The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears. |
 Stop vehicle Vehi-cle too low | You have pulled away while the vehicle level was too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period.▶ Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away again. |
| AIRMATIC is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.► Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h.► Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wings or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movement is too great.► Listen for scraping sounds.► Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.Depending on the fault, it may be possible to raise the vehicle.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| MalfunctionMalfunction | The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be impaired.► Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual | Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:·The windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.·Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.► Clean the windscreen.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears.Traffic Sign Assist is operational again. |
| Traffic Sign Assist inoperativeinoperative | Traffic Sign Assist is faulty.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| HOLDoffoff | The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle has started to skid.A warning tone also sounds.► Reactivate the HOLD function later (▷ page 169). |
| Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's ManualorActive Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual | Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:·The windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.·Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.·There have been no lane markings for an extended period.·The lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:► Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.► Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).► Clean the windscreen. |
| Lane Keeping Assist inoperativeorActive Lane Keeping Assist inoperativeinoperative | Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual See Owner's Manual | Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes: ·The radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. ·The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.The yellow ▲ indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear: ▶ Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. ▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152). ▶ Restart the engine. |
| Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual | Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer.You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. ▶ Press OK on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. |
| Blind Spot Assist inoperativeorActive Blind Spot Assist inoperativeinoperative | Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty.The yellow ▲ indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Park Assist cancelled | The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. ▶ Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. |
| You inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. ▶ While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the multifunction steering wheel. | |
| The vehicle has started to skid and ^ ESPs intervened. ▶ Use Active Parking Assist again later (▷ page 177). | |
| Park Assist inoper-ative | You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking manoeuvres.Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (▷ page 177).▶ Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Switch off and restart the engine.If the multifunction display still shows the display message:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| PARKTRONIC is faulty.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| Park AssistPark Assist switched offswitched off | The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically. |
| DISTRONIC PLUS off | DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, DISTRONIC PLUS has deactivated automatically (▷ page 161) |
| DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS available againavailable | DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 161). |
| DISTRONIC PLUS currently unavailableSee Owner's Manual | DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are also temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:The radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.The system is outside the operating temperature range.The on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:▶ Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Restart the engine. |
| DISTRONIC PLUS inop-erative | DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty.The following may have also failed:BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic AssistPRE-SAFE® BrakeSteering Assist and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| DISTRONIC PLUS suspended perded | You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. ▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. |
| DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS - - - km/h | An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. ▶ Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 152). |
| DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inoperative | DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are therefore also unavailable. A warning tone also sounds. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| DTR+: steering DTR+: assist. currently assist unavailable See Owner's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer’s Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's Manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manualer's manuale assist assistant inoperative | Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: The windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. There have been no lane markings for an extended period. The lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152). Clean the windscreen. |
| DTR+: steering DTR+: assistant inoperative | Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty. However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available. A warning tone also sounds. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inoperative | SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h | You have reached the stored speed limit for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed. You can hide the display message by pressing the OK button. The display message will not reappear until the ignition has been switched on again. |
| SPEEDTRONIC suspend-SPEDdedded | If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kick-down), SPEEDTRONIC is switched to passive mode.The speed limitation is not active.▶ Drive slower than the stored speed and without kickdown.or▶ Set a new speed.or▶ Call up the last speed stored again.When the display message disappears, the speed limitation is active. |
| SPEEDTRONIC LimitSPEED--- km/h--- km/h | SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated, as not all of the activation conditions have been met.▶ Check the activation conditions for SPEEDTRONIC (▷ page 160). |
| Cruise controlCruise--- - - - km/h | A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example.▶ If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed.▶ Check the activation conditions for cruise control (▷ page 157). |
| Cruise control off | Cruise control has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated automatically (▷ page 157). |
 Maximum speed exceed-dedded | Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded.▶ Drive more slowly. |
Tyres
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Tyre pressureTyre press-Check tyresCheck tyres | The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:you have changed the positions of the wheels and tyres or fitted new wheels and tyresthe tyre pressure in one or more tyres has droppedWARNINGUnderinflated tyres pose the following risks:the tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increasethe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre tractionthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impairedThere is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (▷ page 302).Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressure.Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (▷ page 322). |
| Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat IndicatorFlat Indicator | The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (▷ page 322). |
| Run Flat Indicator inoperativeinoperative | The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| RectifyRectify tyre pressuretyre pressure | The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great.Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (▷ page 323).If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.Restart the tyre pressure monitor (▷ page 324). |
| CheckCheck tyre(s)tyre(s) | The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds. WARNINGUnderinflated tyres pose the following risks:the tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increasethe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre tractionthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impairedThere is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (▷ page 302).Check the tyre pressure (▷ page 323).If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. |
| WarningWarning tyre defecttyre defect | The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.⚠ WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards:a flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicleyou could lose control of the vehiclecontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fireThere is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (▷ page 302). |
| Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable-bleble | No signals can be received from the tyre pressure sensors due to strong RF interference. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.Drive on.The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. |
WARNING
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Wheel sensor(s)wheel missingmissing | There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre does not appear in the multifunction display. ▶ Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Tyre press. monitor inoperative Noinoperative wheel sensorswheel sensors | The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. ▶ Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. |
| Tyre press. monitor inoperativeinoperative | The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
Vehicle
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| To start engine, shift to either P or Nor N | You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. ▶ Shift the transmission to position P or N. |
| Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position | You have attempted to shift the transmission to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. |
| To shift out of P or N, or N, depress brake and start engine | With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the transmission out of position P or N into another transmission position. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. ▶ Start the engine. |
| Risk of vehicle rollingrolling Transmission not in P | The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is i position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident. ▶ Shift the transmission to position P. ▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152). ▶ Close the driver's door fully. |
| Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationarytionary | The vehicle is moving. ▶ Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. ▶ Shift the transmission to position P. |
| Without changing without gear, gear, consult workshopconsult | You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:►Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D.If transmission position R, N or P is selected:►Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).►Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Reversing not poss. consult workshopconsult | You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a malfunction.The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.A warning tone also sounds.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Transmission Mal-Transfunction Stopfunction | A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission components.A warning tone also sounds. The transmission shifts automatically to position N.►Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.►Shift the transmission to position P.►Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).►Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Auxiliary batteryAuxil MalfunctionMalfunction | The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.►Until then, shift the transmission to position P before you switch off the engine.►Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake. |
  | The tailgate is open.⚠ WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.►Close the tailgate.The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGThe open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle motion.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and tr conditions.▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Close the bonnet. |
 | At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Close all doors. |
 Rear left seat back-rest notrest notlockedorRear rightseat backrest notlockedlocked | The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/hand side. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Push the backrest back until it engages. |
 Check trailer hitchlocklock | The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not engaged, the trailer may come loose is a risk of an accident.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and tr conditions, and switch off the engine.▶ Apply the parking brake.▶ Engage the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch in the end (▷ page 202). |
 inoperative BatteryLowLOW | The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has swit itself off or cannot be switched on (▷ page 126).▶ Drive for a considerable distance.The battery charges. The auxiliary heating is operational again soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. |
 inoperative Refuelinoperative Refuevehiclevehicle | There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating ca switched on (▷ page 126).▶ Refuel at the nearest filling station. |
 inoperative See Own-er's Man.er's Man. | The auxiliary heating is temporarily malfunctioning or faulty.▶When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating, waiting several minutes between each attempt (▷ page 126).▶If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop. |
| Telephone No service | Your vehicle is outside the mobile phone network provider's trans-mitter/receiver range.▶Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. |
 Power steering mal-function See Own-er's Manualer's Manual | The power steering assistance is faulty.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.▶Check whether you are able to apply the extra steering force required.▶If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.▶If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. |
 Top up washer fluid | The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.▶Top up the washer fluid (▷ page 291). |
Key
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Key does not belong to vehicle | You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.▶ Use the correct key. |
 Replace keyReplace key | The key needs to be replaced.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Change key batteries | The battery of the KEYLESS-GO key is discharged.▶ Replace the batteries (▷ page 82). |
 Key not detected(red display message) | The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. |
| A strong source of radio waves is causing interference, this means that the KEYLESS-GO key is not recognised when the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Insert the key into the ignition lock and bring into key mode. | |
 Key not detected(white display message) | The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.▶ Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions on the vehicle.If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:▶ Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. |
 Remove starting button, then insert key | The KEYLESS-GO key is not continually detected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Several warning and indicator lamps can thereby temporarily light up or flash. This behaviour is non-critical. These warning and indicator lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after the engir started or during a journey.
Safety
Seat belts
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶Solutions |
| ▷ Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 second after the engine starts.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 44). | |
| ▷ Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 44).The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. | |
| ▷ The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt.▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 44).The warning lamp goes out.There are objects on the front-passenger seat.▶ Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out. | |
| ▷ The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds.The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h.▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 44).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h.▶ Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. |
Safety systems
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶Solutions |
| (1) | ▷ The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.▶ If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| (2) | ▷ The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds.You are driving with the parking brake applied.▶ Release the parking brake.The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. |
| (3) | ▷ The red brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. |
| (4) | ▷ The red brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGThere is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.Braking efficiency may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).▶ Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not correct the fault.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. |
| ▷ The yellow ABS warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is faulty.An additional warning tone indicates that EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is faulty.Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.If ESP®is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilise the vehicle.Increased risk of skidding and/or accident!▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavailable. | |
 | ▷ The red brake system warning lamp and the yellow®, ESP®OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the drive system is running.ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning.Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.If ESP®is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilise the vehicle.Increased risk of skidding and/or accident!▶ Observe the additional display messages inthe multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
Warning/indicator lamp
Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding of at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
▶ Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away
▶ Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion.
▶ Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
▶ Do not deactivate ESP.
In rare cases (▷ page 72) it may be better to deactivate ESP Observe the important safety notes on ESP page 71).
The yellow ESP ^ OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP ^ is deactivated.
WARNING
If ESP ^® is deactivated, ESP ^® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting braking applications.
Increased risk of skidding and/or accident!
▶ Reactivate ESP ^® . In rare cases (▷ page 72) it may be better to deactivate ESP Observe the important safety notes on ESP page 71).
▶ Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP ^® cannot be activated:
▶ Drive on carefully.
- Contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the system checked.
The yellow ESP and ESP ^ OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP ^ is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.
The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP ^ is not operational, ESP ^ is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
Increased risk of skidding and/or accident!
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶Solutions |
| SPORT | ▷ Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.SPORT handling mode is activated.⚠ WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated, ESP unable to stabilise the vehicle.Increased risk of skidding and/or accident!▶ Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (▷ page 73). |
| ▷ The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is malfunctioning.⚠ WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.Observe the additional information on the restraint system (▷ page 41). |
Engine
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶Solutions |
| ▷ The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a fault, for example:in the engine managementin the fuel injection systemin the exhaust systemin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)in the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode.Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (▷ page 151).▶ After refuelling start the engine three to four times.If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency mode cancelled. You do not need to have the vehicle checked. | |
| ▷ The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into the reserve range.Refuel at the nearest filling station. | |
| ▷ The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving.Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
Warning/indicator lamp
Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the air supply to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).
▶ Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
▶ Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (▷ page 290).
▶ If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by froze slush.
▶ Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120 °C. The engine may otherwise be damaged.
▶ Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
- Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 °C. The air supply to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine has overheated can cause some fluids that may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet.
There is a risk of injury.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).
▶ Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
▶ Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (▷ page 290).
▶ If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| ▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by fr slush.▶ If the coolant temperature is below 120 °C, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.▶ Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. | |
| Driving systems | |
| Warning/indicatorlamp | ▷▷ Signal typePossible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| ▷ The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.▶ Increase the distance. | |
| ▷ The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A wartone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line travel at too high a speed.▶ Be prepared to brake immediately.▶ Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action.Observe the additional information on PRE-SAFF Brake (▷ page 75).Observe the additional information on the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (▷ page 68). | |
Tyres
Warning/indicator lamp
Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss or malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres.
WARNING
Underinflated tyres pose the following risks:
- the tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase
- the tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction
- the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired
There is a risk of an accident.
▶ Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (▷ page 302).
▶ Check the tyre pressure (▷ page 323).
▶ If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tyre pressure monitor is faulty.
WARNING
The system is possibly unable to detect or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
General notes
The section on the multimedia system in this For safety reasons, some functions are restric-manual describes the basic principles for operated or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. Ation. More information can be found in the Dig+ will notice this, for example, because either ital Owner's Manual. you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect.
Important safety notes
WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for country in which you are currently driving with operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example:
- traffic lights
- stop and give way signs
- parking or stopping restrictions
- road narrowing
- other road and traffic rules and regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect driving recommendations if the actual road/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map data.
For example:
- a diverted route
- the road layout or the direction of a one-w street has been changed
For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations.
Function restrictions
Operating system
Overview
General notes
Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible.
Wearing polarised sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. If necessary, the display may temporarily switch off completely.
Cleaning instructions
! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display.
Switching the multimedia system on/off
Press the ON control knob.
Adjusting the volume
▶ Turn the ON control knob.
The volume changes:
• for the currently set media source
• during a traffic announcement or navigation message
• in hands-free mode during an active call
Switching the sound on/off
▶ Press the button on the control panel. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the symbol. If you switch the media source or change the volume, the sound is automatically switched on.
You will hear navigation messages even when the sound is muted.
Functions
The multimedia system has the following functions:
- Radio mode
• Media mode with media search - Sound systems
- Navigation system
COMAND Online: navigation using hard drive Audio 20: navigation using SD memory card
- Communication functions
• Vehicle functions with system settings
• Favourites functions
Controller
The controller in the centre console lets you:
- select menu items on the display
- enter characters
- select a destination on the map
- save entries
The controller can be:
- turned (◎)
- slid left or right ←◎→
- slid forwards or back ↑◎↓
- slid diagonally
- pressed briefly or pressed and held
Back button
You can use the ← button to exit a menu or call up the basic display of the current operating mode.
▶ To exit the menu: briefly press the button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode.
▶ To call up the basic display: press the button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the basic display of the current operating mode.
Favourites
Calling up and exiting favourites
▶ To call up: press the ☐ * button on the controller.
▶ Select a favourite, e. g. Vehicle. The favourites are displayed.
▶ To exit: press the * button again.
Adding favourites
^e Adding a predefined favourite
text_image
Medium On/off Phone book Sound Off ① Reassign Rename Move Delete P82.89-0140-31① To add a new favourite
② To rename a selected favourite
③ To move a selected favourite
④ To delete a selected favourite
▶ Press the * button.
▶ Slide Ⓞ↓ the controller. The menu bar is shown.
▶ Select ReassignReassign.
The categories are displayed.
▶ Select a category.
The favourites are displayed.
▶ Select a favourite.
▶ Add a favourite at the desired position. If a favourite has already been added at position, it will be overwritten.
Adding your own favourite
▶ Select Vehicle → Climate control.
▶ Press and hold the ☐ button until favourites are displayed.
▶ Add a favourite at the desired position. If a favourite has already been added at position, it will be overwritten.
Navigation mode
Important safety notes
WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system.
General notes
Correct functioning of the navigation system depends, amongst other things, on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or multi-storey car parks.
Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT; see the manufacturer's operating instructions. The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The card box contains a quick guide.
The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND Online. Further information can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual.
Selecting a route type and route options
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Navi → Navigation.
The map displays the current vehicle position.
▶ Slide Ⓞ↓ the controller.
▶ Select Options → Route settings.
the Notes for route types:
- Eco routeEco route
this Dynamic routeDynamic route
Traffic reports on the route are taken into account for the route guidance (not available in all countries).
- Dynamic route only after request You can decide whether or not current traffic reports should be taken into account for route calculation (not available in all countries).
- Calculate alternative routes Different routes are being calculated. In order to do so, instead of Start, select the menu item Continue.
To avoid/use route options: select Avoid optionsoptions.
▶ Select a route option.
Notes for route options:
- Use toll roads
i- The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). - Use vignette roads (not available in all the countries)
The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette). A vignette allows temporary use of the route network, e. g. 10 days or 1 year.
Entering an address
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Navi → Navigation.
The map displays the current vehicle position.
▶ Slide Ⓞ↓ the controller.
▶ Select Destination → Address entry.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
e- \$Down or postcode, street, house number
• country, town or postcode
- town or postcode, centre
• street, town or postcode, junction
▶ Select TownTown.
The town in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out.
▶ Enter the town.
The symbol: the location is contained the digital map multiple times.
▶ To switch to the list: slide ↑◎ the control set as intermediate destination adds
ler.
▶ Select the location.
If available, the postcode is shown. If there are different postcodes available for the location, the corresponding digits are displayed with an XX.
▶ Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance.
Select Cancel current route guidance or Set as intermediate destination.
Cancel current route guidance cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination.
Set as intermediate destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate destinations list.
Further options for destination entry:
- search for a keyword
The keyword search finds destinations using fragments of words.
- select the last destination
- select a contact
- select a POI
You can search for a POI by location, name telephone number.
- select destination on the map
- enter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destinations.
- select travel guide destination (only available for selected European countries)
- select destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps
- select geo-coordinates
Calculating the route
Prerequisite: the address has been entered andonnect: is in the menu.
▶ Select Start or Continue.
The route is calculated with the selected ro type and the selected route options.
Connecting the mobile phone
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth interface, you require a Bluetooth capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above.
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Vehicle → System settings → Activate Bluetooth.
▶ Activate Bluetooth® √.
Mobile phone:
▶ Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you
- Phone book
- Call lists
• Text messages and e-mails
i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be found at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Searching for and authorising (connecting) a mobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-media system for the first time, you will need search for the phone and then authorise (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, auth
isation takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimed
system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The
mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorisation. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Owner's Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to multimedia system at any one time.
Searching for a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Tel/∅ → Connect device → Search for phones → Start searchsearch.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
Symbols in the device list
| Symbol | Explanation |
| New mobile phone found, not ye authorised. | |
| Mobile phone is authorised, but i not connected. | |
| • | Mobile phone is authorised and connected. |
Connecting the mobile phone
Authorisation using Secure Simple Pairing:
▶ Select the mobile phone. In A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
▶ If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia system.
▶ Confirm the code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
-two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
▶ If the codes are different: select No on the ti-multimedia system.
The process is cancelled.
Repeat authorisation.
uthorisation by entering a passkey (passcode):
Select the Bluetooth name of the mobile phone.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
▶ Choose a one- to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey.
▶ Enter the passkey on the multimedia system
Press ok to confirm.
▶ Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
i Mobile phones that are connected to the optionally available telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) are displayed separately in the device list. These are found below the entry MB SAP module phones.
Switching between mobile phones
If you have authorised more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones.
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Connect device.
▶ Select a mobile phone from the device list.
Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile)
Introduction
The module can be used as a permanently installed telephone with its own SIM card (▷ page 263) or in conjunction with a mobile phone (▷ page 263).
If you wish to use the module in conjunction with your mobile telephone, the mobile phone must support the Bluetooth SAP profile (SIM Access Profile).
The following functions are available using theMounting the module in the stowage compartment: of the centre console
- hands-free mode
• data modem mode (▷ page 263) - sending and receiving text messages (▷ page 264)
- access to the phone book of the mobile phone (if supported by the mobile phone) (▷ page 264)
- charging a mobile phone via the USB connection (▷ page 264)
i The module is not available in all vehicles, depending on the equipment.
Installing the module
text_image
① ② P82.89.2022-31Mounting the module in the stowage compartment of the centre console
▶ Slide module ② into bracket ① until it aud bly engages.
Connecting the module via a USB (COMAND Online)
natural_image
3D mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with labeled parts and a tool, no readable text or symbols present.▶ Insert USB cable ① into the module.
▶ Slide the module into the bracket until it audibly engages.
▶ Connect the USB cable to the USB port.
Activating and connecting the module
text_image
ec- , ① ② P82.89.2024-31Multimedia system:
▶ Select Tel/
▶ Module: install (▷ page 262).
▶ Press and hold button ②.
▶ As soon as indicator lamp ① starts flashing yellow, release the button.
The indicator lamp continues to flash yellow.
Multimedia system:
Select Connect device → Connect MB SAP module → Start search.
The module is searched for and connected.
To authorise a mobile phone: select Start able searchsearch and follow the instructions of the m timedia system. Further information on authorising and connecting mobile phones (▷ page 261).
SIM card mode
Inserting a SIM card
text_image
1 SIM P82.89.2025-31▶ With the contact surface facing down, insert SIM card ① into the SIM card slot until it engages. After a SIM card is inserted in the module, Bluetooth® connection with another mobile phone is no longer possible. Any existing Bluetooth® connection is ended upon SIM card insertion.
Connecting the mobile phone
General notes
Before using your mobile phone with the mode and the multimedia system for the first time, will need to search for the phone and then authorise it.
Requirements
The mobile phone can be authorised and connected to the module if:
- the module is installed (▷ page 262) and vated in the multimedia system (▷ page 262)
- no SIM card is inserted in the module
- the mobile phone has no active Bluetooth connection to another device
- the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® SAP profile (SIM Access Profile)
Depending on the type of mobile phone, different settings must be changed on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
- Bluetooth® must be activated on the mobile phone and must be made visible to other devices
- the Bluetooth® SIM Access Profile of the mobile phone must be activated
Authorising and connecting a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Connect device → Search for phones → SAP phone → Start search → MB SAP module phones
▶ Select the mobile phone.
▶ Enter and confirm any 16-digit PIN.
▶ Enter and confirm the same PIN on the mobile phone.
▶ Where necessary, enter the SIM card PIN into the multimedia system and confirm.
i Please observe the messages in the mobile phone. If necessary, you will be asked to confirm further profile requests.
Switching between mobile phones
If you have authorised more than one mobile phone on the module, you can switch between the individual phones.
▶ Select the mobile phone under MB SAP module phones.
▶ Confirm the connection request (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
▶ Where necessary, enter the SIM card PIN into the multimedia system and confirm.
data modem mode
acti- Connect the mobile phone to the module (▷ page 263).
or
▶ Insert the SIM card into the SIM card slot on the module (▷ page 263).
Before connecting for the first time, enable the module for Internet access and select the network provider in the multimedia system (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Use as a data modem is automatically activated.
▶ Activate/deactivate data roaming (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
For further information on data mode without Charging a mobile phone
telephony with COMAND Online (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Settings
Storing/deleting the SIM card PIN
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Connect device → MB SAP module phonesphones
▶ Highlight the mobile phone.
▶ To select ☐: navigate to the right.
▶ Activate ☑ or deactivate □Store PIN.
Transferring the phone book
In order to use the phone book of the mobile phone via the multimedia system, the phone book must be transferred using the module.
The transfer of data may take up to ten minutes. Transmission occurs automatically after a Bluetooth® connection is automatically established.
Text messages
Requirements
The module is connected with the mobile (▷ page 263) or is being used in the SIM mode (▷ page 263).
Activating/deactivating text message downloading from the mobile phone
| Dial number Function | |
| 00080 Text message | down-loading is deactivated. |
| 00081 Text message | down-loading is activated. |
For further information on receiving text messages when using the telephone module (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
text_image
① ② P82.89.2026-31▶ Slide cover ② on the module in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
▶ Connect the mobile phone via a USB data cable with USB port ①.
Media mode
General notes
If you wish to play external media sources, the default display must already be turned on. Further information on media mode (see the Digital Owner's Manual).
The following external media sources can be used:
- Apple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)
- USB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) (▷ page 265)
• CD
• DVD (COMAND Online) - SD cards
• via devices connected by Bluetooth®
i Information on the single CD/DVD drive or DVD changer (see the Digital Owner's Manual).
Using the device list
Multimedia system:
▶ Select Media → Devices.
The available media sources will be shown.
The • dot indicates the current setting.
▶ Select the media source.
playable files are played back.
Inserting/removing an SD card
Important safety notes
WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
! If you are no longer using the SD card, you should remove it and store it outside the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card.
Inserting an SD card
The SD card slot is on the control panel.
▶ Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until the SD card engages. The side with the contacts must face downwards.
Removing an SD card
▶ Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
▶ Remove the SD card.
Connecting USB devices
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a close-up of a device panel showing two buttons and a pen inserted (no visible text or symbols)There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest.
▶ Connect the USB device to the USB port.
▶ Select the media source (▷ page 264).
Stowage areas
Loading guidelines
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit veh occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions.
Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could buy yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should note the following when transporting a load:
- Never exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants).
- The luggage compartment is the preferred place to store objects.
-
Position heavy loads as far forward as possible and as low down in the load compartment as possible.
-
The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
- Always place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place.
●Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
Use the lashing eyelets and the luggage nets to transport loads and luggage.
- Only use lashing eyelets and fastening components that are suitable for the weight and size of the load.
- When objects are transported in the luggage compartment, the combined luggage cover and net must always be installed (luggage compartment cover and safety net).
- Secure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp edges for protection.
i Load restraints are available at any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Stowage compartments
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction.
- Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations.
-
Always make sure that objects do not project from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
-
Ensure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey.
- Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or outsize objects in the load compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 266).
Front stowage compartments
Glove compartment
text_image
① ② P68 90-7342-31▶ To open: pull handle ① and open glove partment flap ②.
▶ To close: fold glove compartment flap ② upwards until it engages.
text_image
1 2 P68.00-7343-31The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element.
▶ To lock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90^ clockwise to position 2.
▶ To unlock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° anti-clockwise to position 1.
Spectacles compartment
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the head and neck area with a directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)There is a compartment to stow spectacles in the roof lining on the driver's side.
▶ To open: pull down spectacles compartment ① by the handle.
Stowage compartments in the centre sole
text_image
com- P ① P68.00-7362-31Mercedes-AMG vehicles
▶ Briefly press trim ①.
i The stowage tray can be removed.
text_image
1 nd ent to P68.00-7360-31Front stowage compartment (all other models)
▶ To open: slide the cover forwards by han-Stowage compartment under the front dle ① in the direction of the arrow until it seats engages.
▶ To close: briefly press the front of handle
text_image
① ② F8.00-7361-31Rear stowage compartment (all other models)
▶ Briefly press trim ② in the direction of the arrow. Cover ① swings upwards.
Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest
natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with directional arrows and a numbered marker (no text or symbols)▶ To open: pull handle ① up.
The armrest folds out.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following may be in the stowage space:
- an SD card slot
- a multimedia connector unit with 2 USB ports, e.g. for iPod, iPhone® or MP3 player (see the separate operating instructions)
• a mobile phone bracket
WARNING
If you exceed the maximum permitted load of the stowage compartment, the cover is unable to restrain the objects. Objects may be thrown out of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always observe the maximum load of the stowage compartment. Stow and secure heavy objects in the luggage compartment.
The maximum permissible load of the stowage compartment is 1.5 kg.
text_image
Diagram of a car seat with labeled parts and directional arrow indicating rotation or movement▶ To open: pull handle ① up and fold cover ② forwards.
On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment under the driver's seat.
Rear stowage compartments
Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest
text_image
① ② P68-00-7392-31▶ To open: fold down seat armrest ②.
▶ Fold cover ① of the armrest upwards.
Stowage nets
Stowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the left-hand side of the luggage compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 266) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (▷ page 266).
Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident.
- The vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury.
- Objects or loads in the boot/luggage compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip.
Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 266).
Folding the seat backrest forwards
When folding the rear seat backrest forwards, ensure that there are no items lying on the seat cushions. These items could otherwise be damaged or could themselves damage the rear seats.
▶ Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or front-passenger seat forwards.
▶ Vehicles with memory function: when one or both parts of the rear seat backrest are forced forwards, the respective front seat moves forwards slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact.
When the engine is running, the driver's seat does not move forward.
text_image
gaga es: 1 P91.12-3750-31The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the luggage compartment capacity.
▶ Pull the left-hand or right-hand release handle at the rear in load compartment ①.
The corresponding backrest folds forwards.
▶ Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.
Folding back the seat backrest
-! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged.
natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle showing a car with two blue directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)▶ Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary.
▶ Fold seat backrest ① back until it engages.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster. A warninglm
tone also sounds.
▶ Adjust the head restraint if necessary (▷ page 100).
▶ Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.
Securing a load
Lashing eyelets
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
- Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 266).
- Secure the load using the lashing eyelets.
- Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly.
- Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure load. These are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads.
- Do not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners.
- Pad sharp edges for protection.
natural_image
Top-down view of a mechanical component with a central circular feature and numbered label (1), no readable text or symbols beyond the number.Lashing eyelets ①
dLuggage compartment cover
Important safety notes
WARNING
On its own, the luggage compartment cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the luggage compartment cover.
When loading the vehicle, make sure that you do not stack the load in the luggage compartment higher than the lower edge of the side windows. Do not place heavy objects on top of the luggage compartment cover.
The load compartment cover is lashed down behind the rear bench seat backrest.
Extending and retracting the luggage compartment cover
text_image
① ② P68.00-7395-31▶ To extend: pull luggage compartment cover ① towards you by grab handle ② until it engages.
▶ To retract: push the rear edge of luggage compartment cover ① downward.
Luggage compartment cover ① automatically moves forward.
Fitting/removing the luggage compartment cover
text_image
1 2 2 3 P68.00-7396-31▶ To remove: make sure that the luggage partment cover is rolled up.
▶ Push in the end cap of luggage compartment cover ① in the direction of the arrow on right or left-hand side using grip ③.
▶ Push luggage compartment cover ① into opposite anchorage ②.
▶ Remove luggage compartment cover ① upwards.
▶ To install: place luggage compartment cover ① into anchorage ② on the right-left-hand side.
▶ Push in the opposite end cap of luggage partment cover ① in the direction of the
arrow and insert luggage compartment cover ① into opposite anchorage ②.
Removing or refitting the sightproofing plate
There is a sightproofing plate on the tailgate that can be removed or refitted for better loading and unloading.
text_image
① ① ② P68.00-7397-31▶ To remove: simultaneously press buttons and pull out sightproofing plate ② in the direction of the arrow.
To refit: insert sightproofing plate ② and push it against the direction of arrow, until it engages.
Safety net
Important safety notes
WARNING
On its own, the safety net cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured road during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. The Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the safety net.
It is important to use a safety net if you load the vehicle with small objects above the seat backrests. For safety reasons, always use a safety net when transporting a load.
Damaged safety nets can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The safety net is located in the stowage space under the luggage compartment floor (▷ page 273).
▶ Unroll and unfold the safety net. The joints on the upper and lower guide rod should engage audibly.
The corresponding lashing eyelets for tightening the safety net are in the luggage compartment behind the rear bench seat (▷ page 270).
Coat hooks on the tailgate
text_image
ce od ing nt P68.05-7391-31Attaching and tightening the safety
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P68.50-2613-31▶ To attach and tighten: insert guide rod into bracket ②.
▶ Attach retaining spring hooks ③ to the lash-gage compartment)
ing eyelet or bracket (vehicles with EASY-
PACK load-securing kit (▶ page 272)) and pulhserting the brackets into the loading down on the loose end of the lashing strap until the safety net is taut.
▶ After driving a short distance, check the tension of the safety net and retighten it if necessary.
▶ To loosen and detach: pull belt clamp ④ to reduce the tension in the lashing strap.
▶ Detach retaining spring hooks ③ from the lashing eyelet or bracket (vehicles with EASY-PACK load-securing kit (▷ page 272)).
▶ Detach guide rod ① from bracket ②.
▶ To stow: press the red button on the upper and lower guide rod.
▶ Fold the safety net and roll it up.
▶ Stow the safety net in the stowage space under the luggage compartment floor.
net Coat hook
EASY-PACK load-securing kit
Components and storage
The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to use your luggage compartment for a variety of purposes. The following accessories are located under the luggage compartment floor:
- telescopic rod (on the underside of the luggage compartment floor)
- bag containing the brackets and luggage
①holder (below the luggage compartment floor or in one of the side stowage nets in the lug-gage compartment)
Unserting the brackets into the loading Prail
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 up P68.00-7398-31▶ Insert bracket ① into the centre of loading rail ④.
▶ Press release button ② and push bracket ① into the desired position in loading rail ④.
▶ Let go of release button ②.
▶ Press locking button ③.
Bracket ① is locked in loading rail ④.
▶ If necessary, fold lashing eyelet ⑤ upwards
Luggage holder
! Only use the luggage holder to secure loa with a maximum weight of 7 kg and with dimensions that allow the loads to be safel and securely retained by the luggage holder
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑤ P68.00-7399-31Telescopic rod
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P68.00-7400-31The telescopic rod can be used to secure the load against the rear seats to prevent it from moving around.
▶ To install: insert one bracket ② into both the left and the right loading rails and slide it to the desired position (▷ page 272).
▶ Insert telescopic rod ① into brackets ② end, while doing so, press release button ④ and push the rod downwards until it engages.
The luggage holder can be used to secure light loads against the side wall of the luggage compartment to prevent them from moving around.
▶ To install: insert two brackets ⑤ into the I or right loading rail (▷ page 272).
▶ Press release button ① of the luggage holde and pull the strap out slightly.
▶ Insert luggage holder ② into brackets ⑤ and, while doing so, press release button ③ and push the luggage holder downwards until it engages.
▶ Press release button ① of the luggage holder and pull the strap out in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Place the load between the strap and the lug gage compartment side wall.
▶ Using one hand, press locking button ① of the luggage holder.
▶ With your other hand, let the strap go slowly until the load is secured.
▶ Make sure that locking button ④ on bracket ⑤ is pressed. This keeps brackets ⑤ in place on the loadi rail.
▶ To remove: press release button ③ on respective bracket ⑤ and remove luggage holder ② by pulling upwards and out.
Make sure that locking button ③ on brackets ② is pressed.
This keeps brackets ② in place on the loading off.
To remove: press release button ④ on irrespective bracket ② and remove telescopic rod ① by pulling it upwards and out.
Stowage space under the luggage compartment floor
e! WARNING
If you drive when the luggage compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly
changing directions.
Always close the luggage compartment floor before a journey.
text_image
① P68 00-7401-31EASY-PACK load-securing kit, TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located underneath the I gage compartment floor.
▶ To open: open the tailgate.
▶ Press handle ① on the ribbing downward. Handle ① folds upward.
▶ Swing the luggage compartment floor up using handle ① until it stands vertically.
▶ To close:fold the luggage compartment floor down.
▶ Using handle ①, press the luggage compartment floor down until it engages.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
WARNING
When a load is transported on the roof, the vehicle's centre of gravity rises and the handling changes. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the handling as well as steering a braking characteristics are severely affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the maximum roof load and adapt your driving style.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.
Make sure that, depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can raise the sliding sunroof fully and open the boot lid or tailgate fully when the roof carrier is fitted.
! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them.
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section (▷ page 342).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier
text_image
Diagram showing car air intake with labeled components and a magnified inset highlighting airflow direction▶ Open covers ① carefully in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers ①.
▶ Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.
Features
an Cup holders
Important safety notes
Except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
WARNING
The cup holder cannot secure a drinks container in place during a journey. If you use a cup holder during a journey, the drinks container could be flung around and liquid could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could come into contact with the liquid and, in particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You could be distracted from the traffic situation and lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only place containers of a suitable size in the cup holder. Seal the container, in particular when it contains hot liquid.
! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill.
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of can remove the rubber mat of the cup an accident. There is a risk of injury, particuholder in the direction of the arrow in order larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. changes of direction.
• Always stow objects in such a way that the cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations.
• Always make sure that objects do not project from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
- Ensure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey.
- Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or outsize objects in the load compartment.
! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the centre console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the centre console can otherwise be damaged by the concentrated and reflected sunlight.
Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 266).
text_image
Car dashboard control panel with numbered annotations highlighting key components and a blue arrow indicating directionMercedes-AMG vehicles
① Cup holders
② Cover
▶ To open: slide cover ② to its foremost position.
text_image
Car interior panel with numbered annotations indicating directional flow and status indicatorsAll other models
You can remove the cup holder insert to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only.
▶ To open: press the front of cover ②.
▶ To remove the insert: slide catch ① inwards on both sides in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Remove cup holder insert ③ upwards.
▶ To refit the insert: place the insert in the stowage compartment.
▶ Slide catch ① outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
! Do not sit on or support your body weight the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged.
text_image
① ② P68.00-7457-31▶ Fold down the rear seat armrest.
▶ To open: lift the cover of the rear seat arm-rest.
▶ Press release catch ①.
Cup holder ② folds out forwards.
▶ Fold the cover of the rear seat armrest back down again if necessary.
▶ To close: lift the cover of the rear seat arm-rest.
Swing cup holder ② back until it engages.
• Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations.
- Always make sure that objects do not project from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
- Ensure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey.
- Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or outsize objects in the load compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 266).
! Make sure that any bottles weighing more than 0.5 kg that are stored in the bottle holder rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle holder could otherwise be damaged.
text_image
rm- ck arm- P68.00-7378-31Bottle holders
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction.
▶ Press the outer edge of button ① and slide in the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits into the opening.
▶ Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.
The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a capacity of 0.7 l to 1.5 l.
The bottle holder does not secure bottles; it merely prevents them from tipping over.
Sun visors
Overview
text_image
Car interior panel with numbered annotations indicating navigation and airflow direction① Mirror light
② Retainer
③ Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
④ Vanity mirror
⑤ Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
text_image
Diagram of car interior with numbered components and a blue directional arrow indicating clockwise motionMirror light ① only functions if the sun visor clipped into retainer ② and mirror cover ⑤ been folded up.
Glare from the side
text_image
① ② P68.60-2411-31▶ Fold down sun visor ①.
▶ Pull sun visor ① out of retainer ②.
▶ Swing sun visor ① to the side.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged.
text_image
① ② P68.00-7380-31Mercedes-AMG vehicles
▶ To open: briefly press the trim on cover. The stowage compartment opens.
▶ To remove the insert: slide insert ② towards in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Remove insert ②.
▶ To refit the insert: place the insert into the holder and press it in the opposite direction of the arrow until it engages.
▶ Is To close: fold down cover ①.
text_image
Diagram of car air intake system with numbered components and directional arrows indicating airflow or movementAll other models
▶ To open: slide cover ① forwards until it engages.
▶ To remove the insert: hold insert ③ b ribbing at the sides and lift it up ② and
▶ To refit the insert: press insert ③ into holder until it engages.
▶ To close: briefly press cover ① at the front. The cover retracts.
You can remove the ashtray insert and use resulting compartment as stowage space.
Rear compartment ashtray
text_image
① ② ③ P68.00-7402-31▶ To open: briefly press the top of cover The ashtray opens.
▶ To remove the insert: press release b ③ and lift the insert up and out.
▶ To fit the insert: fit insert ① into the from above and press down into the hole until it engages.
Cigarette lighter
Important safety notes
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite
• the hot cigarette lighter falls
- a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
our attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit.
Cigarette lighter in the front compartment
text_image
Car dashboard control panel with labeled parts and a magnified inset showing component 2Mercedes-AMG vehicles
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
②. To open: briefly press the trim on cover ①. The stowage compartment opens.
onPress in cigarette lighter ②. Cigarette lighter ② will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.
text_image
Car interior panel with numbered annotations and a blue arrow pointing to a component, likely indicating a location or movement.All other models
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ To open: slide cover ① forwards until it engages.
▶ Press in cigarette lighter ②.
Cigarette lighter ② will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.
▶ To close: briefly press cover ① at the front. The cover retracts.
12 V sockets
General notes
▶ Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition (▷ page 133).
text_image
Car infotainment panel with numbered labels and a blue arrow pointing to a component, showing status indicators and control buttons.All other models
The sockets can be used for accessories with▶aTo open: slide cover ① forwards until it maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories engages.
include such items as mobile phone chargers.
Lift up the cover of socket ②.
If you use the sockets for long periods when engine is switched off, the battery may discharge.
To close: briefly press cover ① at the front. The cover retracts.
An emergency cut-off ensures that the on-boat voltage does not drop too low. If the on-boat voltage is too low, the power to the sockets automatically cut. This ensures that sufficient power is available for starting the engine.
Socket in the rear compartment centre console
Socket in the front centre console
text_image
12 V MAX 15 A ① ② P68.00-7384-31Mercedes-AMG vehicles
▶ To open: briefly press the trim on cover The stowage compartment opens.
▶ Lift up the cover of socket ②.
▶ To close: fold down cover ①.
text_image
① ② P82.00-2988-31▶ Briefly press cover ② at the top. The cover opens.
▶ Lift up the cover of socket ①.
Socket in the luggage compartment
text_image
①. 12 V MAX.15 A P82.00-2989-31▶ Lift up the cover of socket ①.
Use this device only when the vehicle is stationary.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-tem
Information on these requirements can be in the digital Owner's Manual.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communications equipment in the vehicle.
text_image
① ② P82.95-3063-31If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so if the traffic situation permits. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields.
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures:
▶ To open: press cover ①.
▶ To make an emergency call: press SOS optimal mobile phone reception quality in the ton ② briefly. vehicle
The indicator lamp in SOS button ② flashes that mutual interference between the vehicle until the emergency call is concluded. electronics and mobile phones is minimised
▶ Wait for a voice connection to the MercedesAn exterior aerial has the following advantages: Benz emergency call centre.
▶ After the emergency call, close cover ①. You will see a message if:
- a connection to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre cannot be made
- a call has not been automatically forward to the public emergency call centre
In this case, dial the 112 emergency number on your mobile phone.
- it conducts the electromagnetic fields generated by a wireless device to the exterior
- the field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial
Information on retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) (▷ page 334).
General notes
You can find more information on the Mercedes. There are various mobile phone brackets that Benz emergency call system in the digital Own may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, er's Manual. these are country-specific.
there are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific.
More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with the multi-media system can be obtained:
Mobile phone
Important safety notes
WARNING
Operating mobile communications equipment while driving distracts you from paying attention to traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
- at your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre - on the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider.
Using a mobile phone
To connect a mobile phone to the exterior and charge it, insert it into the mobile phone, bracket.
▶ Open the telephone compartment (▷ page 268).
▶ Place the mobile phone bracket into the preengine while programming.
installed fitting; see the separate installation The garage door opener is available only for cer-instructions for the mobile phone fitting. tain countries. Observe the legal requirements
▶ Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone each individual country.
When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
reengine while programming.
The garage door opener is available only for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements
fore each individual country.
bracket; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting.
Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.
^c The HomeLink ^® garage door opener is compatible with most European garage and gate opener drives. More information on HomeLink and/or compatible products is available:
The mobile phone can also be operated without being in the bracket. However, the charging function and aerial function are no available.
To use Bluetooth® (SAP profile) on your telephone module, you must first insert the telephone module into the pre-installed fitting. This connects it to the exterior aerial. If you wish charge the mobile phone, you must connect in a USB port.
Further information on the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) can be found in Digital Owner's Manual.
Operating the mobile phone
You can operate the phone using the 📞 buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (▷ page 212).
When you remove the key from the ignition I, the mobile phone is disconnected from the vehicle. You can then no longer make calls using hands-free system.
If a call is active and you remove the key from the ignition lock, the conversation is transferred to the mobile phone. You can then continue to be a conversation on the mobile phone.
• at a qualified specialist workshop
- via the HomeLin® Hotline (0) 08000 466 354 65 or alternatively +49 (0) 6838 907-277
his on the Internet at http://www.homelink.com to
important safety notes
WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury.
g When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink ^® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate to three different door and gate systems.
Programming
Programming buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (▷ page 281).
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑥ ⑤Garage door drive remote control ⑤ is not included with the integrated garage door opener.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition (▷ page 133).
▶ Select one of buttons ② to ④ to control garage door drive.
▶ To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ② to ④ on the integer garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp ① begins to light up yellow.
Indicator lamp ① lights up yellow immediately the first time button ②, ③ or ④ is grammed. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp ① lights up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
▶ Release button ②, ③ or ④. Indicator lamp ① flashes yellow.
▶ To program the remote control: point remote control ⑤ towards buttons ② to ① on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 520 cm.
▶ Press and hold button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ until indicator lamp ① lights up green. When indicator lamp ① lights up green: programming is finished.
When indicator lamp ① flashes green: programming was successful. The rolling code must be synchronised (▷ page 282).
▶ Release button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ of garage door drive.
If indicator lamp ① lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control ⑤ and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote control ⑤ and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts may be required. You should test every setting position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
Synchronising the rolling code
Observe the "Important safety notes" (▷ page 281).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronise the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this, you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be placed at different locations depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
Familiarise yourself with the garage door drive the operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within range of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Get out of the vehicle.
▶ Press the programming button on the door drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step.
▶ Get into the vehicle.
Press previously programmed button ②, ③ to or ④ on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly until the door closes.
ol Rolling code synchronisation is then complete.
Problems when programming
If you have problems when programming the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, please note the following:
the Check the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control ⑤ and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of remote control ⑤ for the garage door drive.
Replace the batteries in garage door drive remote control ⑤. This increases the likelihood that garage door drive remote control
⑤ will transmit a strong and precise signal▶turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock the integrated garage door opener. (▷ page 133).
- When programming, hold remote control ⑤ at varying distances and angles from buttons ② to ④, which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 5:20 cm or at the same angle but at varying distances.
- Press and hold buttons ② and ④. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green.
and Release buttons ② and ④. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
- If another remote control ⑤ is available for the same garage door drive, perform the programming steps again using this remote control ⑤. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been fitted in garage door drive remote control ⑤.
Frequencies
- Note that some remote controls transmit on for a limited period (the indicator lamp on remote control goes out). Press button ⑥ or remote control ⑤ again before transmission ends. - Align the aerial cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission.
Opening or closing the garage door
Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition I (▷ page 133).
▶ Press button ②, ③ or ④ which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp ① lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp ① flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal for as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp ① lights up yellow.
▶ Press button ②, ③ or ④ again if necessary
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling a vehicle.
| Country Radio type approval num-ly the on | berFrequency range (MHz) |
| AD (Andorra) | 20 July 2005MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 |
| AT (Austria) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| BE (Belgium) and | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| BG (Bulgaria) lock | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 12 April 07MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| CH (Switzerland) di- | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 2 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| CY (Cyprus) s-onds | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 5 May 0 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| CZ (Czech Republic) | General Licence GL-30/R/2000 Reg No. 844 13 May MHz: 27, 40, 433 |
| DK (Den-mark) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 20 April 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| Country Radio type approval numberFrequency range (MHz) | |
| DE (Germany) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 751930129 April 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| EE (Estonia) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| ES (Spain) | 000438/2005,000439/2005,000440/2005000441/2005,000445/2005,000446/2005000447/2005MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| FI (Finland) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| FR (France) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 |
| GI (Gibraltar) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 (UK)MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 |
| GR (Greece) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| HR (Croatia) | SDR 224/06MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| HU (Hungary) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| Country Radio type approval numberFrequency range (MHz) | |
| IC (Canary Islands) | 000438/2005,000439/2005000440/2005,000441/2005000445/2005,000446/2005000447/2005, 3 June 2005MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| IE (Ireland) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| IS (Iceland) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| IT (Italy) DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15347DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15348DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15350DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15357DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15358DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15359MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| LI (Liechtenstein) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 2May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| LT (Lithuania) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| LU (Luxembourg) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE150405/9538 24 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| LV (Latvia) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 26 April 06MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| MC (Monaco) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 1May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| MT (Malta) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| NL (Netherlands) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| NO (Norway) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18 May 0MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| PL (Poland) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 21 April 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| PT (Portugal) ANCOM-S08399/05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| RO (Romania) Article 6.4 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTEMHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 | |
| RU (Russian Federation) POCC DE.MJ05.H00015 13May 05MHz: 433 | |
| SE (Sweden) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| SI (Slovenia) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE500-1/2005-437 9 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| Country Radio type approval numberFrequency range (MHz) | |
| SK (Slovakia) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTESlovak206/11/2005 4 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| UK (United Kingdom) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 |
Africa
| Country Radio type approval numberFrequency range (MHz) | |
| EG (Egypt) W-KLE-17/08 Mar. 06MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433868 | |
| RE (Réunion) Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 JulyMHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 | |
| ZA (South Africa) | 11 October 2005MHz: 27, 40, 433 |
America
| Country Radio type approval numberFrequency range (MHz) | |
| BB (Barba-dos) | Registration not requiredMHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 |
| CL (Chile) | 38447/F-23 No.3.3634MHz: 40, 4333943/DFRS05165/F-50MHz: 280 to 433 |
| GF (French Guyana) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 1May 05MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 |
| GP (Guadeloupe) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 1May 05MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 |
| MQ (Martini-que) | Article 6 of Directive1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July 05MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 |
| MX (Mexico) | MHz: 280 to 390 |
Asia
| Country Radio type approval numberFrequency range (MHz) | |
| AE (United Arab Emi-rates) | 1623/5/10-2/26/76MHz: 433 |
| JO (Jordan) TRC/LPD/2005/23MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 | |
| KW (Kuwait) 5 October 2005MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 | |
| SA (Saudi Arabia) | 11_02_05/5024-5-6MHz: 418, 433 |
| SY (Syria) 279/4/14 / 05 March 06 | |
| TR (Turkey) National Certification 23 July 07MHz: 433 | |
Australia
| Country Radio type approval numberFrequency range (MHz) | |
| AU (Australia) | 28 June 2005MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 |
| NZ (New Zealand) | 20 March 06MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433 |
Floormats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the oper-
ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another.
text_image
① ① ② P68.00-7385-31▶ Slide the relevant seat back.
▶ To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell.
▶ Press studs ① onto retainers ②.
▶ To remove: pull the floormat away from retainers ②.
▶ Remove the floormat.
Retrofitted anti-glare film
Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. You can obtain information about anti-glare film from a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine compartment
Bonnet
Important safety notes
WARNING
An unlocked bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. The is a risk of an accident.
Never unlock the bonnet when driving. Before every trip, ensure that the bonnet is locked.
- remove jewellery and watches
- keep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts.
WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. If you touch the live components, you could receive an electric shock. There is a danger of injury.
Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.
WARNING
When being opened and closed, the bonnet may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons in the of movement of the bonnet.
Open and close the bonnet only when nobo is in the range of movement.
Opens the bonnet
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment.
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following.
WARNING
If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury.
Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade.
WARNING
When the bonnet is open, and the windscrew wipers are set in motion, you can be injured the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet.
WARNING
There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment:
- switch off the ignition
- never touch the dangerous areas surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan
! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted telephone handset and control panel (no text or symbols visible)▶ Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off.
▶ Pull release lever ① on the bonnet. The bonnet is released.
natural_image
Front view of a Mercedes-Benz sedan with a blue arrow indicating the engine shift (no text or symbols on the car body)▶ Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle ② up and lift the bonnet.
If you lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm the bonnet is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the bonnet
▶ Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm.
▶ Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is no properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.
Radiator
Do not cover up the radiator. Do not use ther mats, insect protection covers or anything similar. Doing so can cause the on-board diagnostics system to display inaccurate values. Some of these values are required by law and must always be correct.
Engine oil
Important safety notes
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment.
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following.
WARNING
There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment:
- switch off the ignition
- never touch the dangerous areas surround- ^m ,ing moving components, e.g. the rotation ^t -area of the fan
- remove jewellery and watches
- keep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts.
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the components
that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine.
WARNING
If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury.
Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade.
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently dr at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may installed at different locations.
To check the oil level:
- park the vehicle on a level surface
- the engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal, operating temperature
- if the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement
Checking the oil level using the oil stick
text_image
Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and a magnified inset showing internal components.Example
▶ Pull oil dipstick ① out of the oil dipstick
▶ Wipe off oil dipstick ①.
▶ Slowly slide oil dipstick ① into the guide to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark ③ and mark ②, the oil level is correct.
▶ If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil.
Topping up engine oil
Environmental note
When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.
! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with a service system. A list of the engine oils and oil filters that have been tested and approved in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service drive Products is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
be The following cause engine failure or damage to the exhaust system:
- Use of engine oils and oil filters that have not been expressly approved for the service system
• Replacement of engine oil and oil filter after the replacement interval specified by the service system has expired
• Use of engine oil additives
! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off.
text_image
Mercedes-Benz Oil recommendation ① P01.00-3507-31Example
▶ Turn cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.
tubop up the engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on tube the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil.
▶ Replace cap ① on the filler neck and turn MAXlockwise.
Make sure that the cap locks securely into place.
▶ Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (▷ page 289).
Further information on engine oil (▷ page 340).
Other service products
Important safety notes
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment.
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following.
WARNING
There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment:
- switch off the ignition
- never touch the dangerous areas surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan
- remove jewellery and watches
- keep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts.
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurised, particularly when the engine is warm. If you open cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Open the cap slowly to release the pressure.
WARNING
If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury.
Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade.
Checking the coolant level
text_image
Diagram of car engine components with numbered parts and a magnified view of the internal structureExample
▶ Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Check the coolant level only if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
or
▶ On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (▷ page 133).
▶ Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below 70 °C.
▶ Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
the
▶ Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO (▷ page 133).
▶ Slowly turn cap ① half a turn anti-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape.
▶ Turn cap ① further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar ③ in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ②. If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm above marker bar ③ in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ②.
▶ If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Ber
▶ Replace cap ① and turn it clockwise as fa it will go.
Further information on coolant (▷ page 341).
Topping up the windscreen washer tem/headlamp cleaning system
WARNING
If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine of the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the neck.
natural_image
Close-up of a car engine bay with a magnified circular detail highlighting a component (no text or symbols visible)Example
▶ To open: pull cap ① upwards by the tab
▶ Top up with the premixed washer fluid.
▶ To close: press cap ① onto the filler need until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 litre, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to top up the washer fluid (▷ page 246).
Further information on washer fluid (▷ page 342).
Service
rASSYST PLUS
Service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Service Booklet).
You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (▷ page 289).
The multifunction display shows a service mes- file for a few seconds, e.g.:
• Service A in .. days
• Service A due
• Service A overdue by .. days
Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed.
The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter.
Only for certain countries: the position after the letter A or B indicates any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed. If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of this display, you will receive a statement on the associated costs.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected.
om Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule:
▶ Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery.
or
▶ After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.
Hiding service messages
▶ Press the OK or ← wheel.
button on the steer
Displaying service messages
▶ Switch the ignition on.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the ste wheel to select the Serv. menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the OK button.
The service due date appears in the multifunction display.
Information about service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service int val display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist work- shop.
Have service work carried out as described of the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.
Special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for example:
- regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
- if the vehicle is primarily used to travel shop distances
- for frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces
- if the engine is often left idling for long pe
In these or similar operating conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
AdBlue® service display
For BlueTEC vehicles only.
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas after-treatment must be operated with the reducing agent AdBlue®. AdBlue® is topped up as part of the service. Under normal operating conditions, a full tank of AdBlue® should last until the next
service due date.
Depending on how and where the vehicle is used, there may be an increase in the A®Blue consumption, resulting in the next service due date being brought forward.
Certain display messages show that AdBlue must be topped up, e.g.:
Refill AdBlue at workshop See Owner's Manual Manual
A warning signal also sounds.
You can no longer start the vehicle when the AdBlue ^® supply has been used up (▷ page 234).
! Have the AdBlu® tank topped up at a qualified specialist workshop only. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged or soiled.
Before driving your vehicle outside Europe, have the AdBlue ^® supply checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If necessary, have AdBlue ^® topped up. Before a prolonged stay outside of Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the notes on AdBlue ^® (page 339).
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and AdBlue® can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Care
General notes
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any the following:
- dry, rough or hard cloths
- abrasive cleaning agents
- solvents
- cleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.
! Do not park up your vehicle for a long period of time immediately after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You should therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked up for a long period of time.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning paintwork
Automatic car wash
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident.
After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions in order to restore full braking efficiency.
! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations:
- when towing away
- in a car wash
! Make sure:
- the side windows and sliding sunroof are closed completely.
- the blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off (OFF button is depressed).
- the windscreen wiper switch is at position 0
- the 360^ camera or reversing camera is switched off.
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
! In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission period in transmission position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.
- Vehicles with a key: do not remove the key from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N beforehand.
- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N:
▶ Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
Use the key instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake.
▶ Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start.
Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off the wax from the windscreen and the windscreen wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements for each individual country.
▶ Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
▶ Use a soft sponge to clean.
▶ Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
▶ Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a tle jet of water.
▶ Do not point the water jet directly towards air inlet.
▶ Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.
▶ Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois.
▶ Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the work.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible.
High-pressure cleaning equipment
WARNING
The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam-
aged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
- tyres
- battery
- plug connectors
- lamps
- seals
- trim elements
- ventilation slots
• door gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.
• electrical components
Damage to seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures.
Cleaning the paintwork
! Do not affix:
stickers
- films
- magnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
▶ Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
▶ Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
▶ Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
▶ Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Care and treatment of matt paintwork
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny.
! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect:
• vigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials
- frequent use of car washes
- washing the vehicle in direct sunlight
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products CI are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
use on vehicles with matt paintwork leads considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spotted areas.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out a qualified specialist workshop.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clean matt finish. This will help you to avoid damage the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels with a clear matt finish.
The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
WARNING
The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced v immediately.
Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park up your vehicle for a long period of time immediately after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You should therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be
parked up for a long period of time.
Cleaning the windows
WARNING
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is danger of injury.
*Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen ar Wiper blades.
Do not use dry cloths, abrasive cleaning agents, solvents or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the inside of the windows; windscreen. Do not touch the inside of the windows/windscreen with hard items such as an ice scraper or a ring. Otherwise, the
fromwindows/windscreen could be damaged.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components.
- Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is nd-recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the wiper blades
WARNING
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly.
▶ Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-screen.
▶ Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth.
▶ Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition.
about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
text_image
e do oh- ①
natural_image
Front view of a car's back panel with a highlighted blue outline and numbered marker (1), no readable text or symbols beyond the label.▶ Clean sensors ① of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloth that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting.
▶ Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the mirror turn signal
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.
▶ Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn nals in the exterior mirror housing using a sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a high-pressure cleaner become very hot. If you come into contact cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information
Cleaning the reversing camera and 360° camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera or 360° camera with a high-pressure cleaner.
text_image
t- g ns ole e 1 P54.65-5240-31Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean wet camera lens ①.
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn the yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them.
You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as sanitary cleanser or wheel cleaner.
Impurities combined with the effects of road g and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing.
▶ Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
Environmental note
Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner.
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents.
! Please note the care instructions in the trailer coupling manufacturer's operating instructions.
natural_image
Front view of a silver sedan car with a visible exhaust pipe and numbered component (no text or symbols on the body)The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded.
▶ Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush.
▶ Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or brush.
▶ After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling ①.
▶ Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
• alcohol-based thinner or petrol
• abrasive cleaning agents
• commercially-available household cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.
▶ Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down.
- Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfibre cloth and TFT/LCR display cleaner.
▶ Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre h-cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of injury.
Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:
- stickers
- films
• scented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic.
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.
▶ Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.
▶ Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and selector lever
▶ Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions:
- Clean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth.
- Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked.
- Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.
Seat covers from other materials
Cleaning wood trim and trim element
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.
▶ Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.
▶ Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Do not use a microfibre cloth to clean cover made out of real leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA. If used frequently, this can damage the cover.
Note that regular care is essential to make sure that the appearance and comfort of the covers are retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
It has natural surface properties, e.g.:
- unevenness in structure
• marks caused by growth and injury - subtle colour differences
These are characteristics of leather and not material faults.
Observe the following when cleaning:
- clean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).
- clean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there.
- Clean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
WARNING
Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Never bleach or colour seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 °C or in direct sunlight.
▶ Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the roof lining and carpets
▶ Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo.
▶ Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the designo wooden luggage compartment floor
! For cleaning and treating the wooden luggage compartment floor, do not use any of the following:
- microfibre cloth
• household cleaning agents
• commercially available furniture polishes, sprays or similar items - steam cleaners
Otherwise, the surface of the wooden luggage compartment floor will be damaged.
! Do not apply self-adhesive films or masking strips to the wooden luggage compartment floor; the solvent residue and plasticisers contained in them may destroy the paintwork.
Use a lint-free cotton cloth to remove dust, dirt and fingerprints. If necessary, dampen the lint-free cotton cloth with a small amount of clear water.
Use wood oil recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz to treat and protect the wooden luggage compartment floor. This revitalises the wooden surface and increases the resilience of the wood.
To apply the wood oil:
▶ Using the sanding pad that comes with the care set, sand the wooden surface in the direction of the grain.
▶ Remove the wood dust.
▶ With a lint-free cotton cloth, distribute a thin layer of wood oil evenly over the wooden surface using a simple wiping motion. Always wipe in the direction of the grain.
▶ Then, using a second lint-free cotton cloth, apply the remaining wood oil.
A new protective coating forms within approximately four hours.
A second treatment with the wood oil is recommended for extremely worn wooden luggage compartment floor surfaces.
Where will I find...?
Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with labeled part (1) and grid pattern, no readable text or symbols beyond the number and date.▶ Open the tailgate.
▶ Open the right-hand side trim panel.
▶ Remove warning triangle ①.
Setting up the warning triangle
text_image
① ② ③ P58.00-2150-31▶ Fold legs ③ out to the side.
▶ Fold side reflectors ② upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using press stud ①.
First-aid kit
natural_image
Top-down view of a car interior showing the backrest grille and control panel, with a magnified inset highlighting a numbered component (no readable text or symbols)
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing battery charging mechanism with magnified inset (no text or symbols visible)Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the first-aid kit is in the stowage net or behind the side trim panel.
▶ Open the tailgate.
▶ Open the left-hand side trim panel if the first-aid kit is located there.
▶ Remove first-aid kit ①.
Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing items.
Fire extinguisher
! Keep the stowage compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion. It may otherwise be damaged.
The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment underneath the driver's seat.
text_image
① ② P68.00-7364-31▶ Pull handle ① upward and fold cover ② forward.
▶ Remove the fire extinguisher from the stow age compartment.
Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each and checked every one or two years. It may erwise fail in an emergency.
Observe the legal requirements for each individual country.
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor (▶ page 273). Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle tool kit is on the left-hand side or the right-hand side- rowing eye the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor.
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with tyre-changing tools. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tyre-changing tools may include, for example:
- jack
- wheel chock
- wheel wrench
i The jack weighs approximately 2.1 kg.
The maximum load-bearing capacity of the jack can be found on the adhesive label on the jack.
The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
text_image
① ② ③ P68.00-7405-31① Vehicle tool kit tray
② Stowage tray
use ③ "Minispare" emergency spare wheel oth-
▶ Open the tailgate.
▶ Lift the luggage compartment floor upwards (▷ page 273).
The vehicle tool kit contains:
- folding wheel chock
- fuse allocation chart
- jack
- centring pin
• one pair of gloves
•wheel wrench
- itowing eye
Example: equipment and country-specific variations possible.
Vehicles with a TREFIT kit
text_image
ools your o. r ① ② ③ ④ P58.10-2341-31① Towing eye
② Tyre sealant filler bottle
③ Tyre inflation compressor
④ Fuse allocation chart
▶ Open the tailgate.
▶ Lift the luggage compartment floor upwards (▷ page 273).
Example: equipment and country-specific variations possible.
The tyre inflation compressor weighs approximately 1.2 kg.
The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with collapsible emergency spare wheel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ P58.00-2154-31① Towing eye
② One pair of gloves
③ Jack
④ Folding wheel chock
⑤ Centring pin
⑥ Sheet for faulty wheel
⑦ Tyre inflation compressor
⑧ Wheel wrench
⑨ Fuse allocation chart
▶ Open the tailgate.
▶ Lift the luggage compartment floor upwards (▷ page 273).
Example: equipment and country-specific variations possible.
Vehicles with light-alloy wheels and hub caps
On vehicles with light-alloy wheels and hub caps, a socket is also provided.
Flat tyre
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
- MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) (▷ page 303)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres.
a TREFIT kit (▷ page 301)
- an emergency spare wheel (certain countries only) (▷ page 331)
Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on changing and fitting a wheel (▷ page 325).
▶ Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).
▶ If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.
▶ Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "normal" level is selected (▷ page 171).
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
▶ Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the key having been removed.
▶ Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they get out of the vehicle. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier.
▶ Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so.
▶ Close the driver's door.
▶ Place the warning triangle a suitable distance away (▷ page 300). Observe legal requirements.
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-fl characteristics)
General notes
With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in or more tyres. The affected tyre must not show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking that appears on the tyre wall. You will find this marking next to the ty size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index.
MOExtended tyres may be used only in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warm system or tyre pressure monitor.
If a pressure loss warning message appears on the multifunction display:
- observe the instructions in the display messages (▷ page 241)
- check the tyre for damage
- if driving on, observe the following notes
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode approximately 80 km when the vehicle is partly laden and approximately 30 km when the vehicle is fully laden.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon:
- vehicle speed
- road condition
- outside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions manoeuvres, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode counted from the moment the tyre pressure warning appears on the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h.
When replacing one or all tyres, observe the lowing specifications for your vehicle's tyres:
- size
- the type and
• the "MOExtended" mark
If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure
that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tyre).
Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip
your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winner-tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a new qualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of accident.
ears not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot-holes, off-road). This applies in particular to laden vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if: is
• you hear banging noises.
• the vehicle starts to shake.
- you see smoke and smell rubber.
- ESP ^ is intervening constantly.
- there are tears in the sidewalls of the type. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The faulty tyre must be replaced.
TIFREFIT kit
OSS
Important safety notes
TREFIT is a tyre sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to -20 °C.
WARNING
In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre proper
- there are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above.
• the wheel rim is damaged. - you have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following:
- Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water.
- If the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water.
- If tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant.
- If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the tyre sealant bottle with filler hose in the plastic bag which is contained the TREFIT kit.
Environmental note
Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Do not operate the tyre inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor.
Using the TREFIT kit
▶ Do not remove any foreign objects that have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails.
▶ Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space underneath the luggage compartment floor (▷ page 301).
text_image
max.80 km/h max.50 mph Replace tyre without delay TIREFF! Replaces unseated retraction Replaces unseated retraction Replaces unseated retraction Replaces unseated retraction Replaces unseated retractionP40.10-6339-31
▶ Affix part ① of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
▶ Affix part ② of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
text_image
t of ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P40.10-6340-31▶ Pull plug ④ with cable and hose ⑤ out off theu get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it tyre inflation compressor housing. cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy-
▶ Screw hose ⑤ onto flange ⑥ of tyre sealant bottle ①.
▶ Place tyre sealant bottle ① head downwards Tyre pressure not reached
into recess ② of the tyre inflation compres- sor.
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has no been attained after five minutes:
text_image
7 8 P40.10-6635-31▶ Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
▶ Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre.
Tyre sealant may leak out when the filler hose is unscrewed.
▶ Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m.
▶ Pump up the tyre again.
After a maximum of five minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
▶ Remove the cap from valve ⑦ on the faulty tyre.
▶ Screw filler hose ⑧ onto valve ⑦.
▶ Insert plug ③ into the cigarette lighter sock (▷ page 278) or into another 12 V socket in your vehicle (▷ page 279)
▶ Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lo (▷ page 133).
▶ Press on and off switch ③ on the tyre infla compressor to position I.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated.
WARNING
If the required tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too bad yet damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a wire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
The tyre pressure reached
First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tyre inflation pressor during this phase.
WARNING
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
▶ Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
hasaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed prethe specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant.
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tyre pressure reached" (▷ page 305).
If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tyre pressure not reached" (▷ page 305).
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clear that the TREFIT sticker must be affixed to the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preinstrument cluster where it will be easily seen by erable to use clean water. the driver.
If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 ps) been attained after five minutes:
▶ Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
▶ Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre.
Tyre sealant may leak out when the filler is unscrewed.
▶ Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle.
▶ Pull away immediately.
▶ Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with tyre inflation compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
WARNING
If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too
badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can signif-
icantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accide. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.
Tyre sealant may leak out when the filler hose is unscrewed.
▶ Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of the sealed tyre.
▶ Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor.
The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle.
▶ Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-the-shop and have the tyre changed there.
▶ Have the tyre sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
▶ Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap for values.
▶ To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.
text_image
Diagram of a car dashboard with labeled parts, showing dial indicator and control panel▶ To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure
release button ⑨ next to pressure gauge ⑩.
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for example:
- when braking
- in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. Do not drive any further. Always
have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Further information about ABS (▷ page 66) and ESP® (▷ page 71).
WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-water and seek medical attention at once.
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when jump-starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Electrostatic charge is created, for example:
• by wearing synthetic-fibre clothing
• by friction between clothing and the seat
- if you pull or push the battery across carpet or other synthetic materials
- if you rub the battery with a cloth
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
- Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
- Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
- It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.
- When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
- It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads.
- Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off
battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once.
Environmental note
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system.
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the Service Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information.
! Always have work on the batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery yourself, please observe the following:
- secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
- switch the ignition off.
- first, disconnect the negative terminal, followed by the positive terminal.
The transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery.
After the work has been completed, firmly reinstall the battery and the cover of the positive terminal.
Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion
vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power.
If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if the battery was discharged, you will have to:
Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
- set the clock (see the Digital Owner's Manual) On vehicles with a multimedia system, the time is set automatically.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing; in particular, gloves, an apron and a face mask.
reset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (▷ page 107).
Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Charging the battery
Only use battery chargers with a maximum harging voltage of 14.8 V.
Keep children at a safe distance.
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
WARNING
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries that have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged.
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vein. In such cases, have the battery disconnected a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommend by Mercedes-Benz. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a len
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for long period of time.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-start connection point.
When you park the vehicle, remove the key do not require any electrical consumers. The
The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (▷ page 309).
▶ Open the bonnet.
▶ Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (▷ page 309).
led. Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
for information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.
If the warning and indicator lamps do not light up on the instrument cluster when temperatures are low, it is probably because the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. and The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Keep away from fire and naked flames. Do not lean over the battery. Never charge the battery if it is still fitted to the vehicle, unless you are using a battery charger that has been tested approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. This device permits charging of the battery while it is in
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not leave the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once.
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a rise of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or space are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
- Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
- Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
- It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectir and disconnecting a battery.
- When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
- It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads.
- Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter.
If the indicator and warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points:
- The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
- Vehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust syst are cold.
- Jump-starting may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
- Use only jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
- If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.
- Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
• The jump leads are not damaged.
- Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery.
- The jump leads cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
▶ Firmly depress the parking brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps on the instrument cluster must off. When using the key, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (▷ page 133).
▶ Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc.
▶ Open the bonnet.
text_image
Diagram of automotive battery wiring connections with numbered components and a close-up of the engine compartment showing labeled parts.Position number ⑥ identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.
▶ Slide cover ① of positive terminal ② in the direction of the arrow.
- Connect positive terminal ② on your vehicle to positive terminal ③ of donor battery ⑥ using the jump lead, always beginning with positive terminal ② on your own vehicle first.
▶ Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
Connect negative terminal ④ of donor battery ⑥ to earth point ⑤ of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery ⑥ first.
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes.
▶ First, remove the jump leads from earth point ⑤ and negative terminal ④, then from positive clamp ② and positive terminal ③. Each time, begin at the contacts on your own vehicle first.
▶ Close cover ① of positive clamp ② after removing the jump leads.
▶ Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at qualified specialist workshop.
Towing away and tow-starting
Important safety notes
WARNING
Safety-relevant functions are restricted or not available if:
• the engine is not running.
- the brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning
- the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system is malfunctioning.
If your vehicle is towed, significantly greater force may be required to steer the vehicle or to brake. There is a risk of an accident.
In such circumstances, use a towing bar.
Make sure that the steering is moving freely before towing.
WARNING
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the:
- towing eye may be torn off
- car/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged.
! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. The automatic transmission may otherwise switch to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door which could damage the transmission.
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 335).
When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:
- when towing away
- in a car wash
! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar to t towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer to hitch. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope:
- Secure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles.
- Make sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope, the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed?
- Only secure the tow cable to the towing ^a eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hit
- Observe the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance a distance so that the tow rope does not sag.
- Do not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.
Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing.
It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed.
The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you:
- cannot turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
- cannot shift the automatic transmission to position N
In the event of damage to the electrical system
If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's on-board electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (▷ page 309).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer.
Deactivate the automatic locking feature before towing the vehicle (▷ page 86). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
Deactivate tow-away protection (▷ page 78) before the vehicle is towed away.
Fitting/removing the towing eye
Fitting the towing eye
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe may be extremely hot. There is a risk of burning when removing the rear cover.
Do not touch the exhaust tail pipe. Use extreme caution when removing the rear cover.
natural_image
Front view of a white car with a mesh grille and a magnified inset showing a blue arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side profile with a magnified inset showing a blue arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front grille with a highlighted circular component and a blue arrow pointing to a detail (no text or symbols)
text_image
e ② P88.60-2401-31Mercedes-AMG vehicles
The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear under the covers.
▶ Remove the towing eye from the vehicle to kit (▷ page 301).
▶ Pull cover ① out of the bumper in the direction of the arrow by inserting your fingers into the recess.
▶ Press the mark on cover ② inwards in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Remove cover ② from the opening.
▶ Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it.
Removing the towing eye
▶ Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.
▶ Position cover ① on top of the bumper and press it in at the bottom until it engages.
▶ Attach cover ② to the bumper and press until it engages.
▶ Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (▷ page 311).
The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or f
passenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that
automatic transmission stays in position N when towing away the vehicle, you must observe the following points:
▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (▷ page 134).
▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the parking brake.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps (▷ page 112).
▶ Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition
In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination swit
as usual. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again.
Towing the vehicle away with the axle raised
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be towed with the rear axle raised. The car/trailer combination may otherwise swerve or even overturn.
Transporting the vehicle
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission
text_image
lock. P60.00-3081-31! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axles must be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged.
All vehicles
You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it.
▶ Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position e, N.
As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
▶ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position P.
▶ Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
▶ Secure the vehicle.
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.
If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transport on a transporter or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical tem
Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged.
If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift automatic transmission to position N, you must
provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (▷ page 309).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter trailer.
Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.
When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.
The fuses in your vehicle disconnect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail.
Tow-starting (emergency engine starting)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. The transmission may otherwise be damaged.
You can find information on "Jump-starting under (▷ page 309).
Electrical fuses
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with specified fuses of the correct amperage.
Before replacing a fuse
Observe the important safety notes (▷ page 315).
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Switch off all electrical consumers.
▶ Make sure that the ignition is switched off (▷ page 133).
or
▶ When using the key, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (▷ page 133).
▶ Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 152).
All indicator lamps on the instrument cluster must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
- fuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel
- fuse box in the luggage compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are in the fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is in the vehicle to which is located in the stowage compartment under the luggage compartment floor (▷ page 301).
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Fuse box in the engine compartment
Observe the important safety notes (▷ page 315).
WARNING
When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet.
text_image
Technical diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components and a magnified inset view▶ Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off.
▶ Open the bonnet (▷ page 287).
▶ Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
▶ To open: take lines ① out of the guides.
▶ Move lines ① to one side.
▶ Open retaining clamps ②.
▶ Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
▶ To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in the cover.
▶ Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer.
▶ Fold down the cover and close clamps ②.
▶ Secure lines ① in the guides.
▶ Close the bonnet.
▶ Open the tailgate.
▶ To open: turn rotary catch ① over the cover anti-clockwise.
▶ Swing the cover down.
▶ Swing covering ② forwards.
Fuse box in the luggage compartment
Observe the important safety notes (▷ page 315).
text_image
① ② P54.15-3455-31Important safety notes
WARNING
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are us the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an accinformation on tyre pressures can be found: dent. • in the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler
Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct:
- designation
- type
When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct:
- designation
- manufacturer
- type
WARNING
A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Tyres without run-flat characteristics:
- do not drive with a flat tyre.
- immediately replace the flat tyre with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyres with run-flat characteristics:
- pay attention to the information and waiting notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics).
Further information regarding wheels and tyres can be found under "Wheel/tyre combinations" (▷ page 330).
You can ask for information regarding permitted veldeel-tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Information on tyre pressures can be found:
- in the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (▷ page 150)
• under "Tyre pressure" (▷ page 320)
Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle.
i Further information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.
Operation
Information on driving
When the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tyre pressures and adjust them prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
-When parking your vehicle, make sure not to squash the tyre. If you cannot avoid driving over obstacles, e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an obtuse angle only. You could otherwise damage the wheel rims and tyres.
Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about:
- suitability
- legal stipulations
• factory recommendations
Regular checking of wheels and tyres
WARNING
Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
Check wheels and tyres for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tyres after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as:
- cuts in the tyres
- punctures
- tears in the tyres
- bulges on the tyres
- deformation or severe corrosion on the wheels
Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width the tyre (▷ page 318). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to better ins the inner side of the tyre surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit any thing onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps specially approve for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Do not fit any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pressure monitors.
Check the pressure of all tyres regularly as was prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary (▷ page 320).
Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (▷ page 331).
The service life of a tyre depends on various tors, including the following:
- driving style
- Tyre pressure
- mileage
Notes on the tyre tread
WARNING
Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate
water. This means that on wet road surfaces,• Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular first 100 km. They reach their full perform-where speed is not adapted to suit the drivingance only after this distance.
conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
ent locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.
Minimum tyre tread depth for:
- summer tyres: 3 mm
- M+S tyres: 4 mm
For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tyre tread depth is reached.
Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.
well Pay special attention to country-specific requirements for tyre approval. These require- ments may stipulate a specific tyre type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of a specific tyre type in certain regions and areas of operation far-be highly beneficial. You can find further information regarding tyres at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops or at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
- Use only tyres and wheels of the same type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)" section (▷ page 303). - Fit only tyres of the correct size onto the wheels.
• Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for their first 100 km. They reach their full performance only after this distance.
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
- Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).
- Replace the tyres after six years at the lat regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (▷ page 331).
WARNING
Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)
M+S tyres
With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure or more tyres.
MOExtended tyres may be used only in conjunisk of accident.
tion with an activated tyre pressure loss warning
system or with an activated tyre pressure monitor and only on wheels specifically tested by 4 mm must be replaced.
Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with flat tyre (▷ page 303).
Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyre do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. writer tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
HM + S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than n40mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a
nask of accident.
^118 M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced.
At temperatures below +7 °C, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both are marked with M+S.
Only winter tyres bearing the snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESPo function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow.
tyres
Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on a wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have ted.
and on a
Wheels
If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the maximum design speed of the vehicle, affix a corresponding warning label in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (▷ page 325).
Driving with summer tyres
At temperatures below +7 °C, summer tyres elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.
Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum design speed of the vehicle using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (▷ page 161).
When you have fitted the M+S tyres:
▶ Check the tyre pressures (▷ page 320).
▶ Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (▷ page 322).
▶ Restart the tyre pressure monitor (▷ page 324).
Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (▷ page 331).
- All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): (▷ page 72)
- Mercedes-AMG vehicles: (▷ page 73)
This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving increased driving force (cutting action).
Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (▷ page 331).
Snow chains
WARNING
If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
- never fit snow chains on the front wheels
- fit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by The Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear following points in mind:
- snow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel-ty combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre combinations (▷ page 330).
- only use snow chains if the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come a road that is not snow-covered.
- local regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations i you wish to fit snow chains.
- do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h.
- on vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive a raised vehicle level if snow chains have been fitted (▷ page 171).
i You may wish to deactivate E&P then pulling away with snow chains fitted:
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure specifications
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks:
- the tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
- the tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.
- the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres including the spare wheel:
• at least every two weeks
- when the load changes
• before embarking on a longer journey
- for changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of accident.
Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tyre valve.
WARNING
If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a ty blow-out. There is a risk of accident.
- Check the tyre for foreign objects.
- Check whether the wheel is losing air or valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Environmental note
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days.
If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for that tyre size.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre pressure can be checked using the on-board computer.
If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold.
The tyres are cold:
- if the vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and
- if the vehicle has not been driven further than 1.6 km
The recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions can be found in the tyr pressure table on the fuel filler flap (▷ page 150).
Operation with an emergency spare who information on operation with an emergency spare wheel can be found in the general no the "Emergency spare wheel" section (▷ page 331).
Depending on the ambient temperature, the vehicle speed and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per
el0 °C. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions.
Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too
Operation with a trailer: the applicable va for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre pres value stated in the table inside the fuel fille
Additionally, the tyre pressure table may also state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as diff numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary; more information, please refer to the vehicle registration documents.
If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pres stated on the tyre pressure table apply for tyres approved for this vehicle.
text_image
Luffback für laste Refen 100 kPa = 1 bar Tire pressure cold lines Precision des pneus froid Precision neuméticos frios Hava basanci seguk fastik zijn 255/40 R18 285/35 R18 255/35 R19 285/30 R19 A 251-584-03 57 Warme Refen bis: Warm tires up to: Pneus echuflies (e.gvt): Windwollen: Winter tires: Pneu#t haver: Neumations colentes hasta: Scaak fastik de en facta: + 30 kPa + 4 psi Neuméticos de infelem: Kelle Lastik: + 30 kPa + 4 psi P40.00-2261-31low can:
ure shorten the service life of the tyres flap, use increased tyre damage
- cause increased tyre damage
• have a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus driving safety (e.g. aquaplan-ent mg)
The tyre pressure values given for low loads are for minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics.
However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle.
Speeds up to 210 km/h (does not apply to AMG vehicles): for speeds up to 210 km/h, the values given on the tyre pressure information label (fuel filler flap) may be reduced by 20 kPa (0.2 bar/3 psi) without a reduction in safety.
This improves the ride comfort of your vehicle; however, fuel consumption may increase slightly.
Tyre pressure loss warning system
General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressy loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation a wheel changes as a result of a loss of press a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display.
You can recognise the tyre pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator active
Restart with OK message which appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system" section (▷ page 322).
Important safety notes
The tyre pressure warning system does not want you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (▷ page 320).
The tyre pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressures. An even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system.
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the it is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres.
The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if:
- snow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres.
- road conditions are wintry.
- you are driving on sand or gravel.
- you adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates acceleration).
- you are towing a very heavy or large trailer.
- you are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof).
Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have:
• changed the tyre pressure
- changed the wheels or tyres - unfitted new wheels or tyres
Before restarting, make sure that the tyre pressures are set properly on all four tyres for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap.
The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
▶ Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (▷ page 320).
▶ Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
▲Press the ▲ or ▼ button on the steering s. wheel to select the Tyre pressure menu.
Press the OK button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the OK button.
The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Yes. Press the OK button.
The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display.
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres.
es of If you wish to cancel the restart:
▶ Press the ← button.
▶ When the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, press the ▲ or ▼ button to select CancelCancel.
▶ Press the OK button.
The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.
Tyre pressure monitor
General notes
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of air, bring the vehicle to a halt I braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres.
The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending on how
If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the warning lamp flashes or lights up, a tyre vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monpressure that is too low or a malfunction in the tor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor is indicated:
pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are fitted to all wheels.
Information on tyre pressures is shown on the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display; see illustration (example).
text_image
200 200 220 220 (kPa) P54.33-3639-31- if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is significantly too low. The tyre pressure monitor is not malfunctioning.
e. if the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears on the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (▷ page 241).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tyre pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tyre pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the fault has been rectified, the tyre pressure warn-
For further information on displaying this message, refer to the "Checking the tyre pressure electronically" section (▷ page 323).
Important safety notes
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation (▷ page 320). Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor
there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tyre pressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre pressure ( page 324). The current pres-
sures are saved as new reference values. This
will ensure that a warning message will only appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly
The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (▷ page 320).
The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a filling station using a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures.
Checking the tyre pressure electronically
of
▶ Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tyre pressure.
▶ Press the OK button.
The current tyre pressure for each wheel be displayed in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message appears.
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the pressure values to the individual wheels is no possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active display message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored.
After an emergency spare wheel has been fitted the system may still display the tyre pressure the removed wheel for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is fitted is no the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
Warning messages of the tyre press monitor
If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tyres, a warning message shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tyre pressure warning lamp then lights up:
- If the Please correct tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre is too low. The tyre pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises.
- If the Check tyre(s) message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre has dropped significantly. The tyres must be checked.
- If the Warning tyre defect message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre has dropped suddenly. The tyres must be checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tyres" section (▷ page 241).
tyre pressures are displayed in the correct positions.
wRestarting the tyre pressure monitor
When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. However, you can also set reference values manually as described here. The tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure values.
Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating of conditions.
Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (▷ page 320).
Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tyre pressure.
Press the OK button.
The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure for the individual tyres or the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message.
Press the ▼ button.
The Use current pressures as new reference values message appears in the multifunction display.
you wish to confirm the restart:
▶ Press the OK button.
The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display.
After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
If on you wish to cancel the restart:
If the position of the wheels are interchanged on you wish to cancel the restart: the vehicle, the tyre pressures may be displayed. Press the button. in the wrong positions for a short time. After a The tyre pressure values stored at the last few minutes of driving, this is rectified and the restart will continue to be monitored.
Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor
| Country | Radio type approval number |
| Argentina | MW2433AH-12337GG4H-12338 |
| Brazil | 2770-12-8001Model: MW2433A0381-13-8001Model: GG4 |
| Abu Dhabi | TRA, Registered NOER0092100/12 |
| Dubai | TRA, Registered NOER0099792/12TRA, Registered NOER0076990/11Dealer NO: DA0047074/10 |
| Jordan | Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitterType Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2012/114Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4433.92 Mhz.Type Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2012/190Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4Type Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2011/158Type Number: LPD |
| Morocco | MR7319 ANRT 2012/11/07/2012MR7672 ANRT 2012/23/11/2012MR6706 ANRT 2011 |
| Moldova | 1024 |
| Philippines | No: ESD-1206394CNo: ESD-1306871C |
| Serbia | И 011 12 |
| Country | Radio type approval number |
| Singapore | Compliance with IDA Standard DA- 103365 |
| South Africa | TA-2012/719TA-2012/1540TA-2011/1370 |
Changing a wheel
Flat tyre
You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (▷ page 302). Information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre can be found under "Breakdown assistance" (▷ page 303).
Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tyre, the emergency spare wheel is fitted according to the description under "Fitting a wheel" (▷ page 326).
Interchanging the wheels
WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident.
Interchange front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions.
! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel.
Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components.
Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Fitting a wheel" section (▷ page 326).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres ▶ Open the driver's door.
differ depending on the operating conditions. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pat-This is the same as the key having been tern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typi-removed.
cally wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre.
On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Ensure that the direction rotation is maintained.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (▷ page 322) or the tyre pressure monitor (▷ page 324).
Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle (▷ page 301).
of Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with tyre-changing tools. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Necessary tyre-changing tools may include, for example:
Direction of rotation
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aqua planing. These advantages can only be gained if Centring pin the tyres are fitted corresponding to the direc- tion of rotation. Securing the
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates correct direction of rotation.
- Jack
- Wheel chock
Wheel wrench
ifCentring pin
Securing the vehicle against rolling away
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel.
Fitting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
▶ Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
▶ Apply the parking brake.
▶ Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "normal" level is selected (▶ page 171).
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
text_image
① pol, es
natural_image
Mechanical bracket with blue arrow indicating force or direction (no text or symbols)
natural_image
Close-up of a black automotive component with blue arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)
natural_image
Metal bracket component with mounting holes, labeled P40.10-6374-31 (no other text or symbols visible)If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit (▷ page 301).
The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to safeguard the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel.
▶ Fold both plates upwards ①.
or-Fold out lower plate ②.
▶ Insert the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate ③.
natural_image
Side profile of a silver-colored sedan car with visible suspension and front wheel (no text or symbols)▶ Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagnally opposite the wheel you wish to change
Raising the vehicle
WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height.
• make sure that the distance between the underside of the tyres and the ground does not exceed 3 cm.
- never place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle.
• do not lie under the vehicle.
- do not start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
- do not open or close a door or the tailgate while the vehicle is raised.
go make sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Vehicles with light-alloy wheels and hub caps: the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap.
text_image
the ck- ok e: P40.10-66 13-31Observe the following when raising the vehicle:
- to raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised.
- the jack is designed only to raise and hold vehicle for a short time while a wheel is bei
changed. It is not permissible to use it to form maintenance work under the vehicle.
- avoid changing the wheel on uphill and down hill slopes.
- before raising the vehicle, safeguard it from rolling away by applying the parking brake at positioning wheel chocks. Do not release the parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
- the jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
- do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
To remove: take socket ② and wheel wrench ③ from the vehicle tool kit (▷ page 301).
▶ Position socket ② on hub cap ①.
▶ Position wheel wrench ③ on socket ②.
using wheel wrench ③, turn hub cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.
beTo fit: before fitting, check hub cap ① and the wheel area for dirt and clean if necessary.
Put hub cap ① in position and turn until it is the right position.
▶ Position socket ② on hub cap ①.
Attach wheel wrench ③ to socket ② and tighten hub cap ①.
The tightening torque must be 25 Nm.
i Note that the hub cap should be tightened ato the specified torque of 25 Nm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the hub cap fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
natural_image
Close-up of a car wheel rim with a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)
natural_image
Two identical illustrations of a person in dynamic poses, one with a blue X mark and the other with a vertical line (no text or symbols)▶ Using wheel wrench ③, loosen the bolts on Make sure that the base of the jack is positive the wheel you wish to change by about one tioned vertically under the jacking point. full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
natural_image
Side profile of a Mercedes-Benz Wagon car with two blue arrows indicating upward motion (no text or symbols on the car itself)Turn crank ⑥ clockwise until jack ⑤ sits completely on jacking point ④. The base of the jack must lie evenly on the ground.
▶ Turn crank ⑥ until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground.
Removing a wheel
! Mercedes AMG vehicles with ceramic-brake disc: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and have a second person
The jacking points are located just behind the assist you. Alternatively, you can use a sec-front wheel arches and just in front of the rearond centring pin. wheel arches (arrows).
text_image
④ ⑤ ⑥ P40.10-6731-31▶ Position jack ⑤ at jacking point ④.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened.
natural_image
Close-up of a car tire mounted on a lift, showing the wheel and suspension mechanism (no text or symbols visible)▶ Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.
▶ Screw centring pin ① into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
▶ Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
▶ Remove the wheel.
Fitting a new wheel
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
- Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.
- Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cent-ring pin and push it on.
- Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.
▶ Unscrew the centring pin. ▶ Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.
▶ Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel (▷ page 332). Only then lower the vehicle.
WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.
It is imperative to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (▷ page 325).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.
! Mercedes AMG vehicles with ceramic-brake disc: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and have a second person assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin.
natural_image
Close-up of a car tire with blue arrows indicating direction of motion or repair, next to a mechanical device (no text or symbols visible)Lowering the vehicle
WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.
! Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The rim could otherwise be damaged.
▶ Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly off the ground.
Place the jack to one side.
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 P40.10-6565-31▶ Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (① to ⑤). The specified tightening torque is 130 Nm.
▶ Turn the jack back to its initial position.
▶ Check the air pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust accordingly.
Observe the recommended tyre pressure (▷ page 320).
▶ Stow the jack and the rest of the tyre-change accessories other than those tested and tool kit in the load compartment again. approved.
If you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor: al ted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors.
Wheel and tyre combinations
You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Ber specifically for your vehicle.
These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or E ^® Sand are marked as follows:
• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
- MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics)
- MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variation could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. The could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and approved.
Further information about wheels, tyres and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on -retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz is cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded in tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage.
Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases.
The recommended tyre pressures can be found and the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see (▷ page 320). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold.
Notes on the vehicle equipment - always fit the vehicle:
- with tyres of the same size across an axle (left/right)
- with the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres)
Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)" section (▷ page 303).
Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
WARNING
The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fitting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
To prevent hazardous situations:
- Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.
- Never fit more than one spare wheel/emergency spare wheel if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced.
- Only use a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel briefly if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced.
- Do not switch off ESP
- Have the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel in question replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre type are correct.
When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h.
Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels.
Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel.
If you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor: for a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. The value displayed for the position where the emergency spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/collapsible emergency spare wheel
Opening the stowage well
text_image
① P68.00-7406-31General notes
You can ask for information regarding permitted emergency spare wheels at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
You should regularly check the pressure of all your tyres, including the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (▷ page 320). The value on the wheel is valid.
An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel.
The emergency spare wheel can be found in stowage well under the luggage compartment floor.
^ed Lift the luggage compartment floor upwards ( page 273).
Remove stowage space ①.
Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
text_image
① ② ③ P68.00-7405-31▶ Turn stowage tray ② anti-clockwise and remove it along with vehicle tool kit tray (
▶ Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel ③.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in "Fitting a wheel" section (▷ page 326).
Removing the collapsible emergency spare wheel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
text_image
① ② P68.00-7390-31The emergency spare wheel can be found in stowage well under the luggage compartment floor.
▶ Lift the luggage compartment floor upwards (▷ page 273).
▶ Reach into cutout ① in the tool holder an it up.
▶ Remove collapsible emergency spare wheel ②.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in "Fitting a wheel" section (▷ page 326).
Stowing a used collapsible emergency spare wheel
! Only place the collapsible emergency spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle.
Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible emergency spare wheel. Otherwise, it will not fit in the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
▶ Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
▶ Using the rear side of the valve cap, unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release the air.
i Fully deflating the tyre may take a few minutes.
▶ Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
▶ Screw the valve cap back on.
▶ Remove the protective film from the vehicle tool kit and put it over the collapsible emergency spare wheel.
▶ Stow the collapsible emergency spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel well under the luggage compartment.
Inflating the collapsible emergency spare wheel
! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged.
Do not operate the tyre inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the tyre inflation compressor label and on the tyre sealant bottle.
▶ Mount the collapsible emergency spare wheel as described (▷ page 326).
the The collapsible emergency spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated.
▶ Remove the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the luggage compartment floor (▷ page 301).
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 P40.10-6712-31▶ Pull connector ④ and the hose out of the housing.
▶ Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible emergency spare wheel.
▶ Screw union nut ① of the hose onto the valve.
▶ Make sure on/off switch ⑤ of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0.
▶ Insert connector ④ into a 12 V socket (▷ page 279) in your vehicle.
▶ Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (▷ page 133).
▶ Press on/off switch ⑤ on the tyre inflation compressor to I.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is shown on pressure gauge ③.
▶ Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure. The specified tyre pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on/off switch ⑤ on the electric air pump to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off.
▶ Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
▶ If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press release valve button ② until the correct tyre pressure has been reached.
▶ Unscrew union nut ① on the hose from the valve.
▶ Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible emergency spare wheel valve again.
▶ Stow connector ④ and the hose in the lower section of the tyre inflation compressor.
▶ Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle.
Information on technical data
The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles v optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Vehicle electronics
Tampering with the engine electronics
! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated.
Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters)
WARNING
If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the vehicle electronics, e.g.:
- if the RF transmitter is not connected to exterior aerial
- the exterior aerial has been fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always with connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.
! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed.
In particular, the following conditions must be complied with:
- only approved wavebands may be used.
- observe the maximum permissible output in these wavebands.
- only approved aerial positions may be used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields.
Observe the notes on operating mobile phones (▷ page 280).
The following aerial positions may be used for the correct installation of RF transmitters:
text_image
e of an ① ② ② P82.70-7721-31Approved aerial positions
① Rear roof area
② Rear wings
On the rear wings, it is recommended that you position the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles - "EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF transmitters.
Comply with the legal requirements for add-or parts.
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic fitti
Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing.
Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values:
| Waveband Maximum | transmission output |
| Short wave3-54 MHz | 100 W |
| 4 m waveband74-88 MHz | 30 W |
| 2 m waveband144-174 MHz | 50 W |
| Trunked radio/Tetra380-460 MHz | 10 W |
| 70 cm waveband400-460 MHz | 35 W |
| Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G) | 10 W |
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)
text_image
the wing P00 10-5509-31▶ Open the front right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate ①.
① Vehicle manufacturer
② Place of manufacture
③ut Date of manufacture
④ Vehicle model
⑤ VIN
The following can be used in the vehicle without Date of manufacture restrictions: ④ Vehicle model
- RF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
- RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380–410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra)
• Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands:
- Trunked radio/Tetra
- 70 cm waveband
- 2G/3G/4G
text_image
Mercedes-Benz XXXX XXXXXXXXXX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TYP: XXX PZ: 4 1.0% Made in Germany 1- 2- XXXX kg XXXX kg XXXX kg XXXX kg XXXX kg P00.10-5916-31Example: vehicle identification plate (vehicles with a trailer tow hitch - all other countries)
① Vehicle manufacturer
② EU type approval number (for certain countries only)
③ VIN
④ Maximum gross vehicle weight (kg)
⑤ Maximum gross weight of vehicle combination (kg) (for specific countries only)
⑥ Permissible front axle load (kg)
⑦ Permissible rear axle load (kg)
⑧ Paint code
The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is sample data. This data is different for every vehicle and may differ from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
text_image
① ② P00.10-55 10-31▶ Fold floor covering ① upwards. VIN ② can be seen.
▶ Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmosthe container: position. • MR-Freigabe
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle tification plate (▷ page 335).
Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the crank-case. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop.
Service products and capacities
Important safety notes
WARNING
Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed original container. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.
Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner.
for Service products include the following: fuels
n- exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. AdBlue®
- lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
- coolant
- brake fluid
• windscreen washer fluid
• climate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section.
You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container:
• MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
• MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other identifications, for example:
• 0 W-30
• 5 W-30
- 5 W-40
You can obtain further information at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Fuel
Important safety notes
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling.
WARNING
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health! There is a danger of injury.
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into cont with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
- Wash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately.
- If you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thoroughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention.
- If fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting.
- Change any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately.
Tank capacity
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment.
| Model Total capa- | city |
| iCLS 500 | 80.0 l |
| CLS 500 4MATIC | |
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles | 66.0 l |
| All other models | 59.0 l or 80.0 l |
| Model Of which | reserve fuel |
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles | Approx. 14.0 l |
| Models with59.0 Itotal capacity | Approx. 8.0 l |
| Models with80.0 Itotal capacity | Approx. 9.0 l |
Petrol
Fuel grade
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Only refuel using unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON, which conforms to the European standard EN 228 or E DIN or an equivalent specification.
Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system.
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system.
! Do not use the following:
• E85 (petrol with 85% ethanol)
• E100 (100% ethanol)
• M15 (petrol with 15% methanol)
• M30 (petrol with 30% methanol)
• M85 (petrol with 85% methanol)
• M100 (100% methanol)
• petrol with additives containing metal
- diesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle.
Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the labe on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded petrol in emergencies with an octane rating of 91 RON.
Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel consumption, and the engine power output is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full throttle.
If no fuel other than petrol with 91 RON or a lower grade is available, you should have the vehicle adapted to run on this fuel at a qualified specialist workshop.
CLS 400, CLS 400 4MATIC
Only refuel using sulphur-free unleaded petrol with at least 95 ROZ, that conforms to the European standard EN 228 or E DIN or an equivalent specification.
You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the emission control system.
In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced.
Additives
In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced.
Information on refuelling (▷ page 149).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol wit at least 98 ROZ, that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification.
You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine.
Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for us with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
!Can Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. More information about recommended additives can be
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands containing additives.
The quality of the fuel available in some countries may be lacking, leading to a build-up of residue in the fuel injection system. In this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Always read the notes and observe the mixing ratios specified on the container.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 95 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. As much as possible, avoid driving at full throttle.
Diesel
Fuel grade
WARNING
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel.
Low outside temperatures
In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the EN 590 standard defines various climate-dependent temperature categories. Malfunctions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifications outlined in EN 590. At unusually low outside temperatures, it is possible that the flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from warmer areas may not be suitable for operation in colder climatic conditions.
When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that conforms to the European standard EN 590 is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does not conform to EN 590 can lead to increased v as well as damage to the engine and exhaust system.
i Further information on country-specific fuel properties and fuel types with low-temperature resistance can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling stations.
! Do not use the following:
- marine diesel
- heating oil
- bio-diesel
- vegetable oil
- petrol
- paraffin
- kerosene
Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and not use any special additives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur.
AdBlue®
Important safety notes
Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling AdBlue (▷ page 336).
AdBlue ^® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
- non-toxic
do colourless and odourless - non-flammable
If you open the AdBlutank, small amounts of
data
! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: inammonia vapour may be released.
countries outside the EU, only use low sulphur. Euro diesel with a sulphur content of under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged. Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and are particularly irritating to the skin, mucous membranes and eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. You
! Vehicles without a diesel particle filter: may also experience coughing and watery eyes. in countries where only diesel fuel with a high no not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be sulphur content is available, you will need to be released. Only fill the AdBlueank in well-ven-carry out your vehicle's oil change at short-tilated areas.
intervals. More information about the interval for oil change can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the la on the petrol pump, ask the filling station sta Information on refuelling (▷ page 149).
Low outside temperatures
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approximately -11 °C. The vehicle is delivered from the factory equipped with an AdBlue preheating system. Winter operation can thus be guaranteed even at temperatures below -11 °C.
Additives
! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not use additives with AdBlue and do not dilute AdBlue® with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-treatment system.
Purity
! Impurities in AdBlue®(e.g. due to other service products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to:
• increased emission values
- damage to the catalytic converter
- engine damage
- malfunctions in the BlueTE®exhaust gas aftertreatment system
Assuring the purity of AdBlues particularly important with respect to avoiding malfunction in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
If AdBlue ^® is pumped out of the AdBlue ^® tank, e.g. during repair work, do not use this fluid refill the tank. The purity of the fluid can no ger be guaranteed.
Capacities
| Model Total capacity | |
| All models | 25.5 l |
| Engine oil |
General notes
text_image
Mercedes-Benz Oil recommended N18.00-2176-31The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard.
Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz-approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines.
Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB-Freigabe" or "MB-Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51.
You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5.
sThe table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.
You can find the correct values for your model with the help of the VIN on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 335).
Petrol engines: in certain countries, different engine oils can be used, provided that the maintenance intervals are reduced. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print.
| Petrol engines MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval | |
| All models | 229.5 |
| Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval | |
| CLS 220 d (218.303) | |
| All models | 228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52 |
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
If the engine oils listed in the table are comply with the important safety notes for ser-available, you may top up with the following vice products when handling brake fluid engine oils until the next oil change: (▷ page 336).
- Petrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B3
• Diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3
It may be used only once and the topping quantity must not exceed 1.0 l.
Capacities
The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.
Missing values were not available at the time going to print.
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement of ment confirmed in the Service Booklet.
| Model Replacement | amount |
| CLS 220 d(218.903) | |
| CLS 350 dCLS 350 d 4MATIC | 8.0 l |
| CLS 500CLS 500 4MATIC | |
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles | 8.5 l |
| All other models | 6.5 l |
Additives
! Do not use any additives with the engine This could damage the engine.
Brake fluid
WARNING
The brake fluid continuously absorbs moisture from the air. This results in the boiling point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form when the brakes are subjected to a heavy load. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescribed intervals.
Coolant
Important safety notes
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you top up the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (▷ page 336).
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/anti-corrosion additive. It is responsible for the following:
• anti-corrosion protection
- antifreeze protection
- raising the boiling point
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in t correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation will be approximately 130 °C.
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should:
- be at least 50%. This will protect the engin cooling system against freezing down to approximately -37 °C.
- not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 °C). Heat will otherwise not be dissited as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.
WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying nozzles could become blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. The level sensor may otherwise give a false reading. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (the page 336).
At temperatures above freezing:
▶ Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit.
Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing:
▶ Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir.
i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round.
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fi with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection.
i The coolant is checked at every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.
Windscreen washer system
Important safety notes
WARNING
If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine of the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the neck.
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
• the heights specified may vary as a result of:
- tyres
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
- optional equipment reduces the maximum payload
- vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 335)
- for certain countries only: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY).
These documents are delivered with your vehicle.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB
Dimensions and weights
text_image
① ② P72.20 335 1-31You can find the correct values for your mode with the help of the VIN on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 335). Missing values were not available at the time going to press.
| Model | 11 Opening height | 22 Maximum headroom |
| CLS 250 d (218.903) | ||
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles | 1994 mm | |
| CLS 500 CLS 500 4MATIC | 1994 mm | 1835 mm |
| CLS 400 4MATIC (218.967) | 1979 mm | 1820 mm |
| All other mod-els | 1974 mm | 1815 mm |
Missing values were not available at the time going to press.
| CLS 250 d | |
| Vehicle length | |
| Vehicle height | |
| Vehicle width including exterior mirrors | |
| Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors | |
| Wheelbase | |
| CLS 250 d | |
| Maximum roof load | |
| Maximum boot load | |
| Mercedes-AMG vehicles | |
| Vehicle length | 4971 mm |
| Vehicle height | 1432 mm |
| Vehicle width including exterior mirrors | 2075 mm |
| Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors | 1881 mm |
| Wheelbase of | 2874 mm |
| Maximum roof load | 100 kg |
| Maximum boot load | 100 kg |
| All other models | |
| Vehicle width including exterior mirrors | 2075 mm |
| Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors | 1881 mm |
| Wheelbase | 2874 mm |
| Maximum boot load | 100 kg |
| Model Vehicle | length | |||
| CLS | 400 | 4MATIC | (218.967) | 4955 mm |
| CLS | 500 | |||
| CLS | 500 | 4MATIC | ||
| ofAll other models | 4953 mm | |||
| Model Vehicle | height | |||
| CLS | 400 | 4MATIC | (218.967) | 1424 mm |
| CLS | 500 | 1433 mm | ||
| CLS | 500 | 4MATIC | ||
| All other models | 1419 mm | |||
| Model Maximum | roof load | |||
| CLS 400 4MATIC (218.967) | ||||
| All other models | 100 kg | |||
| Trailer tow hitch |
| Trailer loads |
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)
Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (▷ page 202). Missing values were not available at the time going to print.
| Model Permissible | trailer load |
| CLS 400 (218.965) | |
| CLS 400 4MATIC (218.967) | |
| All other models | 2100 kg |
The drawbar load is not included in the trailer load.
Missing values were not available at the time of going to print.
| Model Maximum | drawbar load |
| CLS 400 (218.965) | |
| CLS 400 4MATIC (218.967) | |
| All other models | 84 kg |
However, the actual drawbar load must not exceed the value given on the trailer tow hitch identification plates. In addition, a distinction must be made between towing a trailer and using a carrier system on the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch.
Note also that the payload and rear axle load are reduced by the actual drawbar load.
You can attach carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements, to the ball coupling. The maximum payload of 75 kg applies when carrier systems are attached to the ball coupling.
Permissible trailer load, unbraked
Towing a trailer is not possible with all mode. For further information, see (▷ page 202).
Missing values were not available at the time going to print.
| Model Permissible | trailer load |
| CLS 400 (218.965) | |
| CLS 400 4MATIC (218.967) | |
| All other models | 750 kg |
Maximum drawbar load
! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do not use a noseweight of less than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload.
Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (▷ page 202).
Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer
Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (▷ page 202).
You can find the correct values for your model with the help of the VIN on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 335).
Missing values were not available at the time of going to print.
| Model Permissible | axle load | ||
| CLS | 400 | (218.965) | |
| CLS | 400 | 4MATIC (218.967) | |
| ^ss CLS | 220 | d | 1365 kg |
| ^a OLS | 250 | d | 1385 kg |
| ^s CLS | 250 | d 4MATIC | 1390 kg |
| CLS | 350 | d | 1410 kg |
| ^ls CLS | 350 | d 4MATIC | 1415 kg |
| CLS | 400 | (218.961) | 1370 kg |
| CLS | 400 | 4MATIC (218.968) | 1370 kg |
| CLS | 500 | 1400 kg | |
| CLS | 500 | 4MATIC | 1400 kg |
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
http://www.daimler.com
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrasse 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany